- Manuals
- Brands
- Seat
- Crossover SUV
- Ateca
- Owner's Manual
Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual PDF
OWNERS MANUAL
Ateca
57 50 12 72 0B C
In gl
s 5
75 01
27 20
B C
( 11
.1 6)
A te
ca
In gl
s (
11 .1
6)
SEAT recommends SEAT GENUINE OIL
SEAT recommends Castrol EDGE Professional
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer- tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the ATECA range, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modied depend- ing on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertis- ing.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment tted in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- cept when otherwise indicated.
The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function- alities better. It does not replace the instruc- tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.
The equipment marked with an aster- isk* is tted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow- ing page.
Important warnings on a given page
Detailed contents on a given page
General information on a given page
Emergency information on a given page
Audiovisual material on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- mation on safety. They warn you about possi- ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- vant information concerning environmental protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio- nal information.
This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:
1. The essentials
2. Safety
3. Emergencies
4. Operation
5. Tips
6. Technical data
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly nd the information you require.
Foreword This Instruction Manual and its correspond- ing supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- serve its value.
For safety reasons, always note the informa- tion concerning accessories, modifications and part replacements.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the vehicle.
You can access the information in this man- ual using:
Thematic table of contents that follows the manuals general chapter structure.
Visual table of contents that uses graphics to indicate the pages containing essential information, which is detailed in the corre- sponding chapters.
Alphabetical index with many terms and synonyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety informa- tion concerning the passenger's front air- bag page 82, Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag.
Related videos
Always connected page 115 Autonomous driving page 201 page 220 page 229
Smart solutions page 224 page 236 page 251
Handsfree page 120 page 127 page 261
Vehicle lights page 135
Table of Contents
Table of Contents The essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Interior view (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 59 How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Why wear a seat belt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 73 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Vehicle tool kit anti-puncture kit* . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Manual unlocking/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 88 Tow-starting and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Change the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 106 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 112 System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Rear lid (luggage compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys- tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Adjusting the seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . 146 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 150 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Auxiliary heater (additional heater)* . . . . . . . . 165 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Start and stop the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Engine management and exhaust gas purifica- tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
3
Table of Contents
Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Front Assist system including City emergency braking and pedestrian monitoring* . . . . . . . . 211 Lane Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis- tance (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Traffic sign detection system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 235 Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Parking System Plus (ParkPilot)* . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Parking aid (ParkPilot)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Area view system (Top View Camera)* . . . . . . . 251 Rear Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Accessories and modifications to the vehi- cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Vehicle exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
4
The essentials
Exterior view
1 page 10 2 page 9 3 page 49
4 page 49 5 page 59 6 page 12
7 page 11 8 page 53
5
The essentials
Exterior view
1 page 50 2 page 49 3 page 51
4 page 52 5 page 49 6 page 51
7 page 51 8 page 155
9 page 55 10 page 54
6
The essentials
Interior view (left-hand drive)
1 page 9 2 page 24 3 page 25 4 page 37
5 page 39 6 page 14 7 page 26 8 page 30
9 page 27 10 page 25 11 page 44 12 page 16
13 page 41 14 page 24 15 page 12 16 page 14
17 page 11 18 page 52 19 page 12 20 page 13
7
The essentials
Interior view (right-hand drive)
1 page 25 2 page 37 3 page 25 4 page 16
5 page 27 6 page 26 7 page 30 8 page 39
9 page 24 10 page 9 11 page 12 12 page 52
13 page 11 14 page 44 15 page 41 16 page 14
17 page 12 18 page 13 19 page 24 20 page 14
8
The essentials
How it works
Unlocking and locking
Doors
Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons.
Fig. 2 Driver door: central locking switch.
Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the key
Locking: press the Fig. 1 button.
Locking the vehicle without activating the anti-theft system: Press the Fig. 1 button for a second time within 2 seconds.
Unlocking: press the Fig. 1 button.
Unlocking the rear lid: Hold down the Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second.
Locking and unlocking with the central lock- ing switch
Locking: press the Fig. 2 button. None of the doors can be opened from the outside. The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
Unlocking: press the Fig. 2 button.
in Description on page 116
page 116
page 9, page 10
Unlocking and locking the driver's door
Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.
If the central locking system should fail to op- erate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system page 116.
Unfold the vehicle key blade page 117.
Insert the key blade into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover up- wards.
Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.
9
The essentials
Special Characteristics
The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will not be triggered page 116.
After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft page 116.
Manual locking of the doors with no lock cylinder
Fig. 4 Locking the door manually.
If the central locking system should fail to work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder will have to be locked separately.
A mechanical locking device (only visible when the door is open) is provided on the front passenger door.
Pull the cap out of the opening.
Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side).
Once the door has been closed it can no lon- ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- rior door handle once to unlock and open the door.
Rear lid
Fig. 5 Rear lid: handle
Fig. 6 Rear lid: button to close rear lid.
The rear lid opening system operates electri- cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres- sure on the handle Fig. 5.
To lock/unlock, press the button or button Fig. 1 on the remote control key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if it is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
Opening and closing
Opening the rear lid: Exert slight pressure on the handle. The rear lid opens automati- cally.
Closing the rear lid: hold one of the han- dles on the inner trim and close it by sliding down, or press the button on the rear lid* Fig. 6.
10
The essentials
in Tailgate automatic lock on page 129
page 127
page 11
Manual release of the rear lid
Fig. 7 Luggage compartment: access to man- ual release.
Fig. 8 Luggage compartment: emergency re- lease.
The rear lid can be released from the inside.
Remove the lid using the key blade as a lever Fig. 7.
To unlock the rear lid, press the lever in the direction of the arrow using the key blade Fig. 8.
Bonnet
Fig. 9 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.
Fig. 10 Cam under the bonnet
Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under the dashboard Fig. 9 1 .
Lift up the bonnet. Press the release catch under the bonnet upwards Fig. 10 2 . The arrester hook under the bonnet is released.
11
The essentials
The bonnet can be opened. Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- signed for this in the bonnet.
in Work in the engine compartment on page 287
page 286
Electric windows*
Fig. 11 Detail of the driver door: controls for the windows.
Opening the window: Press the button.
Closing the window: Pull the button.
Buttons on the driver door
Window on the front left door
Window on the front right door
Window on the rear left door
1
2
3
Window on the rear right door
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.
in Electric opening and closing of windows on page 130
page 130
Panoramic roof*
Fig. 12 On the interior roof lining: sunroof button.
Opening: press button C backwards.
Closing: press button D forwards.
To tilt open: press the rear part of button B .
Lowering: press the front part of button A .
4
5 in Introduction on page 132
page 132
Before driving
Manually adjusting the front seats
Fig. 13 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.
Forward/back: pull the lever and move the seat forwards or backwards.
Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.
Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
Lumbar support: move the lever to the re- quired position.
in Manual adjustment of seats on page 146
1
2
3
4
12
The essentials
Electric adjustment of the driver's seat*
Fig. 14 Driver's seat: electric seat adjust- ment.
Adjusting the lumbar support: press the button according to the desired position.
Seat up/down: Press the button up/down. To adjust the front of the seat cushion, press the front of the button up/down. To adjust the rear of the seat cushion, press the rear of the button up/down.
Seat forwards/backwards: press the but- ton forwards/backwards.
Backrest further upright/further reclined: press the button forwards/backwards.
in Electric driver's seat adjustment* on page 147
A
B
C
Adjusting the head restraints
Fig. 15 Front seat: adjustment of the head re- straint.
Grab the sides of the head restraints with both hands and push upwards to the desired position. To lower it, repeat the same action, pressing the 1 button on the side.
in Correct adjustment of front head restraints on page 68
page 68, page 147
Adjustment of the seat belt
Fig. 16 Positioning and removing the seat belt buckle.
13
The essentials
Fig. 17 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side.
To adjust the seat belt around your should- ers, adjust the height of the seats.
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body.
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel- vis.
page 71
page 73
Seat belt tensioners
During a collision, the seat belts for the front seats and for the window seats in the rear1)
will tighten automatically.
The tensioner can be triggered only once.
in Service and disposal of belt ten- sioners on page 75
page 74
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 18 Detail of the driver door: control for the exterior mirror.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to the corresponding position:
Turning the knob to the desired posi- tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired.
Depending on the equipment fitted on the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated according to the outside temperature.
Folding in mirrors.
in Adjusting the exterior rear view mirrors on page 146
page 145
Adjusting the steering wheel
Fig. 19 Lever in the lower left side of the steering column.
L/R
1) Depending on version/market. 14
The essentials
Adjusting the position of the steering wheel: Pull the Fig. 19 1 lever down, move the steering wheel to the desired posi- tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.
in Adjusting the steering wheel po- sition on page 66
Airbags
Front airbags
Fig. 20 Driver airbag located in steering wheel.
Fig. 21 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Fig. 20 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Fig. 21. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.
When the driver and front passenger airbags are deployed, the covers remain attached to the steering wheel and dash panel, respec- tively Fig. 20 Fig. 21.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants ad- ditional protection for the head and chest in
15
The essentials
the event of a severe frontal collision in Front airbags on page 77.
Their special design allows the controlled es- cape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
page 77
Deactivating the front passenger front airbag
Fig. 22 Front passenger front airbag switch.
To deactivate the front passenger front air- bag:
Open the front passenger door.
Insert the key blade into the slot provided in the deactivation switch.
Approximately of the length of the key blade remains inserted (the maximum).
Turn the key blade, changing its position to . Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en- sure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go.
Finally, check the control lamp on the in- strument panel where it shows the following should appear .
in Front passenger front airbag switch on page 81
page 80
Knee airbag*
Fig. 23 On the driver side: location of the knee airbag
Fig. 24 On the driver side: radius of action of the knee airbag.
The knee airbag is located on the driver side below the dash panel Fig. 23. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.
The area framed in red (deployment area) Fig. 24 is covered by the knee airbag when it is deployed. Objects should never be placed or mounted in this area.
page 77
16
The essentials
Side airbags*
Fig. 25 Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig. 26 Illustration of completely inflated side airbags on the left side of the vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger seat backrests Fig. 25. The locations are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper region of the backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision in Side airbags* on page 77.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these airbags provide maximum protection.
page 77
Head-protection airbags*
Fig. 27 Location of head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
Fig. 27 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- protection airbag system gives the vehicle occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side collision in Curtain airbags* on page 78.
in Curtain airbags* on page 78
17
The essentials
Child seats
Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag
Fig. 28 Airbag stickers - version 1: on the front passenger's sun visor and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .
Fig. 29 Airbag stickers - version 2: on the front passenger's sun visor and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .
A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the pas- senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame.
in Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag on page 83
page 82
18
The essentials
Securing child seats
Fig. 30 On the rear seats: Possible installations for the child seat.
Figure Fig. 30 A shows the basic child re- straint system mounting using lower retain- ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig- ure Fig. 30 B shows the child restraint system mounting using the vehicle seat belt.
The seat belt may be used to secure univer- sal type child seats to the vehicle seats marked with a U in the table below.
In the passenger seat without height ad- justment: It is necessary to place the passen- ger seat in its rearmost position1).
In the passenger seat with height adjust- ment: It is necessary to place the passenger seat in its rearmost and highest position1).
To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child seat in the back in the case that it goes opposite to the direc- tion of the car. In the case of front facing re- straint systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet.
To adjust the passenger seat to accommo- date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a perfect position, adjust the passenger back- rest as far forward as possible1).
If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- led, in which the method of attachment to the car is through the seat belt and support bracket, it should never be installed in the central rear seat as the ground clearance is lower than in other places and the support bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- ciently stable.
1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when us- ing or installing child seats.
19
The essentials
Weight group
Seating position
Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)
airbag on airbag off
Group 0 to 10 kg X U* U U
Group 0+ to 13 kg X U* U U
Group I 9 to 18 kg X U* U U
Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF* UF UF
Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF* UF UF
a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.
It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration.
Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.
Acceptable for front-facing universal-cat- egory child restraint systems approved for this mass group.
X:
U:
UF:
Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest po- sition.
*: The systems include the child restraint sys- tem mounting with an upper retaining strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on the seat.
in Safety instructions on page 83
ISOFIX and Top Tether child seat mounting system*
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system.
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others,
they are secured to the rear floor. The ISO- FIX rings are located between the rear seat backrest and the seat cushioning Fig. 31. The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear part of the backrests of the rear seats (be- hind the seat backrest or in the boot) Fig. 32.
To understand the compatibility of the "ISO- FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table below.
20
The essentials
The body weight permitted and information regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-
bel on child seats with universal or semi- universal certification.
Weight group Size class Electrical equip-
ment
Vehicle Isofix positions
Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
Baby carrier F ISO/L1 X X X X
G ISO/L2 X X X X
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 X X IL X
D ISO/R2 X X IL X
C ISO/R3 X X IL X
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 X X IL X
C ISO/R3 X X IL X
B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X
B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X
A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---
Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX uni- versal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group.
Suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRSs) listed in the attached
IUF:
IL:
list. This relates to ISOFIX CRSs that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.
X:
21
The essentials
in Safety instructions on page 83
Retaining the child seat with the ISOFIX/i-Size ISOFIX System
Fig. 31 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.
You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- turer's instructions.
Remove the protective caps of the ISO- FIX/iSize rings by placing a finger in the hole and pulling up Fig. 31.
Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX re- taining rings until the child seat can be heard to engage securely. If the child seat is equip- ped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it
to the correspondent ring Fig. 32. Observe the manufacturer's instructions.
Pull on both sides of the child seat to en- sure that it is properly anchored.
Child seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* attachment system are available from Techni- cal Services.
Vehicle i-Size positions
Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X
Valid position for front-facing and rear- facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.
Invalid position for child restraint sys- tems approved under ECE R129.
i-U
X:
22
The essentials
Attachment of the child seat with the Top Tether* retainer straps
Fig. 32 Position of the Top Tether rings on the back of the rear seat.
Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- cle anchor point, located at the back of the rear seat backrest and provide greater re- straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce for- ward movements of the child seat in a crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufac- turer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.
Securing the Top Tether* to the an- chorage point
Fig. 33 Retainer strap: adjustment and as- sembly according to the Top Tether belt.
Securing the retainer strap
Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer strap.
Place the belt under the head restraint of the back seat Fig. 33 (depending on the in-
structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the head restraint if necessary).
Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest Fig. 32.
Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- facturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
Loosen the strap following the manufactur- er's instructions.
Push the lock and release it from the an- choring support.
in Safety instructions on page 83
23
The essentials
Starting the vehicle
Ignition lock
Fig. 34 Ignition key positions.
Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- tion and start the engine.
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove the key from the ignition and turn the wheel until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi- tion in order to remove the key. If necessary, press the locking key on the selector lever and release it again.
Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key into the ignition and turn it at the same time as the steering wheel in the direction indica- ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steering wheel, it may be because it is locked.
Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow plugs reheating
Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2
position.
Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1
position.
Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on.
Starting the engine
Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all the way down and move the gearbox lever in- to neutral.
Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the P position or into N.
Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not press the accelerator.
Start-Stop System*
When you stop and release the clutch pedal, the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. The ignition remains switched on.
in Switching the ignition on and starting the engine with the key on page 170
page 169
Lights and visibility
Light switch
Fig. 35 Dash panel: light control.
Turn the switch to the required position Fig. 35.
Sym- bol
Ignition switched off
Ignition is switched on
Fog lights, dipped beam and side lights off.
Daylight running lights switched on.
The Coming home and Leaving home guide lights may be switched on.
Automatic control of dipped beam and daytime running light.
Side light on. Daylight running lights switched on.
Dipped beam head- light off
Dipped beam switched on.
24
The essentials
Front fog lights: move the switch to the first position, from positions , or .
Rear fog light: move the switch completely from positions , or .
Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or turn it to the position.
in Side light and dipped beam head- light on page 135
page 135
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 36 Turn signal and main beam lever
More the lever to the required position:
Right turn signal: Right-hand parking light (ignition switched off).
1
Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light (ignition switched off).
Main beam switched on: Control lamp lit up on the instrument panel.
Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is pushed. Control lamp lit up.
Lever all the way down to switch it off.
in Turn signal and main beam lever on page 136
page 135
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 37 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn- ing lights.
Switched on, for example:
When approaching a traffic jam
2
3
4
In an emergency
The vehicle has broken down
When towing or being towed
in Hazard warning lights on page 140
page 139
Interior lights
Fig. 38 Detail of headliner: front interior light- ing.
Knob Function
Switches interior lights off.
Switches interior lights on.
25
The essentials
Knob Function
Switches door contact control on (central po- sition). The interior lights come on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is opened or the key is removed from the igni- tion. The lights go off a few seconds after all the doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the ignition is switched on.
Turning the reading light on and off
Ambient light*: light guide on door panel. Lighting can be selected from 8 possible col- ours via the menu and the SETUP func- tion button.
page 142
Windscreen wipers and window wiper blade
Fig. 39 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper
More the lever to the required position:
0 Windscreen wiper off.
1
Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control Fig. 39 A adjust the interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
More the lever to the required position:
2 Slow wipe.
3 Continuous wipe.
4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold the lever down for more time to increase the wipe frequency.
5
Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer function is activated by pushing the lever forwards, and simultaneously the wind- screen wipers start.
6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.
7 The rear window wash function is activa- ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously.
page 143
page 62
26
The essentials
Easy Connect
CAR menu settings (Setup)
Fig. 40 Easy Connect: Main menu Fig. 41 Easy Connect: CAR menu
To select the settings menus, press the Easy Connect button and the SETUP function button.
The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.
Switch the ignition on.
If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.
Press the system's button and then the function button Vehicle Fig. 40, or the system's button to go to the menu Vehi- cle Fig. 41.
Press the function button SETUP to open the menu Vehicle settings Fig. 41.
To select a function in the menu, press the desired button.
Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.
When the function button check box is activa- ted , the function is active.
Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing the BACK menus.
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
ESC system Deactivating the traction control system (ASR) or selecting the Sport mode of the electronic stability control (ESC Sport)
page 177
27
The essentials
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
Tyres Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) page 299
Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value page 303
Driver assistance
ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation/deactivation: Gear programme, temporary distance from the vehicle in front (dis- tance level)
page 201
Front Assist (ambient traffic monitoring system) Activation/deactivation: monitoring system, advance warning, distance warning display page 211
City emergency braking func- tion Activation/deactivation of the City emergency braking function. page 215
Lane Assist (system warning you if you leave the lane) Activation/deactivation: Lane Assist, Adaptive Lane Guidance page 217
Detection of traffic signs The following functions can be activated and deactivated: Display of traffic signs on the multi-function display Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer)
page 232
Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation page 235
Parking and ma- noeuvring ParkPilot Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound settings,
adjust volume page 248
Vehicle lights
Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and control lighting, ambient door lighting, footwell lighting page 142
Coming home/Leaving home function Start time for Coming home function, start time for Leaving home function
page 138 page 139
Motorway light Activation/deactivation page 140
Mirrors/wind screen wipers
Mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking page 14, page 145
Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing page 26
Opening and clos- ing
Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function page 131
Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation page 116
28
The essentials
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
Multifunction display
Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consumers, ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed, speed- ing warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data from start, restore data total calculation
page 30
Date and time Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time for- mat, set the date, date format
Units Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption
Service Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service page 36
Factory settings All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mir- rors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display
in CAR menu on page 112
page 112
29
The essentials
Driver information system
Introduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, the multifunction display can only be operat- ed with the steering wheel buttons.
The number of menus displayed on the in- strument panel will vary according to the ve- hicle electronics and equipment.
A specialised workshop will be able to pro- gramme or modify additional functions, ac- cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it will not be possible to read the menus. Some warning messages can be confirmed and made to disappear with the windscreen wiper lever button or the multifunction steering wheel button.
The information system also provides the fol- lowing information and displays (depending on the vehicle's equipment):
Driving data page 34 Vehicle status
MFD from departure MFD from refuelling MFD total calculation
Assist systems table on page 31 Activate/deactivate Lane Assist Reverse gear*
Navigation Booklet Navigation system
Audio Booklet Radio or Booklet Naviga- tion system
Telephone Booklet Radio or Book- let Navigation system
Vehicle table on page 31
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury.
Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving.
Using the menus on the instrument panel
Fig. 42 Windscreen wiper lever: control but- tons.
Fig. 43 Right side of multifunction steering wheel: control buttons.
The driver information system is controlled with the multifunction steering wheel buttons Fig. 43 or with the windscreen wiper lever Fig. 42 (if the vehicle is not equipped with multifunction steering wheel).
30
The essentials
Enabling the main menu
Switch the ignition on.
If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, press button Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen wiper lever or button on the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 43.
If managed from the windscreen wiper lev- er: to display the main screen page 31 or to return to the main menu from another menu hold down the rocker button Fig. 42
2 .
If managed from the multifunction steering wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. To go from point to point in the main menu, press button or several times Fig. 43.
Select a submenu
Press the rocker switch Fig. 42 2 on the windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 43 until the desired option ap- pears marked on the menu.
The selected option is displayed between two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is displayed on the right:
To consult the submenu option, press but- ton Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen wiper lever or button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel Fig. 43.
Making changes according to the menu
With the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi- function steering wheel, make the desired changes. To increase or decrease the values more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.
Mark or confirm the selection with button Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen wiper lever or button on the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 43.
Button for the driver assistance sys- tems*
Fig. 44 On the turn signal and main beam headlight lever: button for the driver assis- tance systems
With the turn signal and main beam head- light lever button, you can activate or deacti- vate the driver assistance systems displayed
in the Assist systems menu page 192.
Activate or deactivate a driver assistance system
Briefly press the button Fig. 44 in the di- rection of the arrow to open the menu As- sist systems.
Select the driver assistance system and ac- tivate or deactivate it page 30. A mark indi- cates that driver assistance system is switch- ed on.
Selection menu
Menu Function
Driving data
Information and possible configurations of the multifunction display (MFD) page 34, page 27.
Assist systems
Information and possible configurations of the driver assistance systems page 33, page 27.
Naviga- tion
Information instructions from the activa- ted navigation system: when a route guid- ance is activated, the turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed. The appear- ance is similar to the Easy Connect sys- tem. If route guidance is not activated, the di- rection of travel (compass) and the name of the street along which you are driving are shown Booklet Navigation system.
31
The essentials
Menu Function
Audio Station display on the radio. Track name on the CD. Track name in Media mode Booklet Ra- dio or Booklet Navigation system.
Tele- phone
Information and possible configurations of the mobile phone preinstallation Booklet Radio or Booklet Navigation system.
Vehicle status
Display of the current warning or informa- tion texts and other system components, depending on the equipment page 112.
Outside temperature display
When the outside temperature is below +4C (+39F), the ice crystal symbol (warning of risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this symbol flashes and then it remains lit until the outside temperature rises above +6C (+43F) in Indications on the display on page 109.
When the vehicle is at a standstill or when travelling at very low speeds, the tempera- ture displayed may be higher than the true outside temperature as a result of the heat produced by the engine.
The temperatures measured range from -40C to +50C (-40F to +122F).
Gear-change indicator
Fig. 45 Instrument panel: gear-change indica- tor (manual gearbox).
A gear change will be recommended if the gear you are in is not the most economical choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it means that you are already in the most eco- nomical gear.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The following display symbols Fig. 45 mean:
Change to a higher gear: the suggested gear appears to the right of the current gear when a higher gear is recommended.
Change to a lower gear: the suggested gear appears to the left of the current gear when a lower gear is recommended.
The gear recommendation may occasionally skip a gear (2nd 4th).
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*
The display is only visible in tiptronic mode page 183.
The following display symbols mean:
Shifting up a gear
Shifting down a gear
CAUTION
The gear-change indicator is intended to help save fuel, but it is not intended to recom- mend the right gear for all driving situations. In certain situations, only the driver can choose the correct gear (for instance when overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or towing a trailer).
Note
The display disappears from the instrument panel when you press the clutch pedal.
32
The essentials
Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
Fig. 46 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: front left door open; D: right rear door open.
When the ignition is switched on or when driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are open will be indicated on the instrument pan- el display, and, as applicable, this will be in- dicated audibly. The display may vary accord- ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.
Illustra- tion
Key to Fig. 46
A Do not continue driving! The bonnet is open or is not properly closed page 286.
B Do not continue driving! The rear lid is open or is not properly closed page 127.
C, D Do not continue driving! A vehicle door is open or is not properly closed page 116.
Warning and information messages
The system runs a check on certain compo- nents and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults in the operation are displayed on the screen using red and yellow symbols and messages on the instrument panel display ( page 110) and, in some cases, with audible warnings. The display may vary ac- cording to the type of instrument panel fitted.
Priority 1 warning (red symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous in Warning and control lamps on page 111 ! Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa- ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.
Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct levels may cause damage to the vehicle! in Warn- ing and control lamps on page 111 Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces- sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
Informative text
Information relating to different vehicle processes.
Submenu Assist systems
Assist systems menu
Function
ACC Adaptive cruise control (ACC) dis- play page 201.
Front Assist Switching the monitoring system on and off page 211.
Lane Assist* Switching the Lane Assist system on or off page 219.
Detection of traffic signs
Display of traffic signs page 232:
Fatigue de- tection*
Switching the fatigue detection on or off (pause recommendation) page 235.
33
The essentials
Driving data
Memory
The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ- ent values for the journey and the consump- tion.
Changing between display modes on the MFD
In vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: Press the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever Fig. 42.
Vehicles with a multifunction steering wheel: turn the thumbwheel Fig. 43.
Multifunction display memory
The multifunction display is equipped with three memories that work automatically: MFD from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD total calculation. On the screen display, you can read which memory is currently dis- played.
Toggle between memories with the ignition on and the memory displayed: Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever
or the button of the multifunction steering wheel.
Menu Function
MFD from departure
Display and storage of the values for the journey and the consumption from when the ignition is switched on to when it is switched off. If the journey is continued in less than 2 hours after the ignition is switched off, the new data is added to the data already stored in the memory. The memory will automatically be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours.
MFD from refuelling
Display and storage of the values for the journey and the consumption. By refuelling, the memory will be erased automatically.
MFD total calcula- tion
The memory records the values for a specific number of partial trips, up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or 9999 km, depending on the model of instrument panel. On reaching either of these limitsa), the memory is automati- cally erased and starts to count from 0 again.
a) It varies according to the instrument panel version.
Erasing a memory manually
Select the memory that you wish to erase.
Hold the button of the multifunction steering wheel or the button of the multi- function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec- onds.
Personalising the displays
In the Easy Connect system you can adjust which of the possible displays of the MFD can be shown on the instrument panel display with the button and the function button SETUP page 112.
Data summary
Menu Function
Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption dis- play operates throughout the jour- ney, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the vehicle stopped, in litres/hour.
Average fuel consumption
After turning on the ignition, aver- age fuel consumption in li- tres/100 km will be displayed after travelling about 100 metres. Other- wise horizontal lines are displayed. The value shown is updated approxi- mately every 5 seconds. ACT*: Depending on the equip- ment, number of active cylinders.
Operating range
Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled with the fuel re- maining in the tank, assuming the same style of driving is maintained. This is calculated using the current fuel consumption.
Travelling time
This indicates the hours (h) and mi- nutes (min) since the ignition was switched on.
34
The essentials
Menu Function
Distance covered
Distance covered in km (m) after switching on the ignition.
Average speed
The average speed will be shown af- ter a distance of about 100 metres has been travelled. Otherwise hori- zontal lines are displayed. The value shown is updated approximately ev- ery 5 seconds.
Digital dis- play of speed
Current speed displayed in digital format.
Speed warn- ing at --- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph
If the stored speed is exceeded (be- tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 - 155 mph), an audible warning is given together with a visual warn- ing.
Detection of traffic signs
The traffic signs detected are dis- played.
Oil tempera- ture
Updated engine oil temperature dig- ital display
Coolant tem- perature gauge
Digital display of the current temper- ature of the liquid coolant.
Storing a speed with the speed warning
Select the display Speed warning at --- km/h (--- mph) Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel to store the current speed and activate the warning.
To switch system on: adjust to the desired speed within 5 seconds using the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc- tion steering wheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds.
The speed is stored and the warning activa- ted.
To switch system off: press the but- ton or . The stored speed is de- leted.
Engine oil temperature display
Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel
Press the rocker switch Fig. 42 2 until the main menu appears. Enter into Driving data. With the button 2 move to the oil temperature gauge.
Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
Enter the submenu Driving data and turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera- ture display appears.
The engine reaches its operating temperature when in normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80C (180F) and 120C (250F). If the engine is required to
work hard and the outside temperature is high, the engine oil temperature can in- crease. This does not present any problem as long as the warning lamps table on page 40 or table on page 40 do not appear on the display.
Additional electrical appliances
Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*: Press the rocker switch Fig. 42 2 until the main menu appears. Enter into the section Driving data. With the rocker switch, move to the display Convenience con- sumers.
Operation with the multi-function steering wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to Driving data and enter with OK. Turn the thumbwheel to the right until the Conven- ience consumers display appears.
In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur- rent sum of all the additional appliances.
Saving tips
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in conditions that increase fuel consumption. Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- cations appear automatically only with the ef- ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will disappear automatically.
35
The essentials
If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately after it appears, press any button on the windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- ing wheel*.
Note
If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af- ter you switch the ignition on again.
The saving tips do not appear in all situa- tions, but rather with a large separation of time.
Speed warning device
The speed warning device warns the driver when they have exceeded the pre-set speed limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning signal sounds, and the warning lamp and the driver message Speed limit excee- ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the instrument panel. The warning lamp switches off when reducing speed below the stored maximum limit.
Speed warning programming is recommen- ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi- mum speed, such as when travelling in a country with different speed limits or for a maximum speed for winter tyres.
Setting speed limit warning
You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.
Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP
> control button Driver Assistant > Speed warning.
Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but- ton Systems or else Vehicle systems > Driver assistant > Speed warning.
The warning limit can be set from 30 to 240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.
Note
Please bear in mind that, even with the speed warning function, it is still important to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the speedometer and to observe the legal speed limits.
The speed limit warning function in the ver- sion for some countries warns you at a speed of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set speed limit.
Service intervals
The service interval indication appears on the instrument panel display Fig. 117 3 .
SEAT distinguishes between services with en- gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. In- spection).
In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service intervals are already pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- vals are determined individually. Thanks to technological progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. Because of the technology used by SEAT, with this service you only need to change the oil when the ve- hicle so requires. To calculate this change (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are consid- ered. The advance warning first appears 20 days before the date established for the cor- responding service. The kilometres (miles) remaining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The current service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, only lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
When the Service date is approaching, when the ignition is switched on a Service remind- er is displayed.
Vehicles without text messages: a span- ner will be displayed on the instrument panel plus an indication in km.
The kilometres indicated are the maximum number of kilometres that can be travelled until the next service. After a few seconds,
36
The essentials
the display mode changes. A clock symbol appears and the number of days until the next service is due.
Vehicles with text messages: Service in --- km or --- days will be shown on the instrument panel display.
Service due
When the service date is due, an audible warning is given when the ignition is switch- ed on and the spanner displayed on the screen flashes for a few seconds .
Vehicles with text messages: Service now will be shown on the instrument panel dis- play.
Reading a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current service notification can be read:
Press and hold the button Fig. 117 4
for more than 5 seconds to consult the serv- ice message.
When the service date has passed, a minus sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- ometres or days.
Vehicles with text messages: the following message is displayed: Service --- km (miles) or --- days ago.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT dealership, the display can be reset as fol- lows:
Switch off the ignition, press and hold but- ton Fig. 117 4 .
Switch ignition back on.
Release the 4 Fig. 117 button and press it again for the next 20 seconds.
Note
The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper
lever, or OK on the multifunction steering wheel.
In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to cal- culate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be cor- rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum service intervals permitted in the Book- let Maintenance Programme.
If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehi- cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea- son we recommend that the service interval display be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.
Cruise control
Operating the cruise control system (CCS)*
Fig. 47 On the left of the steering column: switches and controls for operating the CCS
Fig. 48 On the left of the steering column: third lever to operate the CCS.
37
The essentials
Operation of the turn signal lever
Switching on the CCS: Move switch Fig. 47 1 to . The system is on. If no speed has been programmed, the system will not control it.
Activating the CCS: Press button Fig. 47 2 in the area. The current speed is
memorised and controlled.
Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move switch Fig. 47 1 to or push the brake. The cruise control system is switched off temporarily.
Reactivating the CCS: Press button Fig. 47 2 in . The memorised speed is saved and controlled again.
Increasing stored speed during CCS regula- tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac- celerates until the new stored speed.
Reducing stored speed during CCS regula- tion: press button 2 in to lower the speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced until reaching the new stored speed.
Switching off the CCS: Move switch Fig. 47 1 to . The system is disconnec- ted and the memorised speed is deleted.
Operation using the third lever
Switching on the CCS: move the third lever to Fig. 48. The system switches on but it does not control the speed as no speed has been programmed.
Activating the CCS: press the Fig. 48 button. It memorises and maintains the cur- rent speed.
Temporarily switching off the CCS: move the lever to Fig. 48 and release it or
press the brake pedal. The cruise control sys- tem is switched off temporarily.
Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to Fig. 48 and release it. The memo- rised speed is saved and controlled again.
Switching off the CCS: move the third lever to position Fig. 48. The system is dis- connected and the memorised speed is de- leted.
in Operation on page 197
page 197
38
The essentials
Warning lamps
On the instrument panel
Fig. 49 Instrument panel, on dash panel
Red warning lamps
Central warning lamp: additional information on the instrument pan- el display
Parking brake on. page 174 page 176
Do not continue driving! The brake fluid level is too low or there is a fault in the brake system.
Lit up or flashing: Do not continue driving! Fault in the steering.
page 277
Driver or passenger has not fas- tened seat belt.
page 70
Use the foot brake!
Yellow warning lamps
Central warning lamp: additional information on the instrument pan- el display
39
The essentials
Front brake pads worn.
page 177
it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis- connection caused by the system.
flashes: ESC or ASR activated.
ASR manually deactivated.
page 177
ESC in Sport mode.
ABS faulty or does not work.
Rear fog light switched on. page 135
lights up or flashes: fault in the emission control system.
page 190
it lights up: pre-heating of diesel engine. page
191flashes: fault in the diesel engine management.
fault in the petrol engine manage- ment.
page 191
lights up or flashes: fault in the steering system.
page 277
Tyre pressure too low, or fault in the tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem.
page 299
Fuel tank almost empty. page 106
Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.
page 75
Lane Assist is switched on, but not active.
page 217
Other warning lamps
Left or right turn signal.
page 135
Hazard warning lights on. page 139
Trailer turn signals. page 259
it lights up green: Auto Hold activa- ted.
page 195
it lights up green: Press the brake pedal! It blinks in green: the selector lever locking button has not engaged.
page 180
it lights up green: cruise control ac- tivated or speed limiter switched on and active. page
197it blinks in green: the speed set by the speed limiter has been excee- ded.
it lights up green: Lane Assist is switched on and active.
page 217
Main beam on or flasher on. page 135
On the instrument panel display
Fig. 50 On the instrument panel display: door open.
Do not continue driving! With the corresponding indica- tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not properly closed.
page 116 page 127 page 286
Ignition: Do not carry on driv- ing! Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too high page
290 Flashing: Fault in the engine coolant system.
40
The essentials
Do not continue driving! Engine oil pressure too low. If the warning lamp flashes, stop driving, even if the oil level is correct. Do not even run the en- gine at idle speed!
page 288
Fault in the battery. page 293
Driving light totally or partially faulty.
page 97
Fault in the cornering light sys- tem.
page 135
Diesel particulate filter blocked page 190
Level of windscreen washer fluid too low.
page 143
Flashing: Fault in the oil level de- tection. Control manually. page
288 Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.
Fault in the gearbox. page 187
Light Assist on. page 136
Immobiliser active.
Service interval display page 36
Mobile telephone is connected via Bluetooth to the original tele- phone device.
Book- let Radio or Book- let Navi- gation system
Mobile telephone battery charge meter. Available only for devices pre-installed in factory.
Freezing warning. The outside temperature is lower than +4C (+39F).
page 32
Start-Stop system activated. page 192
Start-Stop system unavailable.
Low consumption driving status page 31
On the instrument panel
Fig. 51 Warning lamp for disabling the front passenger airbag.
Front passenger front airbag is disabled ( ).
page 75
The front passenger front airbag is activated ( ).
page 75
in Warning and control lamps on page 111
page 110
Gearbox lever
Manual gearbox
Fig. 52 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox
The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever Fig. 52.
41
The essentials
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down.
Move the gearbox lever to the required po- sition.
Release the clutch.
Selecting reverse gear
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down.
With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse Fig. 52 R .
Release the clutch.
in Changing gear on page 180
page 180
Automatic gearbox*
Fig. 53 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po- sitions.
Parking lock
Reverse gear
Neutral (idling)
Drive (forward)
Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards (+) to go up a gear or backwards () to go down a gear.
in Selector lever positions on page 181
page 180
page 42
P
R
N
D/S
+/
Manual release of the selector lever
Fig. 54 Selector lever: manual release from position P.
Should the power supply be interrupted, there is a manual unlocking device located under the console of the selector lever, on the right. Releasing the selector lever re- quires a certain degree of practical skill.
Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriver blade.
Removing the cover from the selector lever
Apply the handbrake to ensure that the car does not move.
Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev- er handle.
42
The essentials
Releasing the selector lever
Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel- low unlocking tab sideways Fig. 54.
Press the interlock button on the selector lever and move the selector lever to posi- tion N.
After carrying out the manual release, at- tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox console again.
If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis- charged battery) and the vehicle has to be pushed or towed, the selector lever must first be moved to position N, after operating the manual release mechanism.
WARNING
The selector lever may be moved out of posi- tion P only when the handbrake is firmly ap- plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi- cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi-
cle could otherwise start to move inadver- tently after shifting the selector lever out of position P - accident risk!
43
The essentials
Air conditioning
How does Climatronic* work?
Fig. 55 In the centre console: Climatronic con- trols
To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.
The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.
1
Temperature The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: Turn the control to adjust the temperature
2
Fan The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.
3
Air distribution The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .
4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides.
44
The essentials
Defrost function
The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind- screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3C (+38F) and the fan runs at maximum output.
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Air distribution towards the footwell.
Upward air distribution.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.
Air recirculation
Seat heating buttons
Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.
Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distri- bution adjusts automatically to the position .
When the warning light for button lights up, the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or the temper- ature control on the passenger side
Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press the button: the warning lamp on the button will light up .
Press the configuration button : the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.
Switching off Turn the blower control to the position or press the button.
in Introduction on page 160
page 160
45
The essentials
How does the manual air conditioning work*?
Fig. 56 In the centre console: Manual air condi- tioning controls
To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.
The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.
1
Temperature Turn the control to adjust the temperature
2
Fan Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off Level 6: maximum fan level.
3
Air distribution Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.
Defrost function
The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.
46
The essentials
Air distribution towards the footwell.
Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.
Air recirculation
Seat heating buttons
Maximum cooling power. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to the position
in Introduction on page 160
page 160
How does the heating and the fresh air system work?
Fig. 57 In the centre console: heating system and fresh air controls.
47
The essentials
To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.
The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.
1
Temperature Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool or dehumidify the air
2
Fan Setting 0: blower, heating and fresh air systems switched off Level 6: maximum fan level
3
Air distribution Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.
Defrost function
The airflow is directed at the windscreen.
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.
Air distribution towards the footwell.
Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes
Air recirculation page 163
Seat heating buttons
in Introduction on page 160
page 160
48
The essentials
Fluid Level control
Filling capacities
Tank level
Petrol and diesel engines
50 l, of which, approx. 7 l reserve
Four-wheel drive vehicles: 55 l, of which approx. 8.5 l reserve
Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid container
Versions without headlight washer system
approx. 3 litres
Versions with headlight washer system
approx. 5 litres
Fuel
Fig. 58 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automatically using the central locking.
Opening the fuel tank cap
Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the left side.
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap Fig. 58.
Closing the fuel tank cap
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go.
Close the lid.
in Filling up on page 280
page 280
Oil
Fig. 59 Engine oil dipstick.
Fig. 60 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
The level is measured using the dipstick loca- ted in the engine compartment page 286.
The oil should leave a mark between zones A and C . It should never exceed zone A .
Zone A : Do not add oil. 49
The essentials
Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level in that zone.
Zone C : Add oil up to zone B .
Topping up engine oil
Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.
Add oil slowly.
At the same time, check the level to ensure you do not add too much.
When the oil level reaches at least zone B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.
Oil properties
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible service interval
VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible service in- terval (LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without Particu- late filter (DPF)
VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW 507 00
Diesel. Particulate Filter En- gines (DPF). With or without flexible service interval (with and without Long- Life)a)
VW 507 00
a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
in Changing engine oil on page 290
page 288
Coolant
Fig. 61 Engine compartment: coolant expan- sion tank cap.
The coolant tank is located in the engine compartment page 286.
When the engine is cold, replace the coolant when the level is below .
Coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25C (-13F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- ses the boiling point of the coolant.
To protect the cooling system, the percentage of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- tection is not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- tifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- corrosion protection in Topping up cool- ant on page 291. The mixture of G13 with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significant- ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and should therefore be avoided in Topping up coolant on page 291.
50
The essentials
in Topping up coolant on page 291
page 290
Brake fluid
Fig. 62 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- ervoir cap
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- gine compartment page 286.
The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni- cal Service.
in Topping up brake fluid on page 292
page 291
Windscreen washer
Fig. 63 In the engine compartment: wind- screen washer reservoir top.
The windscreen washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment page 286.
To top up, mix water with a product recom- mended by SEAT.
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.
in Checking and topping up the windscreen washer reservoir on page 292
page 292
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compart- ment page 286. It does not require
maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.
in Important safety warnings for handling a vehicle battery on page 294
page 293
51
The essentials
Emergencies
Fuses
Fuse location
Fig. 64 Left hand drive: fuse box cover in the dash panel on the driver's side. Right hand drive: fuse box behind the glove com- partment.
Fig. 65 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover
Underneath the dash panel (left hand drive)
The fuse box is located behind the storage compartment Fig. 64 .
Behind the glove compartment (right hand drive)
The fuse box is located behind the glove compartment Fig. 64 . To access the fuse box page 94.
In the engine compartment
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover Fig. 65.
Identifying fuses situated below the dash panel by colours
Colour Amp rating
Black 1
Colour Amp rating
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
in Introduction on page 93
page 93
52
The essentials
Replacing a blown fuse
Fig. 66 Image of a blown fuse
Preparation
Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec- trical equipment.
Open the corresponding fuse box page 94.
Identifying a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 66.
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.
To replace a fuse
Remove the fuse.
Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size.
Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.
Bulbs
Bulbs (12 V)
Light source used for each function
Halogen headlights Type
Daytime running light/side light
LED (it cannot be re- placed)
Dipped beam headlights H7 LL
Main beam headlights H7 LL
Turn signal PY21W
Full-LED main headlights
No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs
Front fog light Type
Fog/cornering lights* H8
Rear lights Type
Brake light/tail light P21W LL
Side lights P21W LL
Turn signal PY21W LL
Rear lights Type
Retro fog light P21W LL
Reverse lights W16W
LED rear lights Type
Turn signal PY21W LL
Reverse lights W16W
The remaining functions work with LEDs
page 97
Action in the event of a punc- ture
What to do first
Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible.
Apply the handbrake.
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.
Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to position P.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
53
The essentials
Have the vehicle tool kit page 86 and the spare wheel* ready page 302.
Observe the applicable legislation for each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.).
All occupants should leave the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
WARNING
Always observe the above steps and pro- tect yourself and other road users.
If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from moving.
Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ture kit
Fig. 67 Standard representation: contents of the anti-puncture kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Sealing the tyre
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use the Fig. 67 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface.
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously Fig. 67 10 .
Screw the inflator tube Fig. 67 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break automatically.
Remove the lid from the filling tube Fig. 67 3 and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve.
With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant bottle.
Remove the bottle from the valve.
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ing the tool Fig. 67 1 .
Inflating the tyre
Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube Fig. 67 5 into the tyre valve.
Check that the air bleed screw is closed Fig. 67 7 .
Start the engine and leave it running.
Insert the connector Fig. 67 9 into the vehicle's 12-volt socket page 152.
Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 67 8 .
Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes.
Disconnect the air compressor.
If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre.
54
The essentials
Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve.
Repeat the inflation process.
If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and request assistance from an authorised technician.
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes page 88.
in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on page 86
page 86
Changing a wheel
Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 68 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.
An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Towline anchorage
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Crank handle for jack
Jack*
Hook for extracting the central wheel trims*
Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.
in What to do first on page 54
page 86
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Central wheel trim*
Fig. 69 Correct position of the central wheel trim for steel wheels.
The central trims must be removed for access to the wheel bolts.
Removing
Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools) to one of the chambers of the central wheel trim.
Insert the box spanner through the hook, supporting it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim.
Fitting
Fit the central wheel trim onto the wheel. The lower part of the SEAT emblem letter S should be in line with the inflation valve Fig. 69 1 .
Firmly press upon the central trim until it locks in with an audible click.
55
The essentials
Note
There is also a marking on the rear side of the central wheel trim showing the correct align- ment with the inflation valve.
Wheel bolt caps*
Fig. 70 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.
Removal
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools Fig. 68 7 ) over the cap until it clicks into place Fig. 70.
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Fig. 71 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter.
Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.
Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools) onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.
Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto the adapter as far as it will go.
Remove the wheel bolt page 56.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the anti- theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a new adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi- cial Service, indicating the code number.
Loosening the wheel bolts
Fig. 72 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.
Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti- theft wheel bolts page 56.
Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn to the left Fig. 72 (arrow). To apply the re- quired torque, hold the wheel brace at the end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel bolt, carefully apply pressure with one foot on the end of the box spanner. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip.
WARNING
Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be- fore raising the vehicle with the jack*. If not, an accident may occur.
56
The essentials
Lifting the vehicle
Fig. 73 Crossbar: marks.
Fig. 74 Strut: mounting the jack on the vehi- cle.
Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slip- pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- ping .
Find the support point on the strut (sunken area) closest to the wheel to be changed Fig. 73.
Turn the jack* crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the tab 1 Fig. 74 is below the housing provi- ded.
Align the jack* so that tab 1 grips onto the housing provided on the strut and the mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- spect to the support point 1 .
Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground.
WARNING
Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant risk of injury.
Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles could slip, with the consequent risk of injury.
Only mount the jack* on the support points designed for this purpose on the strut, and always align the jack correctly. If you do not, the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad- equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!
The height of the parked vehicle can change as a result of variations in tempera- ture and loading.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be raised on the cross- bar. Only place the jack* on the points de- signed for this purpose on the strut. Other- wise, the vehicle may be damaged.
Removing and fitting a wheel
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Taking off the wheel
Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box spanner and place them on a clean surface.
Take off the wheel.
Putting on the spare wheel
When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation direction, observe the instructions in page 58.
Mount the wheel.
Screw on the wheel bolts in position and tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs using the wheel brace.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
57
The essentials
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ting the wheel.
Tyres with compulsory direction of ro- tation
A directional tread pattern can be identified by the arrows on the sidewall that point in the direction of rotation. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel to guarantee optimum properties of this type of tyres with regard to grip, noises, wear and aquaplaning.
If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive with care as this means the tyre does not of- fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- ticular importance when the road surface is wet.
To return to directional tread tires, replace the punctured tyre as soon as possible and restore the obligatory direction of rotation of all tyres.
Subsequent work
Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.
Plate wheels: fit the central wheel rim again page 55.
Return all tools to their proper storing loca- tion.
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the luggage compartment page 152.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- ted tyre as soon as possible.
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- cator, adjust the pressure and store the read- ing in the radio/Easy Connect system* page 299.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- que wrench (it should be 140 Nm). Mean- while, drive carefully.
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.
Snow chains
Use
Snow chains should only be used on the front wheels.
Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufac- turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
If there is a danger of being trapped despite having mounted the chains, it is best to disa- ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC page 178, Switching on/off the ESC and ASR.
Snow chains will improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons snow chains may only be used with the following wheel rim/tyre combination.
215/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
215/55 R17 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
215/50 R18 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
Other dimensions do not allow chains
Remove any central wheel trims and the rim ring before fitting snow chains.
Remove the chains when roads are free of snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the wheels become damaged quickly and may even be rendered unusable.
58
The essentials
Emergency towing of the vehi- cle
Towing
Fig. 75 Right side of the front bumper: tow- line anchorage screwed in.
Fig. 76 Right side of the rear bumper: towline anchorage screwed in.
Towline anchorages
Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- rages.
The towline anchorages are located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment, next to the vehicle tools page 86.
Screw the towline anchorage into the screw connection Fig. 75 o Fig. 76 and tighten it with the wheel brace.
Tow rope or tow bar
The tow bar offers increased safety and a lower risk of damage.
The tow rope is recommended when there is no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does not damage the vehicle.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
The tow rope must be taut before you drive off.
Release the clutch very carefully when start- ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler- ate gently (automatic gearbox).
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In- experienced drivers should not attempt to tow.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- ways a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.
Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig- nals, windscreen wipers and windscreen washer can work. Ensure that the steering wheel is unlocked and moves freely.
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles with a manual gearbox. With an automatic gearbox, place the lever in N.
To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The brake servo does not work when the engine is switched off.
The power steering only works when the igni- tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving, provided that the battery is sufficiently charg- ed. Otherwise, it will need more force.
Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all times.
in Introduction on page 89
page 89
59
The essentials
Tow-starting
If the engine will not start, first try starting it using the battery of another vehicle page 60. You should only attempt to tow- start a vehicle if charging the battery does not work. This is done by leveraging wheel movement.
When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the catalytic converter.
Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.
Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.
Switch the ignition on.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine has started, press the clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.
How to jump start
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a dis- charged battery, the battery can be connec- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- tions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.
The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board network.
How to jump start: description
Fig. 77 Diagram of connections for vehicles without Start Stop system
Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start Stop system
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .
2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 77.
3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- hicle providing assistance B .
4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle providing the current B Fig. 77.
For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con- nect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block itself Fig. 78.
60
The essentials
5. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid metal component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the bat- tery A .
6. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on.
10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are discon- nected.
11.When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- nals.
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- onds, switch off the starter and try again after about 1 minute.
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 286.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the bat- teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af- ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explo- sion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve- hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not lean on the batteries. This could re- sult in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, oth- erwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.
61
The essentials
Changing the wiper blades
Windscreen wipers service position
Fig. 79 Wipers in service position
The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- ers are in service position Fig. 79.
Close the bonnet page 286.
Switch the ignition on and off.
Press the windscreen wiper lever down- wards briefly 4 page 26.
Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- tion.
page 88
Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades
Fig. 80 Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 81 Changing the rear wiper blade
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms
Place the windscreen wipers in the service position page 62.
Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas- tening point.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Raise the wiper arms.
Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades.
If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on page 89.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Lift and unfold the wiper arms.
Press and hold release button Fig. 80 1
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- rection of the arrow.
Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place.
Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- screen.
Changing the rear wiper blade
Raising/lowering the wiper arm.
Turn the blade slightly Fig. 81 (arrow A ).
Hold down the release button 1 while gently pulling the blade in the direction of ar- row B .
Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di- rection to the arrow B and hook into place button 1 .
62
The essentials
Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.
in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on page 89
page 88
63
Safety
Safety
Safe driving
Safety first!
WARNING
This manual contains important informa- tion about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documentation also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- cially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.
Advice about driving
Before starting every trip
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly.
Check tyre pressure.
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.
Make sure all luggage is secured page 152.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir- rors properly according to your size.
Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the head restraints in the in-use position page 68.
Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- straints according to their height.
Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts page 82.
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position. page 65.
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly. page 70.
What affects driving safety?
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers. When your concentra- tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road , for this reason:
Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone calls.
Never drive when your driving ability is im- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and accidents increases.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- dent, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
three-point seat belts,
belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats,
64
Safe driving
belt tensioners for the front seats and for the window seats in the rear1),
front airbags,
knee airbags,
side airbags in the front seat backrests,
head-protection airbags,
ISOFIX anchor points for child seats in the rear side seats with the ISOFIX system,
height-adjustable front head restraints,
rear head restraints with in-use position and non-use position
adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your pas- sengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Correct position for passengers
Correct sitting position for driver
Fig. 82 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel
Fig. 83 Correct head restraint position for the driver.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recom- mend the following adjustments for the driv- er:
Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest Fig. 82.
Move the driver's seat forwards or back- wards so that you are able to press the ac- celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled .
Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head Fig. 83.
Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- tion so that your back rests completely against it.
Fasten your seat belt securely page 70.
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat page 146.
1) Depending on version/market. 65
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel Fig. 82. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special spe- cific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus- tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- ly.
Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- ieve optimal protection.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Read the additional information carefully page 14.
WARNING
Never adjust the position of the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this could cause an accident.
Move the lever up firmly so the steering wheel position does not accidentally change during driving. risk of accident!
Make sure you are capable of reaching and firmly holding the upper part of the steering wheel: risk of accident!
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
Correct sitting position for front pas- senger
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recom- mend the following adjustments for the front passenger:
Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible .
Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- tion so that your back rests completely against it.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head page 68.
Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front passenger seat.
Fasten your seat belt securely page 70.
It is possible to deactivate the front passen- ger airbag in exceptional circumstances page 79.
Adjusting the front passenger seat page 146.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your chest and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special spe- cific modifications are necessary.
66
Safe driving
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- gered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- senger in events such as sudden braking ma- noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal pro- tection when the backrest is in an upright po- sition and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- sition!
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for rear seat passengers
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear seat bench must con- sider the following:
Sit up straight.
Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- sition page 68.
Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the rear seat.
Fasten your seat belt securely page 70.
Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children in the vehicle page 82.
WARNING
If the passengers in the rear seats are not sitting properly, they could sustain severe in- juries.
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum protection.
Seat belts can only provide optimal protec- tion when seat backrests are in an upright position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po- sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- tioning of the seat belt increases.
Examples of incorrect sitting posi- tions
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ly when the belt webs are properly posi- tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- tially reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- correct seat belt position. As the driver, you are responsible for all passengers, especially children.
Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while travel- ling .
The following list contains examples of sit- ting positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
Never stand in the vehicle.
Never stand on the seats.
Never kneel on the seats.
Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
Never lean against the dash panel.
Never lie on the rear bench.
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
Never sit sideways.
Never lean out of a window.
Never put your feet out of a window.
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot- well.
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- gage compartment.
67
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
WARNING
Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries. Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the vehicle occupants to se- vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by strik- ing a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop- er sitting position and maintain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas- sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po- sition during the trip page 65, Correct posi- tion for passengers.
Correct adjustment of front head re- straints
Fig. 84 Correctly adjusted head restraint as viewed from the front and the side.
Read the additional information carefully page 13.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- portant part of passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is, as far as possible, at the same level as the top of your head, or at the very least, at eye level Fig. 84.
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. An improper adjustment of the head restraints may cause death in an ac- cident and increase the risk of suffering inju- ries during abrupt braking actions or unex- pected manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjus- ted according to the height of the passenger.
Correct adjustment of rear head re- straints
Fig. 85 Head restraints in the correct posi- tion.
Fig. 86 Head restraint position warning label.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- portant part of the passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci- dent situations
68
Safe driving
Rear head restraints
The rear head restraints have 2 positions: use and non-use.
One position for use (head restraint raised) Fig. 85. In this position, the head re- straints are used normally, protecting pas- sengers along with the rear seat belts.
And one position for non-use (head re- straint lowered).
To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
WARNING
Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window Fig. 86.
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head re- straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!
CAUTION
Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 147.
Pedal area
Pedals
Ensure that you can always press the accel- erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
Ensure that the pedals can return unim- paired to their initial positions.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the vehicle.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operation can lead to crit- ical situations while driving.
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov- erings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could ob- struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud- den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac- celerator pedal. Risk of accident!
69
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
Seat belts
Why wear a seat belt?
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for four seats. Two front seats and two rear seats.
WARNING
Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your vehicle.
Every vehicle occupant must properly fas- ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appropriate child restraint system.
Seat belt lamp*
Fig. 87 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc- cupied and corresponding seat belt fastened display.
The control lamp illuminates to remind the driver to fasten his seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
Fasten your seat belt securely.
Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off.
Protect children by using a child seat ac- cording to the child's height and weight.
When the ignition is switched on, the control lamp in the instrument panel lights up (de- pending on the model version) if the driver or passenger have not fastened their seat belts.
An audible warning signal will sound for a few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed
of more than approximately 25 km/h (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The warning light will also flash .
The lamp goes out when the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig- nition switched on.
Rear seat belts fastened display.*
Depending on the model version, when the ignition is switched on, the seat belt status display Fig. 87 on the instrument panel in- forms the driver whether the passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. The symbol indicates that the passenger in this seat has fastened his or her seat belt.
When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis- played for approximately 30 seconds. The in- dication can be hidden by pressing the 0.0/SET button on the dash panel.
The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).
70
Seat belts
The protective function of seat belts
Fig. 88 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- den braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the proper position. They also help prevent uncontrolled movements that may result in serious injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- dent.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- gy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driv- ing around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival when involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- tion provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air- bags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on collision. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety instructions on using seat belts
Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly.
Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc- cupants must also wear the seat belts at all times, otherwise they run the risk of being in- jured.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func- tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
71
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- curely.
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- dent and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec- essary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- moved or modified in any way.
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly.
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics
Fig. 89 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently
Fig. 90 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is wearing a seat belt.
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on collision: when a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy
called kinetic energy is created both in the passengers and inside the vehicle.
The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher they are, the more energy there is to be ab- sorbed in the event of an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki- netic energy is multiplied by four.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in our example do not have their seat belts fas- tened, in the event of a collision the entire amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not
72
Seat belts
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent con- tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 89.
It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could other- wise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- danger not only themselves but also the front occupants Fig. 90.
How to properly adjust your seatbelt
Fastening and unfastening the seat belt
Fig. 91 Positioning and removing the seat belt buckle.
Fig. 92 Position of seat belt during pregnan- cy.
Read the additional information carefully page 13.
Fasten your seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click Fig. 91 A.
73
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automat- ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- dom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- ing sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is locked.
The automatic belt retractors for the front seats and for the window seats in the rear1)
are fitted with belt tensioners page 74.
Releasing the seat belt
Press the red button on the belt buckle Fig. 91 B. The latch plate is released and springs out .
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim is not damaged.
Positioning seat belts
Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- ly when they are properly positioned.
WARNING
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position
and the seat belts have been fastened prop- erly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- vere injuries in the event of an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen Fig. 92.
Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 82.
Read and observe the warnings page 71.
Seat belt tensioners
How the seat belt tensioner works
Read the additional information carefully page 14.
The seat belts for the front seats and the win- dow seats in the rear1) are equipped with belt tensioners. Sensors will trigger the belt ten- sioners only during severe head-on, lateral and rear-end collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occupants.
The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle overturns, or in accidents where no major forces act on the vehicle.
Note
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. Specialised work- shops are familiar with these regulations, which are also available to you.
Service and disposal of belt tension- ers
The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- ers or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat
1) Depending on version/market. 74
Airbag system
belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- sioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regulations, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be ob- served.
WARNING
Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- cumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts.
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- matic retractor cannot be repaired.
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a specialised workshop only.
The belt tensioners will only provide pro- tection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why is it so important to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work ef- fectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 70, Why wear a seat belt?.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the air- bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants assume a correct sitting position while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying
airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu- pant. This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis- tance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- mum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the speci- fied reference values, the front, side and/or curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in- to account that the visible damage in a vehi- cle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum- ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain criti- cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12 years old should always
75
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
travel on the rear seat. Never transport children in the vehicle if they are not restrain- ed or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further in- creased if you are struck by an inflating air- bag.
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the seat belt properly page 70.
Always adjust the front seats properly.
Description of the airbag system
Read the additional information carefully page 15.
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- al protection for the driver and passenger in combination with the seat belts.
The airbag system comprises the following modules (as per vehicle equipment):
Electronic control unit
Front airbags for driver and passenger
Knee airbag for the driver
Side airbags
Head airbag
Airbag control lamp on the instrument panel
Key-operated switch for front passenger air- bag
Control lamp to disconnect/connect the front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control lamp :
does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on
turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
the ignition is switched off
there is a minor frontal collision
there is a minor side collision
there is a rear-end collision
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 65, Correct position for passengers.
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to provide addi- tional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica- tion of fire in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air- bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be gener- alised. Some factors play an important role,
76
Airbag system
such as the properties of the object the vehi- cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- vation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec- tory and activates the respective restraint system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede- fined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous head-on collisions
Driver airbag.
Front passenger front airbag
Knee airbag for the driver.
The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous side-on collisions
Front side airbag on the side of the acci- dent.
Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- dent.
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
the interior lights switch on (if the interior light switch is in the courtesy light position);
the hazard warning lights switch on;
all doors are unlocked;
the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
Airbag safety instructions
Front airbags
Read the additional information carefully page 15.
WARNING
The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed.
It is also important not to attach any ob- jects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the air- bag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Knee airbag*
Read the additional information carefully page 16.
WARNING
The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deployment areas of the knee airbags free.
Never not fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the knee airbag.
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between your knees and the location of the this air- bag. If your physical constitution prevents you from meeting these requirements, make sure you contact a specialised workshop.
Side airbags*
Read the additional information carefully page 17.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting
77
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly meas- ure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door pan- el.
Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have been removed, un- less the holes left by the loudspeakers have been closed properly.
Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equip- ment are fitted inside the door panels.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or al- low children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to at- tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be trig- gered.
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the backrest, the use of con- ventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- tiveness.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a special- ised workshop.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed.
Any work on the side airbag system or re- moval and installation of the airbag compo- nents for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Curtain airbags*
Read the additional information carefully page 17.
WARNING
In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the pre-
scribed sitting position must always be main- tained with seat belts fastened while travel- ling.
For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See your technical service to make this ad- justment.
There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the head- protection airbags so that the head-protec- tion airbag can deploy completely without re- striction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side win- dows
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang- ers.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed.
Any work on the head-protection airbag system or removal and installation of the air- bag components for other repairs (such as re- moval of the roof lining) should only be per- formed by a specialised workshop. Other- wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys- tem operation.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
78
Airbag system
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side and curtain airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a special- ised workshop.
Deactivating airbags
Deactivation of front airbag
Fig. 93 Control lamp for disabling the front passenger front airbag on the dash panel
It lights up on the combi-in- strument
Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.
Have the system checked immedi- ately by a specialised workshop.
It lights up on the dash panel
Fault in the air- bag system.
Have the system checked immedi- ately by a specialised workshop.
Front passenger front airbag dis- abled.
Check whether the airbag should re- main disabled.
It lights up on the dash panel
Front passenger front airbag ena- bled.
The control lamp switches off about 60 seconds after the ignition is turned on or after enabling of the front passenger front airbag with the key lock switch.
Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.
If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the lamp does not re- main lit, or if it is lit together with the control lamp on the dash panel, there may be a fault in the airbag system .
The disabling of airbags is only carried out in certain cases, i.e. if:
a child seat is required in the front passen- ger seat with the child facing in the opposite direction to the direction of travel (in some countries, due to divergent legal require- ments, facing in the direction of travel) page 83;
despite the driver's seat being in the cor- rect position, a minimum distance of 25 cm cannot be maintained between the centre of the steering wheel and the driver's torso,
installation of special devices is required in the steering wheel area due to a physical dis- ability,
if you have special seats installed (e.g. an orthopaedic seat without side airbags).
The front passenger front airbag can be disa- bled using the switch page 80.
We recommend that you contact an author- ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air- bags.
Airbag system control
The airbag system availability is controlled electronically, regardless of whether an air- bag is disabled.
79
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
If an airbag was disabled using a diagnostics system: the airbag system warning lamp illumi- nates after switching on the ignition for about 4 seconds, and then flashes for about 12 seconds.
If the airbag has been disabled with the air- bag switch on the side of the dash panel: the airbag control lamp will illuminate for about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
The airbag is disabled, signalled with the warning lamp which lights up with the word placed in the cen- tre part of the dash panel Fig. 94.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag system, the airbag may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly, leading to severe or fatal injuries.
Have the airbag system checked immedi- ately by a specialised workshop.
Never mount a child seat in the front pas- senger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.
CAUTION
Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descriptions and in- structions to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Note
Follow the current legislation in your coun- try regarding the disabling of airbags.
At your authorised SEAT dealer you can find information on which vehicle airbags can be disabled.
Front passenger front airbag switch
Fig. 94 Front passenger front airbag switch.
Fig. 95 Warning lamp for disabling the front passenger airbag.
Read the additional information carefully page 16.
The switch disables only the front passenger front airbag.
Switching on the airbag
Switch the ignition off.
Open the front passenger door.
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should en- ter, as far as it will go.
Then turn the key gently to the ON position. Do not force it if you feel resistance, and make sure you have inserted the key fully.
Close the front passenger door.
Check, with the ignition switched on, that the control lamp Fig. 95 does not
80
Airbag system
light up, with the word in the centre part of the dash panel.
The warning lamp is illuminated for 60 seconds in the centre part of the dash panel.
Control lamp with the word (front passenger airbag disabled)
If the front passenger front airbag is disa- bled, after switching on the ignition, the con- trol lamp will light up for several seconds, then it will switch off for about 1 s and then switch on again.
If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the disabling of the airbag system . Please go immediately to an Official Service.
WARNING
The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag.
Always switch off the ignition before disa- bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do so could result in a fault in the airbag deacti- vation system.
Never leave the key in the airbag disabling switch as it could get damaged or enable or disable the airbag during driving.
If the (airbag disabled) control lamp flashes, the front passenger front airbag will not trigger in the event of an accident! Have the system immediately checked by an Offi- cial Service.
81
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
Transporting children safely
Safety for children
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from accident statistics, we recommend that chil- dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- sons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to children page 72. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must always use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod- ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by Peke (not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).
These systems have been especially de- signed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation.
SEAT recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:
Child seats in the opposite direction of travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).
Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX DUO Plus).
Child seats in the direction of travel (group 2): seat belt and ISOFIX (Peke G3 KIDFIX)1).
Child seats in the direction of travel (group 3): with seat belt (Peke G3 KIDFIX)1).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats. Always read and note page 82.
We recommend you always carry the manu- facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- gether with the on-board documentation.
Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag
Read the additional information carefully page 18.
Read and always observe the safety informa- tion included in the following chapters:
Safety distance with respect to the passen- ger airbag page 75.
Objects between the passenger and the passenger side airbag in Front airbags on page 77.
The passenger side front airbag, when ena- bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing backward since the airbag can strike the seat with such force that it can cause serious or fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. This is the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- bled with a key-operated switch page 80. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child page 84.
1) Temporarily, the child seat recommended by the Accessories Programme for groups 2 and 3 will be ROMER KIDFIX XP instead of Peke G3 KIDFIX. It is available from the SEAT website.
82
Transporting children safely
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front pas- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest.
Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca- ses, to transport a child in the front passen- ger seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be disabled page 79. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment op- tion, move it to the highest, most upright po- sition. If you have a fixed seat, do not install any child restraint system in this location.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi- cle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag when an adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat.
All vehicle occupants, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in- juries to themselves and to the other vehicle occupants.
If children assume an improper sitting posi- tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly important if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an acci- dent; as this could cause serious injury or even death.
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
Never leave a child alone in the child seat or inside the vehicle because depending on the season, very high temperatures may be reached inside a parked vehicle, which could be fatal.
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
Do not allow the seat belt to become twis- ted and the seat belt should be properly in place page 70.
Only one child may occupy a child seat page 83, Child seats.
When a child seat is mounted in the rear seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac- tivated page 124.
Child seats
Safety instructions
Read the additional information carefully page 18.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 82.
WARNING
The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Top Tether* system child seats.
Never secure other child seats that do not have the ISOFIX or Top Tether* system, or retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju- ries to the child.
Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- rectly using the ISOFIX and Top Tether* se- curing rings.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash.
83
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Safety
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment.
Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially ap- proved and suitable for the child.
These seats are subject to the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 standard. ECE-R stands for: Eco- nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- ries:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 months)
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 months)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 years old)
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 years old)
Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7 years old)
Child seats that have been tested and ap- proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE- R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers.
Child seats by approval category
Child seats may have the approval category of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific (all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).
Universal: Child seats with universal appro- val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt.
Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in addition to the standard requirements of uni-
versal approval, requires safety devices to lock the child seat, which require additional testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- proval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed.
Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats with vehicle-specific approval also include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed.
i-Size: Child seats with i-Size approval must meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- R 129 standard in relation to installation and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- cle.
Attachment systems
Depending on the country, different attach- ment systems are used for safely installing child seats.
Attachment systems overview
ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ment system allowing quick and safe attach- ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- tachment establishes a rigid connection be- tween the child seat and the car body.
84
Transporting children safely
The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fit- ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found between the seat cushion and the backrest of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX attachment systems are used mainly in Eu- rope page 20. If necessary, ISOFIX at- tachment may have to be supplemented with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
Automatic three-point seat belt. Whenever possible, it is preferable to attach the child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than at- taching them with an automatic three-point seat belt page 19.
Additional attachment:
Top Tether: The Top Tether belt is guided over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are located at the back of the rear seat back- rest on the boot side page 23. The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol.
Support bracket: Some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support brack- et. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of im- pact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats . For the assembly of this type of seat you should also consult the list of approved vehicles for this assembly,
available in the instructions for child restraint systems.
Recommended systems for attaching child seats
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as follows:
Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite direction of travel: ISOFIX and support brack- et or iSize.
Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- FIX and Top Tether.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury.
Make sure the support bracket is correctly and safely installed.
85
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
Emergencies
Self-help
Vehicle tool kit anti-puncture kit*
The tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored under the floor panel in the luggage compart- ment.
To access the vehicle tools:
Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han- dle until it is fastened to the tabs on both sides.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the an- ti-puncture kit* is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
The tool kit includes:
Jack*
Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov- er*/wheel bolt cap clip.
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Towline anchorage
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Towing bracket device
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are optional ex- tras.
Note
The jack does not generally require any main- tenance. If required, it should be greased us- ing universal type grease.
Tyre repair
TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*
Read the additional information carefully page 54
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob- jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must again check the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the procedure and you have the necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following cases:
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
In outside temperatures below -20C (-4F).
In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre greater than 4 mm.
If you have been driving with very low pres- sure or a completely flat tyre.
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by date.
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Park it at a safe distance from surrounding traffic to fill the tyre.
Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid.
All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area.
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users.
Use the tyre mobility system only if you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth- erwise, you should seek professional assis- tance.
The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo- rary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop.
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- bility set as soon as possible.
86
Self-help
The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin.
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the reach of small children.
Never use an equivalent jack, even if it has been approved for your vehicle.
Always stop the engine, apply the hand- brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of vehicle involuntary movement.
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- tional tyre.
Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observing any legal requirements.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships.
Note
Take into account the separate instruction manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur- er.
Contents of the tyre mobility system*
Fig. 96 Standard representation: contents of the anti-puncture kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compart- ment. It includes the following components Fig. 96:
Tyre valve remover
Sticker indicating maximum speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph
Filler tube with cap
1
2
3
Air compressor
Tube for inflating tyres
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- toring system (it can also be integrated in the compressor).
Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres- sor may have a button).
ON/OFF switch
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part 11 .
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compressor and the inflator tube may become hot.
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable material.
Allow them to cool before storing the de- vice.
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
87
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over- heating! Before switching on the air compres- sor again, let it cool for several minutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw the inflator tube Fig. 96 5 again and check the pressure on the gauge 6 .
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:
Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
You should obtain professional assistance .
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:
Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again.
Carefully resume your journey until you reach the nearest specialised workshop with- out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious injury.
Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
Seek specialist assistance.
Manual unlocking/locking
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully page 10, page 11.
The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun- roof can be locked manually and partially opened, for example if the key or the central locking is damaged.
WARNING
Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury.
If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside.
Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get themselves to safety.
Depending on the time of the year, temper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.
WARNING
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in- jury.
Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way.
CAUTION
When opening and closing in an emergency, carefully disassemble components and then reassemble them carefully to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades
Read the additional information carefully page 62.
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the windscreen will be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regu- larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,
88
Self-help
they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty .
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. These are available from quali- fied workshops.
WARNING
Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accident and serious injury.
Always replace damaged or worn blades or blades which do not clean the windscreen correctly.
CAUTION
Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass.
If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- aged.
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win- dows.
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- ers in service position page 62.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, only leave them in the service position.
Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.
Tow-starting and towing
Introduction
Tow-starting means starting the engine of the vehicle while another pulls it.
Towing means one vehicle pulling another that is not roadworthy.
Always consider the legal provisions relating to tow-starting and towing.
For technical reasons, towing a vehicle with a discharged battery is not allowed. The jump start should be used instead page 60.
If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access system, towing is only allowed with the igni- tion on!
The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is towed with the engine switched off and the ignition connected. Depending on the battery charge status, the drop in voltage may be so large, even after just a few minutes, that no electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.
the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the steering wheel could lock .
WARNING
A vehicle with no power should never be tow- ed.
During towing, never switch off the ignition with the starter button. Otherwise, the elec- tronic lock of the steering column could sud- denly get blocked and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle. This could cause an acci- dent, serious injury and loss of control of the vehicle.
If during towing the vehicle runs out of power, stop towing immediately and request the assistance of specialist personnel.
WARNING
Vehicle handling and braking capacity change considerably during towing. Please observe the following instructions to mini- mise the risk of serious accidents and injury:
As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
You should depress the brake much hard- er as the brake servo does not operate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid crash- ing into the towing vehicle.
More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steering does not op- erate when the engine is switched off.
As the driver of the towing vehicle:
89
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion.
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Brake earlier than usual and more smoothly.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the vehicle, for example the paint, remove and replace the lid and towing eye carefully.
Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic con- verter and damage it during towing.
Indications for tow-starting
Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star- ted. The jump start should be used instead page 60.
For technical reasons, towing the following vehicles is not allowed:
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system the steering re- mains locked and the electronic parking brake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec- tronic lock of the steering column be re- leased if they are activated.
If the battery is flat, it is possible that the engine control units may not operate correct- ly.
However, if the vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (in the case of manual gearbox- es):
Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- ing lights.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
Once the engine starts, press the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Note
The vehicle can only be tow-started if the electronic parking brake and, if appropriate, the electronic lock of the steering column are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup- ply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be tow-started to deactivate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column.
Indications for towing
Tow rope or tow bar
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is not available.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- ilarly elastic material.
Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- ing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with a tow bar if this has been specially designed to be installed with a tow hitch page 261.
When the vehicle needs to be towed:
Check whether the vehicle may be towed page 91, Cases where towing a vehicle is not allowed.
Switch the ignition on.
Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se- lector lever in the N page 180 position.
Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).
The vehicle must not be towed further than 50 km (30 miles).
90
Self-help
If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with automatic transmission are only allowed to be towed with the front wheels suspended.
Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive (4Drive)
Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the ve- hicle is towed with the front or rear axle sus- pended, the engine must be switched off, otherwise the transmission may be damaged.
Cases where towing a vehicle is not allowed
If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri- cant.
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cause the steering remains locked and, if ap- propriate, the electronic parking brake can- not be deactivated or the electronic lock of the steering column released.
If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav- elled.
When, for example, after an accident, the smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering operation cannot be guaranteed.
When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:
Observe legal requirements.
Keep in mind the instructions in the man- ual on towing vehicles.
Note
The vehicle can only be towed if the electron- ic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column are deactivated. If the vehi- cle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be tow-started page 60 to deactivate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column.
Fitting the front towing eye
Fig. 97 Front bumper on right: remove the lid.
Fig. 98 Front bumper on right: towline an- chorage screwed in.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the right side of the front bumper behind a lid Fig. 97.
The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle.
Bear in mind the instructions for towing page 90.
Fitting the towline anchorage
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment page 86.
Extract the lid for the towing eye using a screwdriver or similar and pressing on the side.
Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve- hicle.
91
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it to the maximum anticlock- wise . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing.
After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock- wise with a suitable object.
Insert the side tab of the lid into the open- ing of the bumper and press until the tab is properly clipped into the bumper.
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.
Fitting the rear towing eye
Fig. 99 Rear bumper on right: remove the lid.
Fig. 100 Rear bumper on right: towline an- chorage screwed in.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid Fig. 99. Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing bracket do not have any hous- ing for the screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted
or installed and used for towing page 259, .
Bear in mind the instructions for towing page 90.
Assemble the rear towing eye (cars without a factory-equipped towing bracket)
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment page 86.
Press the upper side of the lid Fig. 99 to unclip it.
Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve- hicle.
Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it to the maximum anticlockwise Fig. 100 . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the tow- ing eye in its housing.
After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock- wise with a suitable object.
Insert the upper flange of the lid into the opening of the bumper and press the lower side of the lid until the upper flange is inser- ted into the bumper.
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.
92
Fuses and bulbs
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with a tow bar if this has been specially designed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuita- ble tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a tow rope should be used.
Driving tips for towing
Towing requires some expertise and experi- ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should be familiar with the difficulties involved in towing. For this reason, inexper- ienced drivers should abstain from towing.
During towing, it should be ensured that no impermissible tractive forces or shocks are generated. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.
During towing, the towing vehicle can signal the change of direction even with the hazard warning lights turned on. To do so, at the same time, the turn signal lever must be op- erated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the hazard warning lights will go off. When the turn signal lever is returned to the rest
position, the hazard warning lights will be automatically reactivated.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is not blocked, and the electronic parking brake may be deactivated and the turn sig- nals and wash/wipe operated.
More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steering does not oper- ate when the engine is switched off.
You should depress the brake much harder as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid hitting the towing vehicle.
Bear in mind the information and instruc- tions in the manual of the vehicle to be tow- ed.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
Accelerate with particular care and caution. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.
Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.
Bear in mind the information and instruc- tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- ised workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death!
Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni- tion system.
Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.
93
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- age (same colour and markings) and size.
Never repair a fuse.
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple or similar.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the key from the igni- tion.
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system.
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system.
Note
One component may have more than one fuse.
Several components may run on a single fuse.
Fuses in the vehicle interior
Fig. 101 On the driver-side dash panel (left hand drive): fuse box cover
Fig. 102 Glove compartment (right hand drive): accessing the fuse box.
Opening and closing the fuse box situated below the dash panel (left hand drive)
Opening: fold the cover down Fig. 101.
Closing: push back the cover it in until it clicks into place.
Fuse box behind the glove compartment (right hand drive)
To access the fuse box:
94
Fuses and bulbs
Undo the opening limiter Fig. 102 A in two steps: first, unlock the limiter by pulling back on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gently to the right (arrow 2 ). Undo the cover from its guide when it is at its normal opening an- gle (30).
Free the side pivots B to release the cover to its second opening angle (60).
Follow the same procedure in reverse order to return the glove compartment to its normal position.
CAUTION
Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle.
Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid- ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical system.
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 103 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover
To open the engine compartment fuse box
Open the bonnet page 286.
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover Fig. 103.
Then lift the cover out.
To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.
Fuse placement
Read the additional information carefully page 52
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.
Fuses in the vehicle interior
No. Consumers/Amps
1 Adblue (SCR) 30
5 Gateway 5
6 Automatic gearbox lever 5
7 Air conditioning and heating con- trol panel, back window heating, auxiliary heating.
10
8 Diagnosis, handbrake switch, light switch, reverse light, interior lighting, driving mode
10
9 Steering column 5
10 Radio display 7.5
12 Radio 20
14 Air conditioner fan 40
15 Steering column release 10
16 Connectivity Box 7.5
17 Instrument panel 5
18 Rear camera 7.5
19 Kessy 7.5
21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15
22 Trailer 15
23 Right lights 40
24 Electric sunroof 30 95
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
No. Consumers/Amps
25 Left door 30
26 Heated seats 30
28 Trailer 25
31 Left lights 40
32 Control unit for parking aid, front camera and radar
7.5/10
33 Airbag 5
34 Reverse switch, clima sensor, electrochromic mirror
7.5
35 Diagnosis, headlight control unit, headlight adjuster
10
36 Right LED headlight 10
37 Left LED headlight 10
38 Trailer 25
39 Right door 30
40 12V socket 20
42 Central locking 40
43 Interior light 30
44 Trailer 15
45 Electric driver's seat 15
47 Rear window wiper 15
49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 5
No. Consumers/Amps
50 Electric rear lid 40
53 Heated rear window 30
Fuse arrangement in engine compartment
No. Consumers/Amps
1 ESP control unit 40
2 ESP control unit 40
3 Engine control unit (diesel/pet- rol)
30/15
4 Engine sensors 5/10
5 Engine sensors 10
6 Brake light sensor 5
7 Engine power supply 10
8 Lambda probe 10/15
9 Engine 5/20
10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20
11 PTC 40
12 PTC 40
13 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30
14 Heated windscreen 40
15 Horn 15
17 Engine control unit 7.5
No. Consumers/Amps
18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 5
19 Front windscreen washer 30
20 Alarm horn 10
22 Engine control unit 5
23 Starter motor 30
24 PTC 40
31 Pressure pump 15
33 Gearbox pump 30
37 Parking heating 20
Note
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop.
Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- pear in the following tables.
Some of the equipment listed in the tables below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras.
Please note that the above lists, while cor- rect at the time of printing, are subject to change.
96
Fuses and bulbs
Changing bulbs
Topic introduction
Read the additional information carefully page 53.
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of practical skill.
If you choose to change the engine compart- ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a dangerous area in Work in the engine compartment on page 287.
Always use identical bulbs with the same designation. The name can be found on the base of the bulb holder.
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, there are different sets of headlights and tail lights:
Halogen headlights
Full-LED main headlights*
Rear bulb light
LED rear light*
Full-LED headlight system*
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam and route light) with light emitting di- odes (LEDs) as a light source.
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.
WARNING
Take particular care when working on com- ponents in the engine compartment if the en- gine is warm. Risk of burns.
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.
When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp edges, in particu- lar on the headlight housing.
CAUTION
Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit could occur.
Switch off the lights and the parking light before changing a bulb.
Take good care to avoid damaging any com- ponents.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis- pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
Note
Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.
Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb.
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead, since the fingerprints left on the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen- erated by the bulb, they will be deposited on the reflector and will impair its surface.
97
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
Change the front bulbs
Dipped beam headlight
Fig. 104 In the engine compartment: remove the lid.
Fig. 105 In the engine compartment: dipped beam headlight.
Follow the steps indicated:
Raise the bonnet.1.
Move the loops Fig. 104 1 in the di- rection of the arrow and remove the cov- er.
Remove connector Fig. 105 2 from the bulb.
Unclip the retainer spring Fig. 105 3
pressing clockwise and inwards.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess on the reflector.
Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
Main beam headlight bulb and turn signal bulb
Fig. 106 In the engine compartment: remove the lid.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fig. 107 In the engine compartment: main beam headlight bulb 2 and turn signal bulb
3 .
Follow the steps indicated:
Main beam headlight bulb
Raise the bonnet.
Move the loop Fig. 106 1 in the di- rection of the arrow and remove the cov- er.
Slide connector Fig. 107 2 to the left or right and pull.
Remove the bulb by disconnecting the connector.
Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
98
Fuses and bulbs
Turn signal bulb
Raise the bonnet.
Move the loop Fig. 106 1 in the di- rection of the arrow and remove the cov- er.
Turn the bulb holder Fig. 107 3 anti- clockwise and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.
Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Front fog light bulb*
Fig. 108 Fog light: extracting the grille.
Fig. 109 Fog light: remove the bulb holder
Follow the steps indicated:
Remove the screw Fig. 108 1 from the fog light grille using a screwdriver and extract the grille.
Remove the 3 screws Fig. 108 2 .
Remove the metal clip situated on the upper part of the fog light by pulling away from the vehicle 3 and take the fog light out.
Remove connector Fig. 109 1 from the bulb.
Turn the bulb holder Fig. 109 2 anti- clockwise and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.
Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
Check that the bulb works properly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
99
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
Note
Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical Service or specialised workshop.
Change the rear bulbs
Overview of tail lights
Tail lights on side panel
Turn signal PY21W NA LL
Side light and brake light P21W LL
Tail lights on the rear lid
Left side
Side lights P21W LL
Fog light/side light P21W LL
Reverse light W16W
Right side
Side lights 2 x P21W LL
Reverse light W16W
The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehicle. The position of lights may vary ac- cording to the country.
Rear bulbs (in the side panel)
Fig. 110 Luggage compartment: access to the bolt securing the tail light unit.
Fig. 111 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light.
Follow the steps indicated:
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
Open the rear lid.
1.
2.
Remove the lid, levering it with the flat side of a screwdriver into the recess Fig. 110 1 .
Remove the bulb connector.
Unscrew the light securing bolt by hand or using a screwdriver Fig. 110 2 .
Remove the light from the body, gently pulling it toward you, and place on a clean, smooth surface.
Disassemble the bulb holder unlocking the securing tabs Fig. 111 1 .
Change the damaged bulb.
To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the bulb holder. The securing tabs must click into place.
CAUTION
Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paint- work or any of its components.
Note
Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, to avoid any scratches.
In the case of LED lights, change only the turn signal bulb.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
100
Fuses and bulbs
Rear lights (in the rear lid)
Fig. 112 Rear lid open: remove the lid.
Fig. 113 Remove the bulb holder.
The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs.
Follow the steps indicated:
Remove the rear lid cover in the direc- tion indicated Fig. 112.
1.
Unlock the securing tabs from the bulb holder Fig. 113 1 or turn the bulb holder to the left 2 and 3 .
Remove the bulb holder from its loca- tion.
Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it to the left and remove it.
Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go.
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.
Check that the new bulb works properly.
Carry out the same actions in reverse or- der for assembly and pay special atten- tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuring that the tabs are properly secured.
Note
For LED pilots, you can only change the re- verse bulb.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Changing number plate light bulbs
Fig. 114 In the rear bumper: number plate light.
Fig. 115 Number plate light: Remove the bulb holder.
Follow the steps indicated:
Press the number plate light in the direc- tion of the arrow Fig. 114.
Remove the number plate bulb slightly.
1.
2.
101
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Emergencies
In the connector lock, turn Fig. 115 to- wards the arrow 1 and pull the connec- tor.
Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of arrow 2 and extract it with the bulb.
Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb with the same features.
Insert the bulb holder in the number plate light and turn in the opposite di- rection of arrow 2 until it stops.
Plug the connector into the bulb holder.
Note
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an authorised workshop for replacement.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
102
Operation
Fig. 116 Instruments and controls.
104
Controls and displays
Operation
Controls and displays
General instrument panel
Door release lever
Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Control for the electric adjustment of the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Control lever for:
Turn signals and main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 197
Depending on equipment fitted:
Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 197
Steering wheel with horn and
Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
On-board computer controls . . . . 30
Controls for radio, telephone, navigation and speech dialogue system Booklet Radio
Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 183
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Control lever for:
Windscreen wipers and washer . . 143
Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . 143
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Depending on equipment fitted: ra- dio or display for Easy Connect (navigation, radio, TV/video) . . . . . . 112
Depending on the equipment, but- tons for:
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Depending on the equipment, glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 151
CD player* and/or SD card* Booklet Radio
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 80
Passenger seat heating control . . . . 148
Depending on the equipment, con- trols for:
Heating and ventilation system or manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .47, 46
Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . 44
Depending on the equipment:
USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Lighter/power socket . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Storage compartment
Gear lever for:
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Rotating control(Driving Experience button) for driving modes . . . . . . . . . 229
Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Electronic parking brake switch . . . 174
Starter button (Keyless Access lock- ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 171
Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . 148
Ignition lock (vehicles without Key- less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Steering column adjustment lev- er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Note
Some of the equipment listed in this sec- tion is only fitted on certain models or are op- tional extras.
A separate Instructions Manual is enclosed if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
105
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi- gation system.
The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive models* may be slightly
different from the layout shown in page 104. However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Instruments
View of instrument panel
Fig. 117 Instrument panel, on dash panel
Details of the instruments Fig. 117: Rev counter (with the engine running, in hundreds of revolutions per minute).
1 The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the
106
Instruments and warning/control lamps
engine hot. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- ator) before the needle reaches the red zone .
Engine coolant temperature display page 109.
Displays on the screen page 107.
Adjuster button and display page 109.
Speedometer.
Fuel gauge page 110.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury.
Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only remain in the red zone for a short period of time.
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con- sumption and noise.
2
3
4
5
6
Rev counter
The rev counter indicates the number of en- gine revolutions per minute Fig. 117 1 .
Together with the gear-change indicator, the rev counter offers you the possibility of using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed which may be used briefly when the engine is warm and af- ter it has been run in properly. Before reach- ing this range, you should change to a higher gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in D or take your foot off the accelerator ped- al.
We recommend that you avoid high revs and that you follow the recommendations on the gear-change indicator. Consult the additional information in page 32, Gear-change indicator.
CAUTION
Never allow the rev counter needle 1
Fig. 117 to go into the red zone on the scale for more than a very brief period, other- wise there is a risk of engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and engine noise.
Indications on the display
A variety of information can be viewed on the instrument panel display Fig. 117 3 , de- pending on the vehicle equipment:
Bonnet, rear lid and doors open page 33.
Warning and information messages page 33.
Distance travelled page 109.
Time page 108.
Navigation instructions.
Outside temperature page 32.
Compass page 108.
Shift lever position page 181.
Recommended gear (manual gearbox) page 32.
Multifunction display (MFD) and menus with different setting options page 30.
Service interval display page 36.
Second speed display page 30.
Speed warning function page 36.
107
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Start-Stop system status display page 192.
Active cylinder management display (ACT)* page 189
Signs recognised by the traffic signal de- tection system page 232
Low consumption driving status (ECO) page 108
Identifying letters on engine (MKB).
Distance travelled
The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.
The odometer (trip) shows the distance travelled since the last odometer reset. The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan- ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
Briefly press the button Fig. 117 4 to re- set the trip recorder to 0.
Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 seconds and the previous value will be dis- played.
Time
To set the time, keep the button Fig. 117 4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select
the hour or minute display.
To continue setting the time, press the up- per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but-
ton down to scroll through the numbers quickly.
Press the button 4 again in order to finish setting the time.
The time can also be set via the button and SETUP function button in the Easy Con- nect system page 112.
Compass
With the ignition on and the navigation sys- tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- played on the instrument panel.
Selector lever position
The selected gear is displayed on the side of the selector lever and on the instrument pan- el display. In positions D and S, and with the Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- played.
Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
The recommended gear in order to save fuel is displayed on the instrument panel while you are driving page 32.
Second speed display (mph or km/h)
In addition to the speedometer, the speed can also be displayed in a different unit of measurement (in miles or in km per hour).
This option cannot be deactivated in models destined for countries in which the second speed must always be visible.
The second speed display can be adjusted in the Easy Connect system via the button and the SETUP function button page 112.
Speed warning
When the speed setting is exceeded, this will be indicated on the instrument panel display. This is very useful, for example when using winter tyres that are not designed for driving at the maximum speed of the vehicle page 36.
The speed warning settings can be adjusted in the Easy Connect system via the button and the SETUP function button page 112.
Start-Stop operating display
Updated information relating to the status is displayed on the instrument panel page 192.
Low consumption driving status (ECO)*
Depending on the equipment, when driving, the ECO display appears on the instrument panel when the vehicle is in low consump- tion status due to active cylinder manage- ment (ACT)* page 189.
108
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Identifying letters on engine (MKB)
Hold the button Fig. 117 4 down for more than 15 seconds to display the identifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do this, the ignition must be switched on and the engine switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
WARNING
Even though outside temperatures are above freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.
At outside temperatures above +4C (+39F), even when the ice crystal symbol is not visible, there may still be patches of ice on the road.
Do not rely on the outside temperature in- dicator!
Note
Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of displays without warning or informa- tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the warning lamps.
Depending on the equipment, some set- tings and instructions can also be carried out in the Easy Connect system.
When several warnings are active at the same time, the symbols are shown succes- sively for a few seconds and will stay on until the fault is rectified.
Odometer
Fig. 118 Instrument panel: odometer and re- set button.
The distance covered is displayed in kilome- tres or miles m. It is possible to change the measurement units (kilometres km/miles m) in the radio/Easy Connect*. Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions Manual for more details.
Odometer/trip recorder
The odometer shows the total distance cov- ered by the vehicle.
The trip recorder shows the distance that has been travelled since it was last reset. It is
used to measure short trips. The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or tenths of a mile.
The trip recorder can be set to zero by press- ing 0.0/SET Fig. 118.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder display. Have the fault repaired immediately, as far as is possible.
Coolant temperature gauge
For vehicles with no coolant temperature gauge, a control lamp appears for high coolant temperatures page 290. Please note .
The coolant temperature gauge 2
Fig. 117 only works when the ignition is switched on. In order to avoid engine dam- age, please read the following notes for the different temperature ranges.
Engine cold
If only the diodes in the lower part of the scale light up, this indicates that the engine has not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.
109
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Normal temperature
If in normal operations, the diodes light up until the central zone, it means that the en- gine has reached operating temperature. At high outside temperatures and when making the engine work hard, the diodes may contin- ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is no cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up on the instrument panel digital display.
Heat range
When the diodes light up in the upper area of the display and the control lamp appears on the instrument panel display, the coolant temperature is excessive page 290.
CAUTION
To ensure a long useful life for the engine, avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approxi- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al- so depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature* page 35 as a guide.
Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating.
The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is
moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re- duce the cooling effect, which could cause the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis- tance.
Fuel level
Fig. 119 Fuel gauge.
The display 6 Fig. 117 only works when the ignition is switched on. When the display reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode lights up in red and the control lamp ap- pears page 106. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flashes in red.
The distance to empty fuel level is displayed on the instrument panel 3 Fig. 117.
The capacity of the fuel tank of your vehicle is given in the Technical data section page 49.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir- regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex- haust system, which could cause the catalytic converter to overheat resulting in damage.
Control lamps
Warning and control lamps
Read the additional information carefully page 39.
The control and warning lamps are indicators of warnings, , faults or certain func- tions. Some control and warning lamps come on when the ignition is switched on, and switch off when the engine starts running, or while driving.
Depending on the model, additional text messages may be viewed on the instrument panel display. These may be purely informa- tive or they may be advising of the need for action page 106, Instruments.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- times a symbol may be displayed on the in- strument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard.
110
Instruments and warning/control lamps
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ignor- ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.
Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages.
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Park the vehicle away from traffic and en- sure that there are no highly flammable ma- terials under the vehicle that could come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel).
A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- dent for the driver and for other road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad- vise other drivers.
Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe inju- ries page 286.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and text messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.
111
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Introduction to the Easy Connect system*
System settings (CAR)*
CAR menu
Read the additional information carefully page 27
To select the settings menus, press the Easy Connect button and the SETUP function button.
The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options in these me- nus will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.
Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.
When the function button check box is activa- ted , the function is active.
Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those me- nus.
Function buttons in the vehicle settings menu
Page
ESC system page 177
Tyres page 299
Driver assistance table on page 27
Parking and manoeuvring page 248
Vehicle lights table on page 27
Mirrors and windscreen wipers table on page 27
Opening and closing table on page 27
Multifunction display table on page 27
Date and time table on page 27
Units table on page 27
Service page 107
Factory settings table on page 27
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could distract you from traffic.
112
Communications and multimedia
Communications and multimedia
Steering wheel controls*
Operating the audio system + telephone with voice control
Fig. 120 Controls on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation functions without needing to distract the driver.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)
A Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
B
Short press: access to the tele- phone menu on the dash pan-
ela). Hold down: rediala)
Short press: access to the tele- phone menu on the dash pan-
ela). Hold down: rediala)
Short press: access to the tele- phone menu on the dash pan-
ela). Hold down: rediala)
Short press: answer/hang up calls, enable/open the tele-
phone menu. Hold down: reject an incoming
call/switch to private/redial mode
Short press: access to the tele- phone menu on the dash pan-
ela). Hold down: rediala)
C Search for last station Short press: switch to the previ-
ous song Hold down: quick rewind
No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex- cept AUX )
113
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)
D Search for the next station Short press: switch to the next
song Hold down: fast forward
No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex- cept AUX )
E , F Change menu on instrument
panela) Change menu on instrument
panela) Change menu on instrument
panela) Change menu on instrument
panela) Change menu on instrument
panela)
G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control
H
Turn: Next/previous presetc)
Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Next/previous songc)
Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel menu depending on where it is
located Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel menu depending on where it is
located Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel menu depending on where it is
located Press: Acts on the MFD or con- firms the menu option of the dash panel depending on the
menu option
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX). c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
114
Communications and multimedia
Multimedia
USB/AUX-INPort
Fig. 121 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.
Depending on the special characteristics and the country, the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN port.
The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the storage compartment area of the centre con- sole Fig. 121.
The operating description is located in the re- spective Instruction Manuals of the audio system or the navigation system.
Connectivity Box*
Fig. 122 Centre console: Connectivity Box
Depending on the special features and the country, the vehicle may have a Connectivity Box.
With the Connectivity Box you can charge your mobile device wirelessly with Qi1) tech- nology as well as reduce the radiation in the vehicle and have better reception.
The Connectivity Box can be found in the storage compartment area of the centre con- sole Fig. 122.
The operating description is located in the re- spective Instruction Manuals of the audio system or the navigation system.
Note
Your mobile device must support the Qi wire- less inductive charging interface standard for proper operation.
1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly.
115
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Opening and closing
Central locking system
Description
Read the additional information carefully page 9
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via the central locking system. There are several methods, depending on the vehicle equip- ment:
key with remote control page 118,
lock on driver door (emergency opening page 9) or
interior central locking switch page 119.
Unlocking one side of the vehicle only
When you lock the vehicle with the key, the doors and the rear lid are locked. When you open the door, you can either unlock only the driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select the required option, use Easy Connect* page 119.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle can also be unlocked via the central locking switch or by pulling one of the inside door handles. The Auto Lock function can be switched on and off on the sound system or on the Easy Connect* system page 119.
In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, the doors will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
Anti-theft alarm system*
If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer- ence with the vehicle it triggers an audible and visible alarm.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when locking the vehicle. It switches off when the vehicle is unlocked from a distance.
When the driver door is unlocked with the key, you should switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig- gered. On some export versions, the alarm is triggered immediately when you open a door.
To deactivate the alarm, press the button on the remote control key, or switch on the ignition. After a certain time, the alarm will automatically switch off.
Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and tow-away protection if you wish to prevent
the alarm from being triggered accidentally page 127.
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is locked.
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed correctly.
Accidental lock-out
The central locking system prevents you from being locked out of the vehicle in the follow- ing situations:
If the driver door is open, the vehicle can- not be locked with the central locking switch page 119.
Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, when all the doors and the rear lid have been closed. This prevents the accidental locking of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system* is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
116
Opening and closing
Note
Never leave any valuable items in the vehi- cle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe.
If the diode on the driver door sill lights up for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked, the central locking system or anti- theft alarm* is not working properly. You should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Offi- cial Service or specialised workshop.
The vehicle interior monitoring of the anti- theft alarm* system will only function as in- tended if the windows and the sunroof* are closed.
Car key
Fig. 123 Vehicle key
Fig. 124 Vehicle key with alarm button
Vehicle key
With the vehicle key the vehicle may be locked or unlocked remotely page 116.
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi- cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new battery is several metres around the vehicle.
If it is not possible to open or close the vehi- cle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised page 124 or the bat- tery changed page 124.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used.
Control lamp on the vehicle key
When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, the control lamp flashes Fig. 123 (arrow) once briefly, but if the button is held down for
a longer period the control lamp flashes sev- eral times, such as in convenience opening.
If the vehicle key control lamp does not light up when the button is pressed, replace the key's battery page 124.
Unfolding and folding the key shaft
Press button 1 Fig. 123 or Fig. 124 to unlock and unfold the key shaft.
To fold the shaft away, press button 1 and fold the key shaft in until it locks in place.
Alarm button*
Only press alarm button 2 in the event of an emergency! When the alarm button is press- ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig- nals are switched on for a short time. When the alarm button is pressed again, the alarm is switched off.
Spare key
To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle chassis number is required.
Each new key contains a microchip which must be coded with the data from the vehicle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not contain a microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys which are specially cut for the vehicle.
117
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe- cialised workshop or an approved key service qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchron- ised before use page 124.
CAUTION
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic com- ponents. Protect them from damage, impacts and humidity.
Note
Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the but- ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos- sible even when you are outside the radius of action.
Key operation can be greatly influenced by overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle working in the same range of frequencies, for example, radio transmitters or mobile tele- phones.
Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis- charged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.
If the buttons of the vehicle key are press- ed Fig. 123 or Fig. 124 or one of the cen- tral locking buttons page 119 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking briefly disconnects as protection
against overloading. The vehicle is then un- locked. Lock it if necessary.
Unlocking/Locking by remote control
Read the additional information carefully page 9
The vehicle will be locked again automatical- ly if you do not open one of the doors or the rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the car. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you press the button for at least one sec- ond.
In vehicles with a security central locking feature (selective unlocking of side doors) page 118, when the button is pressed once, only the driver door and the fuel tank flap are unlocked. When the button is press- ed a second time, all the vehicle doors are unlocked.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Descrip- tion on page 116.
Note
Do not use the remote control key until the vehicle is visible.
Other functions of the remote control key page 131, Convenience opening/closing.
Selective unlocking system
The selective unlocking system allows you to only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain locked.
Unlocking the driver door and tank flap
Press button on the remote control key once, or turn the key once in the opening direction.
Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously.
Within 5 seconds, press button on the remote control key twice, or turn the key in the opening direction twice within 5 sec- onds.
The anti-theft security system* and the anti- theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you unlock only the driver door, without unlock- ing the other doors.
In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro- gramme the security central locking system directly page 119.
118
Opening and closing
Programming the central locking sys- tem
You can use Easy Connect* to select which doors are unlocked with the central locking system. Using the radio or the Easy Connect* system, you can select whether the vehicle automatically closes with the Auto Lock programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h (9 mph).
Programming the unlocking of the doors (ve- hicles with Easy Connect)
Select: button > function button SETUP > Opening and closing > Central locking > Unlocking doors.
Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with radio)
Select: SETUP button > control button Central locking > Locking while driving.
Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with Easy Connect)
Select: button > function button SETUP > Opening and closing > Central locking > Locking while driving.
Unlocking doors You can choose to un- lock all the doors or only the driver door when you unlock the vehicle. In all the op- tions, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked.
With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key only the
door on the driver's side is unlocked. If that button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the rear lid will be unlocked.
In vehicles with a conventional key, turn the key in the door lock, in the direction of open- ing, twice within 2 seconds.
If the button is pressed, all the vehicle doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- mation signal* is heard.
Auto Lock/Locking while driving. If you select on, all the vehicle doors are locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph).
Central locking switch
Read the additional information carefully page 9
Please note the following when using the central locking switch to lock your vehicle:
It is not possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
The LED in the central locking switch lights up when all the doors are closed and locked.
You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
WARNING
The central locking switch also operates when the ignition is switched off and auto- matically locks all the vehicle doors when the button is pressed.
The central locking switch does not operate if the vehicle is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is switched on.
Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk. Do not leave anyone, especially children, in the vehicle.
Note
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) (Auto Lock) page 116. You can unlock the vehicle again using button on the central locking switch.
119
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless Access*
Fig. 125 Keyless Access locking and ignition system: In the proximity of the car. Opening the rear lid with sensor-controlled opening (Easy Open)
Fig. 126 Keyless Access locking and ignition system: sensor surface A for unlocking in- side the door handle and sensor surface B
for locking on the exterior of the handle.
table on page 2
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have the Keyless Access system.
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. To do this, it is only necessary to have a valid vehicle key in the corresponding detection area to attempt to access the vehicle Fig. 125 and touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles Fig. 126 or operate the softtouch/han- dle on the rear lid page 127 .
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via the front doors only. When doing so, the re- mote control key must be no further than ap- prox. 1.5 m from the door handle.
It does not matter where you carry the key, for instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or in a briefcase.
Once the doors have been locked, they can- not be opened again immediately. This will enable you to check that the doors are prop- erly closed.
If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock only the corresponding door or the entire ve- hicle. The necessary adjustments can be per- formed in vehicles with a driver information system page 27.
General information
If a valid key is located in the proximity of the car Fig. 125 , the Keyless Access locking and ignition system gives the key entry as soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the front door handles is touched or the soft- touch/handle on the rear lid is operated. The following features are then available without having to use the vehicle key actively:
Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using the handles of the front doors or the soft- touch/handle on the rear lid.
Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the sensor of the driver or passenger door han- dle.
Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one foot below the rear bumper.
120
Opening and closing
Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en- gine with the starter button page 169.
The central locking and locking systems oper- ate in the same way as a normal locking and unlocking system. Only the controls change.
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a double flash of the indicator lights; locking by a single flash.
If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and the rear lid are closed leaving the last key used inside the vehicle and none outside, the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times. The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- onds if you fail to open any door or the rear lid.
If you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any door or the rear lid, the vehicle will lock again after a few seconds.
Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless- Entry)
Hold one of the front door handles. In do- ing this, the sensor surface Fig. 126 A (ar- row) is touched on the handle and the vehi- cle unlocks.
Open the door.
On vehicles with selective opening or info- tainment system configuration, pulling the door handle twice will unlock all doors.
On vehicles without a Safe security sys- tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex- it)
Switch the ignition off.
Close the driver's door.
Touch the locking sensor surface B (arrow) of the handle of one of the front doors once. The door being operated must be closed.
On vehicles with a Safe security system: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)
Switch the ignition off.
Close the driver's door.
Touch the sensor surface B (arrow) of the handle of one of the front doors once. The ve- hicle locks with the Safe system page 123. The door being operated must be closed.
Touch the sensor surface B (arrow) of the handle of one of the front doors twice to lock the vehicle without activating the Safe se- curity system page 123.
Unlocking and locking the rear lid
When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- matically unlocks on opening if Fig. 125 there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity.
Open or close the rear lid normally.
After closing, the rear lid locks automatically. If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid will not lock automatically after closing it.
Opening the rear lid with sensor-controlled opening (Easy Open)
If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity of Fig. 125 the rear lid, it is possible to unlock and open or close it moving one foot in the area of the sensors Fig. 125 loca- ted under the rear bumper.
Switch the ignition off.
Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the middle.
With a brisk movement, bring your foot and lower leg as close as you can to the bumper. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to the upper sensor area and your foot to the lower sensor area Fig. 125 1 .
Quickly remove your foot and lower leg from the sensor areas Fig. 125 2 . The rear lid opens automatically.
If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro- cedure after a few seconds.
The third brake light flashes once to show the boot has opened with the Easy Open func- tion.
The rear lid can be closed with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provi- ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of the rear lid).
When closed, the rear lid automatically locks if the vehicle has been locked beforehand and there is no valid key inside.
121
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
While the rear lid is in motion (either opening or closing), it can be stopped with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provided a valid vehicle key is in the proxim- ity of the rear lid).
The Easy Open feature is not available or only has limited availability in the following situa- tions (examples):
If the rear bumper is very dirty.
If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g. after having driven on gritted roads.
If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not covered.
If the vehicle has been equipped at a later time with a tow bracket.
In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea- ture may take a little longer to open the boot or automatically disable to avoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. when the rain falls.
The Easy Open function can be connected and disconnected permanently in the info- tainment system by pressing the button and the SETUP and Opening and closing func- tion buttons page 27.
What happens when locking the vehicle with a second key
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and it is locked from the outside with a second vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked for engine ignition page 169. In
order to enable engine ignition, the button on the key inside the vehicle needs to be pressed.
Automatically disabling sensors
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a long period of time, the proximity sensors on the passenger doors are automatically disa- bled.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles is often activated in a unusual manner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity sensors are disabled for a certain period of time.
Sensors will again be enabled:
After a time.
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ton on the key.
OR: if the rear lid is open.
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with the key.
Convenience functions
To close all the electric windows and the glass roof using the convenience function, keep a finger for a few seconds on the lock- ing sensor surface Fig. 126 B (arrow) of the door handle until the windows and roof have closed.
The doors may be opened by touching the sensor surface of the door handle depending on the settings that have been activated in the infotainment system with the button and the SETUP and Opening and closing func- tion buttons.
WARNING
If there is a valid key in the proximity of the rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func- tion may be accidentally turned on and the rear lid will open, for example, when sweep- ing under the rear bumper, when directing a water jet or high pressure steam to the area or when carrying out maintenance work or re- pairs in that area. If accidentally opened, the rear lid could injure somebody situated in its area of operation or cause material damage.
Therefore, always make sure that there is no unsupervised valid key in the area near the rear lid.
Before carrying out any maintenance or re- pair work on the vehicle, always disable the Easy Open feature on the infotainment sys- tem.
Before washing the vehicle, always disable the Easy Open feature on the infotainment system.
Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trailer page 259, always disable the Easy Open feature on the information system.
122
Opening and closing
CAUTION
The sensor surfaces on the door handles could engage if hit with a water jet or high pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. If at least one of the win- dows is open and the sensor surface B on one of the handles permanently activates, all windows will close.
Note
If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire- ly out of charge, you will probably not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked or locked manually page 88.
To control the proper locking of the vehicle, the release function is disabled for approx. 2 seconds.
If the message Keyless access system faulty is displayed on the screen of the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the operation of the Keyless Access system. Con- tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Depending on the function set on the info- tainment system for the mirrors, the exterior mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle us- ing the sensor surface on the driver and pas- senger door handles page 145.
If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning will
display on the dash panel screen. This could happen if any other radio frequency signal in- terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo- bile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an aluminium case).
If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay- er of salt, how the sensors on the door han- dles operate may be affected. In this case, clean the vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear stick is in position P.
Anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
The following message is displayed on the in- strument panel to remind the driver that when the vehicle is closed from the outside, the anti-theft security system is switched on. Do not forget the Safelock. Please see Instruction Manual. The vehicle cannot be opened from inside. This makes it more difficult for unauthorised per- sons to break into the vehicle in De- scription on page 116.
The anti-theft security system can be switch- ed off each time the vehicle is locked:
Turn the key a second time to the lock posi- tion, in the door lock, within two seconds. If necessary, remove the protective cover on the driver door handle page 9 or else
Press on the remote control key for a second time within 2 seconds.
The flashing frequency of the diode in the door sill immediately confirms the process. Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues flashing slowly.
123
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Replacing the battery
Fig. 127 Vehicle key: opening the battery compartment
Fig. 128 Vehicle key: removing the battery
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery.
The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- cle key, under a cover.
Changing the battery
Unfold the vehicle key blade page 117.
Remove the cover from the back of the ve- hicle key Fig. 127 in the direction of the ar- row .
Extract the battery from the compartment using a suitable thin object Fig. 128.
Place the new battery in the compartment as shown Fig. 128, pressing in the oppo- site direction to that shown by the arrow .
Fit the cover as shown Fig. 127, pressing it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.
CAUTION
If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged.
Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- place the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.
When fitting the battery, check that the po- larity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries correct- ly and with respect for the environment.
Synchronising the vehicle key
If the button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- ing the key. In this case, the key must be re- synchronised as described below:
Unfold the vehicle key blade page 117.
If necessary, remove the cover from the driver door lever page 9.
Press the button on the vehicle key. For this, it must remain with the vehicle.
Open the vehicle within one minute using the key blade. The key has been synchron- ised.
If necessary, fit the cap.
Childproof lock
Fig. 129 Childproof lock on the left hand side door.
124
Opening and closing
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. This sys- tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- cidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- ted and deactivated manually, as described below:
Activating the childproof lock
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to activate the childproof lock.
With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, clockwise for the left hand side doors Fig. 129 and anti-clockwise for the right hand side doors.
Deactivating the childproof lock
Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you want to deacti- vate.
With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clock- wise for the left hand side doors Fig. 129 and clockwise for the right hand side doors.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside.
The childproof lock can be activated or deac- tivated by inserting the key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it.
The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned on when the vehicle is locked with the key.
The turn signal light will flash twice on opening and deactivating the alarm.
The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for about 30 seconds accompanied by sound and optical (flashing) warning signals and will be repeated about ten times when the vehicle is locked and the following unauthor- ised actions are attempted:
Opening a door that is mechanically un- locked using the vehicle key without switch- ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is no 15 second waiting time and the
alarm is activated immediately on opening the door).
A door is opened.
The bonnet is opened.
The rear lid is opened.
When the ignition is switched on with a non-authorised key.
When the vehicle battery is disconnected.
Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring page 127).
When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with anti-tow system page 127).
When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with anti-tow system page 127).
When the vehicle is transported on a ferry or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or vehicle interior monitoring page 127).
When a trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm system is disconnected.
How to turn OFF the alarm
Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid key.
Note
After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the battery from ex- hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
125
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
for a long period of time. The alarm system remains activated.
If, after the audible warning goes off, an- other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered again.
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button .
If the driver door is unlocked mechanically with the key, only the driver door is unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - but not unlocked - and the central locking button will be activa- ted.
If the vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor- rectly.
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason.
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active.
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti- tow system*
It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- sound.
Activation
It is automatically switched on when the anti-theft alarm is activated.
Deactivation
Open the vehicle with the key, either me- chanically or by pressing the button on the remote control. The time period from when the door is opened until the key is in- serted in the contact should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig- gered.
Press the button on the remote control twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen- sors will be deactivated. The alarm system remains activated.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system are automatically switched on again next time the vehicle is locked.
The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched on. In order to activate it, all the doors and the rear lid must be closed.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must be done each time that the vehicle is locked; if not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system should be switched off if animals are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
their movements will trigger the alarm) or when, for example, the vehicle is transported or has to be towed with only one axle on the ground.
False alarms
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- serve related legal requirements.
The following cases may cause a false alarm:
Open windows (partially or fully).
Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or completely).
Movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items hanging from the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
Note
If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is activated without the volumetric sensor func- tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all its functions, except the volumetric sensor. This function is reactivated when the alarm is switched on again, unless it is deliberately switched off.
If the alarm has been triggered by the volu- metric sensor, this will be indicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is different to the flash indicating the alarm is activated.
126
Opening and closing
The vibration of a mobile phone left inside the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors react to movements and shakes inside the ve- hicle.
If on activating the alarm, any door or the rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa- ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system will only be activated once all the doors are closed (including the rear lid).
Deactivating the vehicle interior moni- toring and anti-tow systems*
Fig. 130 Vehicle interior monitoring/tow- away protection button.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be triggered if movements are detected in the interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in- clination is changed (e.g. during transport). You can prevent the alarm from being trig-
gered accidentally by switching off the vehi- cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro- tection.
To switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and tow-away protection, switch off the ig- nition and press button Fig. 130. The in- dicator on the button will light up.
When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away pro- tection are switched off until the next time the door is opened.
If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)* page 123 is switched off, the vehicle interi- or monitoring and the tow-away protection are automatically switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Descrip- tion on page 116.
Rear lid (luggage compart- ment)
Rear lid with electric opening and closing*
Fig. 131 Rear lid open: button to close the rear lid immediately.
Fig. 132 Centre console: button to open and close rear lid.
127
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
table on page 2
Open rear lid
Unlock the vehicle page 116 and briefly press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles with Keyless Access you can directly press the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un- locked if an authorised key in the proximity of the vehicle is recognised.
OR: press the button on the centre console for at least one second Fig. 132. The but- ton also works when the ignition is switched off.
OR: press and hold the vehicle key but- ton for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is locked, unlock the rear lid only (the doors re- main locked).
OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and controlled opening sensors you can open the rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open). The rear lid opens automatically.
Closing luggage lid
Briefly press the button on the rear lid Fig. 131 .
OR: press the button located on the centre console until the rear lid is closed Fig. 132.
OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press and hold the vehicle key button until the rear lid is closed or move one foot in the area
of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open) page 120. The vehicle key must not be further than approx. 1.5 m from the luggage compartment and should not be in the vehicle.
OR: move the rear lid with the hand in the direction of closing until it closes automati- cally.
The rear lid goes down automatically to the final position and also closes automatically .
Interrupting opening or closing
After beginning to open or close the rear lid, the action can be halted by pressing one of the buttons .
Continue opening or closing the rear lid by hand. To do this, some force will have to be used.
If you press one of the buttons again, the rear lid will move again in the exit direction.
If the rear lid finds resistance or an obstacle during the automatic opening or closing, opening or closing will be interrupted imme- diately. For the closing process, the rear lid opens again slightly.
Check why it has not been possible to open or close the rear lid.
Try to open or close the rear lid again.
If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or closed by hand using reasonable force.
Special feature for pulling a trailer
If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri- cally connected to a trailer page 259, the electric rear lid can only be opened or closed with the keys available within it.
Acoustic warnings
Throughout the process of opening or closing the rear lid, audible warnings can be heard. Exception: when the rear lid is opened man- ually using the handle or the Easy Open func- tion with the movement of the foot or closed using the button available within it Fig. 131.
Modifying and memorising the opening an- gle
If the space behind or above the vehicle is less than the travel area of the rear lid, you can change the opening angle of the rear lid.
To memorise a new opening angle, the rear lid must be open at least halfway.
Interrupt the opening process in the de- sired position.
Press the Fig. 131 button available in the rear lid for at least 3 seconds.
128
Opening and closing
The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa- tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.
Resetting and memorising the opening angle
For the rear lid to reopen completely, the opening angle must be reset and memorised again.
Release the rear lid and open it to the memorised height.
Lift the rear lid by hand until it stops. To do this, some force will have to be used.
Press the Fig. 131 button available in the rear lid for at least 3 seconds.
This resets and memorises the factory-set opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.
Automatic protection against overheating
If the system is operated repeatedly in a short space of time, it automatically switches off to prevent overheating.
Once the system is cool again, the function can be reused. Until then the rear lid can only be opened and closed by hand using reason- able force.
If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is disconnected page 293 or the corre- sponding fuse burns out page 93, the sys-
tem will have to be reset. This requires clos- ing the rear lid completely once.
Emergency unlocking
page 11
WARNING
If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open or, after opening, it may lower by itself due to the extra weight and cause serious injury.
Never open the rear lid when there is a lot of snow on it or when carrying a load (e.g. on a rack).
Before opening the rear lid, remove the snow or the load.
WARNING
If the rear lid is closed incorrectly or without due care, it could result in serious injury.
Never leave the vehicle unattended or allow children to play inside or next to it, especially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle can reach extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries, illness or even death.
CAUTION
Before opening or closing the rear lid, make sure that there is enough space to open or
close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga- rage.
Tailgate automatic lock
Where the vehicle has been locked by press- ing the button on the remote control with the rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto- matically when closed.
The automatic tailgate locking time extension function can be activated. Where this func- tion is activated and once the rear lid has been unlocked by pressing the button on the remote control key page 118, the rear lid can be re-opened for a certain length of time.
Where required, the automatic tailgate lock- ing time extension function can be activated or deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Service, which will provide all the necessary informa- tion.
Before the vehicle locks automatically, there is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle. Therefore, we recommend you always lock the vehicle by pressing the button on the remote control or by using the central locking button.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Intro- duction on page 88.
129
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of accident or injury.
The rear lid must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights.
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- ing.
Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid.
Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened if the key is left inside.
Electric windows
Electric opening and closing of win- dows
Fig. 133 Detail of the driver door: controls for the windows.
Read the additional information carefully page 12
The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using the controls on the driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own window.
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended .
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passen- ger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Safety switch *
Safety switch 5 on the driver door can be used to disable the electric window buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.
The safety control symbol lights up in yel- low if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Intro- duction on page 88.
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a win- dow.
If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activated with risk of in- jury, for example, in the electric windows.
The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation.
Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
130
Opening and closing
The electric windows will work until the ig- nition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened.
If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win- dow will automatically open again page 131. If this happens, check why the window could not be closed before attempt- ing to close it again.
Roll-back function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- jury when the electric windows close.
If a window is obstructed when closing au- tomatically, the window stops at this point and lowers immediately .
Next, check why the window does not close before attempting it again.
If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes again with difficulty or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- ing will stop working for 10 seconds.
If the window is still obstructed, the win- dow will stop at this point.
If there is no obvious reason why the win- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- back function is now deactivated.
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Electric opening and closing of windows on page 130.
The roll-back function does not prevent fin- gers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.
Convenience opening/closing
Use the convenience opening/closing func- tion to easily open/close all the windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* from the outside.
Convenience open function
Press and hold button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* have reached the desired position, or
First unlock the vehicle using button on the remote control key and then keep the key in the driver door lock until all the win-
dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* have reached the required position.
Convenience close function
Press and hold button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed , or
Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock" position until all the windows and the slid- ing/tilting sunroof* are closed.
Programming convenience opening in the Easy Connect*
Select: button > function button SETUP > Opening and closing > Open the window by holding button down or > Front window on/off or Roof on/off*.
WARNING
Take care when closing the sliding/tilting sunroof* and windows. There is a risk of suf- fering injury.
For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close functions with- in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in- juries, always keep an eye on the windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* when press- ing the button to close them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is re- leased.
131
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to hold down the button.
Buttons Fig. 133 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have two positions for opening windows and two for closing them. This makes it easier to open and close windows to the desired position.
One-touch closing
Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
Push down the window button briefly up to the second position. The window opens fully.
Resetting one-touch opening and closing
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been temporarily disconnected. The function can be restored as follows:
Close the window as far as it will go by lift- ing and holding the electric window switch.
Release the switch and then lift it again for 1 second. This will re-enable the automatic function.
If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage, the window will open (or close) until you release the button. If you push or lift the
button briefly to the second stage, the win- dow will open (one-touch opening) or close (one-touch closing) automatically. If you op- erate the button while the window is opening or closing, it stops at this position.
Sunroof*
Introduction
The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al- so has a sun blind.
WARNING
If the sunroof is used negligently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious in- jury.
Open or close the sunroof and the sun blind only when no one is in their path of move- ment.
Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting.
Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle, especially if they have access to the vehicle key. If using they key unattended, they could lock the ve- hicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition and activate the sunroof.
After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sunroof during a short
space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened.
CAUTION
To prevent damage, during winter tempera- tures remove any ice or snow that might be on the car roof before opening the sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.
Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rain- fall, always close the sunroof. With the sun- roof open or in a tilted position, water can en- ter the interior and can cause considerable damage to the electrical system. As a result, other damage can occur in the vehicle.
Note
Leaves and other loose objects that accu- mulate on the sunroof rails should be regular- ly cleaned away either by hand or with a vac- uum.
If the sunroof does not work correctly, the anti-trap function will not work either. Con- tact a specialised workshop.
Some settings can be saved in user ac- counts of the personalisation function page 27.
132
Opening and closing
Opening and closing the sunroof
Fig. 134 On the interior roof lining: sunroof button.
The sunroof only works when the ignition is switched on. Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.
The sun blind automatically opens along with the sunroof if completely closed or if in front of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the previous position and does not automatically close with the sunroof. The sun blind can on- ly be closed completely once the sunroof has been closed.
The button Fig. 134 has two levels. The first level switches the sunroof to the tilted position, opening or closing it fully or partial- ly.
On the second level, the sunroof automatical- ly moves to the corresponding final position after briefly pressing the button. Activating the button again stops the automatic func- tion.
Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof
Press the rear part of the button B to the first level.
Automatic operation: briefly press the rear part of button B to the second level.
Closing the sunroof from a tilted position
Press the front part of the button A to the first level.
Automatic operation: briefly press the front part of the button A to the second level.
Stopping the automatic operation by adjust- ing the tilted position of the sunroof or by closing the sunroof
Press button A or B again.
Opening the sunroof
Press button C backwards to the first lev- el.
Automatic operation to comfort position: briefly press button C backwards to the sec- ond level.
Closing the sunroof
Press button D forwards to the first level.
Automatic operation: briefly press button D forwards to the second level.
Stopping the automatic operation during the opening or closing
Press button C or D again.
Opening and closing the sun blind
Fig. 135 On the interior roof lining: switches for the sun blind.
The electrical sun blind works when the igni- tion is switched on.
When the sunroof is in its most tilted posi- tion, the sun blind automatically goes into a ventilation position. The sun blind remains in this position also with the sunroof closed.
133
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Buttons Fig. 135 1 and 2 have two lev- els. The first level opens or closes the sun blind fully or partially.
By briefly pressing the button to the second level, the sun blind automatically moves to the corresponding final position. Activating the button again stops the automatic func- tion.
Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sun blind for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.
Opening the sun blind
Press button 1 to the first level.
Automatic operation: briefly press button 1 to the second level.
Closing the sun blind
Press button 2 to the first level.
Automatic operation: briefly press button 2 to the second level.
Stopping the automatic operation during the opening or closing
Press button 1 or 2 again.
Note
When the sunroof is open, the electric sun blind can only be closed to the front edge of the sunroof.
Anti-trap function of the panoramic sliding sunroof and the sun blind
The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of injury when closing the sunroof and the sun blind . If the sunroof or sun blind en- counter resistance or an obstacle when clos- ing, they reopen immediately.
Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not close.
Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.
If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed due to an obstacle or some resistance, it stops at the corresponding position and then opens. For automatic closing, a new closing attempt might take place.
If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to close, close it without the anti-trap function.
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function
Sunroof: within approx. 5 seconds of hav- ing activated the anti-trap function, press the button Fig. 134 to the second level in the direction of arrow Fig. 134 D until the sunroof closes completely.
Sun blind: within approx. 5 seconds of hav- ing activated the anti-trap function, press button Fig. 135 2 until the sun blind closes completely.
The sunroof or sun blind close without the anti-trap function intervening!
If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close, visit a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function can cause serious injuries.
Always be careful when closing the sunroof and sun blind.
No person should ever remain in the way of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when closing without the anti-trap function.
The anti-trap function does not prevent fin- gers or other parts of the body from becom- ing trapped against the roof frame and inju- ries occurring.
134
Lights and visibility
Lights and visibility
Lights
Side light and dipped beam headlight
Read the additional information carefully page 24
The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be ob- served.
The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all situations.
Audible warnings to advise the driver that the lights have not been switched off
If the key is not in the ignition and the driver door is open, an audible warning signal is heard in the following cases: this is a remind- er to turn off the lights.
When the parking light is on page 135.
When the light switch is in position or .
WARNING
The side lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you.
Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.
WARNING
If the headlights are set too high and not used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or distracting other road users. This could result in a serious accident.
Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights consist of individ- ual lights, integrated in the front headlights. By connecting the daytime running lights, these lights are switched on1) .
The daytime running lights switch on every time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in positions or , according to the level of exterior lighting.
When the light switch is in position , a light sensor automatically switches dipped beam on and off (including the control and instrument lighting) or the daytime running lights depending on the level of exterior lighting.
WARNING
Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weather or lighting con- ditions. Daytime lights do not provide enough light to illuminate the road properly or be seen by other road users.
On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, when activating the daytime running light the rear lights are not switched on. A vehicle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the dark- ness, in the case of heavy rain or in condi- tions of poor visibility.
Turn signal and main beam lever
Read the additional information carefully page 25
Push the lever all the way down to turn off the corresponding function.
1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rear side light is switched on as well.
135
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Convenience turn signals
For the convenience turn signals, move the lever as far as possible upwards or down- wards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.
The convenience turn signals are activated and deactivated in the Easy Connect system via the button and the SETUP function button page 112.
In vehicles that do not have the correspond- ing menu, this function can be deactivated in a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or forgetting to deactivate them can confuse other road users. This could result in a seri- ous accident.
Always give warning when you are going to change lane, overtake or when turning, acti- vating the turn signal in good time.
As soon as you have finished changing lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn signal off.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ac- cidents and serious injury, as the main beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.
Note
If the convenience turn signals are operat- ing (three flashes) and the other convenience turn signals are switched on, the active part stops flashing and only flashes once in the new part selected.
The turn signal only works when the igni- tion is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switch- ed off.
If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash at double speed.
The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on.
In cold or damp weather conditions, the headlights, tail lights and turn signals may mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle lighting system.
Automatic dipped beam control *
The automatic dipped beam control is merely intended as an aid and is not able to recog- nise all driving situations.
When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instrument panel and switch lighting switch on and off automatical-
ly in the following situations in Daytime running lights on page 135:
Automatic switching on
Automatic switching off
The photo sensor detects darkness, for example, when driving through a tunnel.
When adequate lighting is detected.
The rain sensor detects rain and activates the windscreen wipers.
When the windscreen wip- ers have been inactive for a few minutes.
WARNING
If the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, accidents may occur.
The automatic dipped beam control () only switches on the dipped beam when there are no changes in brightness, and not, for example when it is foggy.
Main beam assist*
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
The main beam assist acts within the limits of the system and depending on environmen- tal and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the system is activated as of a speed of about 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below about 30 km/h (18 mph) .
136
Lights and visibility
When the system is activated and the camera detects other vehicles that may be dazzled, the main beam is automatically switched off. Otherwise, the main beam is automatically switched on.
The main beam assist generally detects illu- minated areas and deactivates the main beam when passing through a town, for ex- ample.
Switching the main beam assist on and off
Func- tion
Use
Activate:
Switch the ignition on and turn the light switch to position . From the base position, move the main beam and turn signal lever forwards page 135. When the warning lamp is displayed on the instrument panel display, the main beam assist is switched on.
To switch system
off:
Switch off the ignition. OR: turn the light switch to a different po- sition to page 135. OR: with main beam on, move the main beam and turn signal lever backwards. OR: move the main beam and turn the signal lever forwards to manually switch the main beam on. The main beam assist will then be deactivated.
Malfunctions
The following conditions may prevent the main beam headlight control from turning off
the headlights in time or from turning off al- together:
In poorly lit towns with highly reflective signs.
Other insufficiently lit road users (such as pedestrians or cyclists).
On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps) and when oncoming vehicles are partially ob- scured.
When the drivers of other oncoming vehi- cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard rail in the centre of the road.
If the camera is damaged or the power sup- ply is cut off.
In fog, snow and heavy rain.
With dust and sand turbulence.
With loose gravel in the field of vision of the camera.
When the field of vision of the camera is misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow, ice, etc.
WARNING
The convenience features of the main beam assist should not encourage the taking of risks. The system is not a replacement for driver concentration.
You are always in control of the main beam and adapting it to the light, visibility and traf- fic conditions.
It is possible that the main beam headlight control does not recognise all driving situa- tions and is limited under certain circumstan- ces.
When the field of vision of the camera is dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the main beam control may be affected. This also applies when changes are made to the vehi- cle lighting system, for example, if additional headlights are installed.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- tem, take the following points into considera- tion:
Clean the field of vision of the camera regu- larly and make sure it is free of snow and ice.
Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- era.
Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the field of vision of the camera.
Note
Main beam and headlight flasher can be turned on and off manually at any time with the turn signal and main beam lever page 135.
137
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Fog lights
Fig. 136 Dash panel: light control.
The warning lamps or also show, on the light switch or instrument panel, when the fog lights are on.
Switching on front fog lights* : pull the light switch to the first point Fig. 136 1 , from positions , or .
Switching on the rear fog light : com- pletely pull the light switch 2 from position , or .
To switch off the fog lights, press the light switch or turn it to position .
Note
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor. For this reason, when you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38 mph), a warning will appear on the instru- ment panel: Turn off the fog light!.
Cornering lights*1)
When turning slowly or on very tight bends, the cornering lights are activated automati- cally. The cornering lights may be integrated in the fog lights and are switched on only at speeds of less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering lights on both sides of the vehicle switch on, in order to better illuminate the area for park- ing.
Function Coming home
table on page 2
This function may be connected/disconnec- ted through the radio menu. The Coming
Home and/or Leaving Home delay time may also be set (default: 30 sec).
Vehicle with halogen headlights
In the Coming Home function, the daytime running lights (DRL), the rear side lights and the licence plate lights are turned on.
Vehicle with full-LED headlights
In the Coming Home function, the dipped beams, the daytime running lights (DRL), the rear side lights and the registration plate lights switch on (Welcome Light).
Automatic* activation of Coming Home
For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota- ry light switch in position ).
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition with the rotary light switch in position page 24.
The automatic Coming Home function is only active when the light sensor detects darkness.
When the car door is opened, the Coming Home lighting comes on.
1) This function is not available on vehicles equipped with full-LED headlights.
138
Lights and visibility
Manual Coming Home activation
For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota- ry light switch without position ).
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- mately 1 second.
Activated for any position of the rotary light switch.
When the car door is opened, the Coming Home lighting comes on. The headlights are turned off 60 seconds after the vehicle door is opened.
Deactivation
If no door has been closed, they go out au- tomatically after 60 seconds.
After the last door has been closed, the headlights will be switched off after the Coming Home delay (as established in the radio menu) has elapsed.
On turning the light switch to position page 24.
When the ignition is switched on (when starting the engine).
Function Leaving Home
The Leaving Home function is only availa- ble for vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rotary light switch in position ).
This function may be connected/disconnec- ted through the radio menu. The Leaving Home function switch-off delay may also be set (default: 30 sec).
Vehicle with halogen headlights
In the Leaving Home function, the daytime running lights (DRL), the rear side lights and the licence plate lights are switched on.
Vehicle with full-LED headlights
In the Leaving Home function, the dipped beams, the daytime running lights (DRL), the rear side lights and the registration plate lights switch on (Welcome Light).
Activation
When the vehicle is unlocked using the re- mote control.
The Leaving Home function is only activa- ted when the rotary light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.
Deactivation
When the Leaving Home delay period ends (default: 30 sec).
When the vehicle is locked using the re- mote control.
When the light control is switched into a position other than .
With the ignition is switched on.
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 137 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn- ing lights.
Read the additional information carefully page 25
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehi- cle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
139
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; for an automatic gearbox, move the gear lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten- tion of other road users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard warning lights also work when the ig- nition is switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times per second to warn the vehicles driving be- hind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off automatically when the vehicle starts to move again.
WARNING
The risk of an accident increases if your ve- hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your sta- tionary vehicle.
Due to the high temperatures that the cata- lytic converter can reach, never park in an area where the catalytic converter could come into contact with highly inflammable materi- als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire.
Note
The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time, even if the ignition is switched off.
The use of the hazard warning lights de- scribed here is subject to the relevant statu- tory requirements.
Parking lights
When the parking light is switched on, (right or left turn signal), the front side light and the rear light on the corresponding side of the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights can on- ly be activated with the ignition switched off and the turn signal and main beam lever in the central position, before being triggered.
Parking light on both sides
With the ignition switched off and the light switch in position , when locking the vehi- cle from the outside, the parking lights on both sides of the vehicle light up. In doing so, only the side lights of both headlights light up, and additionally the tail lights will do so partially.
Motorway light*
The motorway light is available on vehicles equipped with full-LED lights.
The function is connected/disconnected via the corresponding Easy Connect system menu.
Activation: when going above 110 km/h (68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip- ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- er's visibility distance.
Deactivation: when reducing the speed of the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip- ped beam returns to its normal position.
Driving abroad
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is asymmetric: the side of the road on which you are driving is lit more intensely.
140
Lights and visibility
When a car that is manufactured in a country that drives on the right travels to a country that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- mally necessary to cover part of the headlight bulbs with stickers or to change the adjust- ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth- er drivers.
In such cases, the regulations specify certain light values that must be complied with for designated points of the light distribution. This is known as Tourist light.
The light distribution of the halogen and full- LED headlights allows the specific tourist light values to be met without the need for stickers or changes in the settings.
Note
Tourist light is only allowed temporarily. If you are planning a long stay in a country that drives on the other side, you should take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to change the headlights.
Headlight range control, lighting of the instrument and control panel
Fig. 138 Next to the steering wheel: Head- light range control
Lighting of the instrument panel, screens and controls*
Depending on the model, lighting of the in- strument panel and controls can be adjusted in the Easy Connect system, using the button and the function button SETUP
page 27.
Headlight range control
The headlight range control Fig. 138 is modified according to the value of the head- light beam and the vehicle load status. This offers the driver optimum visibility and the headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers .
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To reset, turn switch Fig. 138:
Value Vehicle load statusa)
Two front occupants, luggage compart- ment empty
1 All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty
2 All seats occupied, luggage compartment full With trailer and minimum drawbar load
3 Driver only, luggage compartment full With trailer and maximum drawbar load
a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.
Dynamic headlight range control
The control is not mounted in vehicles with dynamic headlight range control. The head- light range is automatically adjusted accord- ing to the vehicle load status when they are switched on.
Instrument panel lighting
With the ignition on and without light activa- tion, the instrument panel lighting remains activated in daytime light conditions. The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving through a tunnel without the function active, the instrument panel lighting may even switch off. The objective of this function
141
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
is to provide the driver with a visual indica- tion that he or she should activate the dip- ped beam.
WARNING
Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that the headlights dazzle and distract other driv- ers. This could result in a serious accident.
Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load status so that it does not blind other drivers.
Interior and reading lights1)
table on page 2
Read the additional information carefully page 25
Glove compartment and luggage compart- ment lighting*
When opening and closing the glove com- partment on the front passenger side and the rear lid, the respective light will automatically switch on and off.
Footwell lighting*
The lights in the footwell area below the dash (driver and front passenger sides) will switch on when the doors are opened and will de- crease in intensity while driving. The intensity of these lights can be adjusted using the ra- dio menu (see Easy Connect > Light Settings > Interior lighting page 27).
Ambient light*
The ambient lighting in the door panels may change colour. The intensity of these lights can be adjusted using the radio menu (see Easy Connect > Light Settings > Interior lighting page 27).
Note
The reading lights switch off when the vehi- cle is locked using a key or after several mi- nutes if the key is removed from the ignition. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
Fig. 139 Sun visor
Options for adjusting driver and front pas- senger sun visors:
Lower the sun visor towards the wind- screen.
The sun visor can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards the door Fig. 139 1 .
Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- gitudinally backwards.
1) Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following interior lights: front courtesy light, rear courtesy light, foot- well light and sun visor light.
142
Lights and visibility
Vanity mirror light
There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is opened 2 a light comes on.
The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up.
WARNING
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use.
Note
The light above the sun visor automatically switches off after a few minutes in certain conditions. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Windscreen wiper and window wiper systems
Window wiper lever
Read the additional information carefully page 26
CAUTION
If the ignition is switched off with the wind- screen wipers active, they complete their wipe before returning to the rest position. When switching the ignition back on, the windscreen wiper will continue to operate at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and other obstacles on the windscreen may damage the wiper and the windscreen wiper motor.
If necessary, remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before starting your jour- ney.
Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wipers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer spray for this operation.
Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the windscreen wipers while dry can cause dam- age.
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- ers in service position page 62.
Note
The windscreen and window wipers only function when the ignition is switched on and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are closed.
The interval wipe speed varies according to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is
moving, the more often the windscreen is cleaned.
The rear wiper is automatically switched on when the windscreen wiper is on and the car is in reverse gear.
Windscreen wiper functions
Windscreen wiper performance in different sit- uations
If the vehicle is at a standstill
The activated position provision- ally changes to the previous posi- tion.
During automatic wipe
The air conditioner comes on for approximately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode to prevent the smell of the windscreen washer fluid entering the inside the vehi- cle.
For the interval wipe
Intervals between wipes depend on the vehicle's speed. The high- er the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals.
Heated windscreen washer jets*
The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does not thaw the water in the washer hoses. When the ignition is switched on the heated windscreen washer jets automatically adjust the heat depending on the ambient tempera- ture.
143
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Headlight wash/wipe system*
The headlight washers/wipers clean the headlight lenses.
After the ignition is switched on, the first and every fifth time the windscreen washer is switched on, the headlights are also washed. Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should be pulled towards the steering wheel when the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any incrusted dirt (such as insects) should be cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).
To ensure the headlight washers work cor- rectly in winter, any snow which has got into the bumper jet supports should be cleaned away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti- icing spray.
Note
The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper back on again.
Rain sensor*
Fig. 140 Windscreen wiper lever: adjusting the rain sensor A
Fig. 141 Rain sensor sensitive surface
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain . The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Man- ual wipe page 143.
Move the lever to the required position Fig. 140:
Rain sensor off.
Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- sary.
Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
Set control to the right: highly sensi- tive.
Set control to the left: less sensitive.
When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts operating again when the windscreen wipers are in position 1 and the vehicle is travel- ling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).
Rain sensor modified behaviour
Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- ings on the sensitive surface Fig. 141 of the rain sensor include:
Damaged blades: a film of water on the damaged blades may lengthen the activation time, reduce the washing intervals or result in a fast and continuous wipe.
Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger the windscreen wiper.
Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in the roads may cause an extra long wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.
Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
0
1
A
144
Lights and visibility
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or make it react more slowly, later or not at all.
Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stone will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the reduction in the sensitive surface area and adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen- sor will vary with the size of the damage caused by the stone.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain to switch on the wipers.
If necessary, switch on the wipers manually when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- bility.
Note
Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sen- sor regularly and check the blades for dam- age Fig. 141 (arrow).
To remove wax and coatings, we recom- mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.
Mirror
Anti-dazzle rear view mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the rear window.
Rear view mirror with automatic anti-dazzle function*
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- matically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- led if reverse gear is engaged.
WARNING
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid may leak. This could cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you come into contact with this liquid, it must be rinsed with large quantities of water. If neces- sary, get medial help.
CAUTION
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid may leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possi- ble.
Note
If the light incident in the interior rear vi- sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror with automatic setting will not operate perfectly.
When the interior lights are on or reverse gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle posi- tion.
Adjusting the exterior rear view mir- rors
Fig. 142 Driver door: control for the exterior mirror.
Read the additional information carefully page 14
Synchronized regulation of the exterior mir- rors
In the Settings - Convenience menu, select whether or not the exterior mirrors should move in synchronisation.
145
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Turn the knob to position L1).
Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust- ment may need correcting. turn the control to position R1).
In the Easy Connect system the exterior mir- rors can be adjusted using the button and the function button SETUP .
Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking (convenience function)*
The Easy Connect system, the button and the function buttons SETUP and Mirrors and windscreen wipers can be used to
have the exterior mirrors fold in when the ve- hicle is parked page 112.
When the vehicle is locked with the remote control, by pressing for more than approxi- mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol- ded in automatically. When the vehicle is opened with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are deployed automatically.
WARNING
Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give a larger field of vision. However, they make ob-
jects look smaller and further away than they really are. If you use these mirrors to esti- mate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
If one of the mirror housings is knocked out of position (e.g. when parking), the mirrors must first be fully retracted with the electric control. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad- juster function.
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please make sure to retract the ex- terior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. Electrically retractable exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand. Always use the electrical power control.
Note
If the electrical adjustment should fail to op- erate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mir- ror glass.
Seats and head restraints
Adjusting the seats and headr- ests
Manual adjustment of seats
Read the additional information carefully page 12
WARNING
The safe driving chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and observe for your own safety and the safety of your passengers page 64.
WARNING
Adjust the front seats only when the vehi- cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident.
Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Careless or uncontrolled adjustment can cause injuries.
The front seat backrests must not be re- clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the subsequent danger of injury.
1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmet- rical.
146
Seats and head restraints
Electric driver's seat adjustment*
Read the additional information carefully page 13
WARNING
If the electric front seats are used negli- gently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury.
The front seats can also be electrically ad- justed when the ignition is switched off. Nev- er leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle.
In the event of an emergency, electrical ad- justment can be stopped by pressing any control.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the electrical components of the front seats, please refrain from kneel- ing on the seat or applying sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and back- rest.
Note
It may not be possible to electrically adjust the seat if the vehicle battery is very low.
If the engine is started while the seats are being electrically adjusted, the adjustment will stop.
Adjusting the front head restraints
Read the additional information carefully page 13
Adjust the head restraint page 13 so that as far as possible the top of the head re- straint is level with the top of your head. When this is not possible, try to get as close as possible to this position.
Adjusting the rear head restraints
Fig. 143 Rear centre head restraint: release point.
When transporting people in the back seat, place the head restraints of the occupied seats at a minimum of the next socket up .
Adjusting the head restraints
To set the head restraint higher, grasp the sides with both hands and move it up- wards, until you see it engage.
To set the head restraint lower down, press the 1 Fig. 143 button and move it downwards.
Removing the head restraint
To remove the head restraint, the correspond- ing backrest must be partially folded forward.
Unlock the backrest page 149.
Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- rives to the top.
Press button 1 Fig. 143, while simulta- neously pressing on the security hole 2
Fig. 143 with a flat screwdriver a maxi- mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head restraint.
Move the backrest until it engages properly .
Fitting the head restraint
To mount the external head restraints, the corresponding backrest must be partially fol- ded forward.
Unlock the backrest page 149.
Insert the head restraint bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It
147
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
should not be possible to remove the head restraint from the backrest.
Move the backrest until it engages properly .
WARNING
Please observe the general notes page 68.
Remove the rear head restraints only when it is necessary for the placement of a child seat page 82. After removing a child seat, remount the head restraint immediately. Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Seat functions
Introduction
WARNING
Inappropriate use of the seat functions can cause severe injuries.
Assume the proper sitting position before your trip and remain in it throughout. This al- so applies to the other occupants.
Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other parts of the body away from the operating ra- dius and the adjustment of seats.
Seat heating
Fig. 144 In the centre console: front seats heating switch
The seat cushions can be heated electrically when the ignition is switched on. The back- rest is also heated in some versions.
The seat heating should not be engaged in any of the following conditions:
The seat is unoccupied.
The seat has a covering.
There is a child seat installed in the seat.
The seat cushion is wet or damp.
The indoor or outdoor temperature is great- er than 25C (77F).
Activate
Press the button or . Seat heating is switched on fully.
Adjusting the heating output
Press the button or repeatedly until the desired intensity level is reached.
Deactivating
Press the button or until all warning lamps switch off.
WARNING
Children and people who cannot perceive pain or temperature because of medications, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a limited perception of these, may suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat heating, an occurrence that may entail a very lengthy recovery period or from which it may not be possible to recover fully. Seek medical advice if you have doubts regarding your health.
People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating.
If an abnormality in the device's tempera- ture control is detected, have it checked by a specialist workshop.
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad- versely affect the operation of the seat heat- ing, increasing the risk of burns.
Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater.
148
Seats and head restraints
Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp.
Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat.
Do not spill liquid on the seat.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest.
Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma- terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating.
In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Front centre armrest
The centre armrest can be adjusted to various levels.
Adjusting the centre armrest
To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from the starting position so that it is engaged.
To return the armrest to the starting posi- tion, remove the armrest from the upper fixed position and lower it.
The armrest can be moved backwards and forwards.
Folding down and lifting the rear seat backrest
Fig. 145 On the rear seat backrest: release catch 1 ; red mark 2 .
Fig. 146 In the luggage compartment: levers for remote release of the left part 1 and right part 2 of the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is split and each part be lowered separately to extend the luggage compartment.
When the rear seat backrest is lowered no- body else can travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child).
Lowering the rear seat backrest with the un- lock button
Lower the head restraint properly.
Push the unlock button Fig. 145 1 for- wards and at the same time lift the backrest.
The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button 2 is visible.
Lowering the rear seat backrest with the re- mote release lever
Lower the head restraint properly. 149
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Open the rear lid.
Pull the remote release lever of the left part Fig. 146 1 or right part 2 of the backrest in the direction of the arrow. The released part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto- matically down and forwards.
If this occurs, close the rear lid.
The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button Fig. 145 2
is visible.
Folding up the rear seat backrest
Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the lock until it engages .
It should not be possible to see the red mark of the unlock button 2 .
The backrest must be properly engaged.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention.
Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest while driving.
Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest.
When lowering or lifting the rear seat back- rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of its path.
For the rear seat belts to offer the necessa- ry protection all the parts of the rear backrest
must be properly engaged. This is particular- ly important in the case of the centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose backrest is not properly engaged they will fly forward, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sudden driving or braking ma- noeuvre.
A red signal on the button 2 warns that the backrest is not engaged. Always check that the red marking is not visible when the backrest is in the upright position.
When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is not properly engaged nobody else can travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child).
CAUTION
Serious damage can be caused to the vehicle and other objects if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and atten- tion.
Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al- ways adjust the front seats so that neither the head restraints nor the cushions of the rear backrest can hit them.
Transport and practical equipment
Storage compartments
Storage areas under the front seats*
Fig. 147 Storage compartment under the front seats.
There is a storage compartment with a cover under each front seat.
The drawer* is opened by pulling on the han- dle of the cover Fig. 147.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
WARNING
The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
150
Transport and practical equipment
Do not drive with the drawer cover open. There is an injury risk for passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an accident.
Drink holders
Fig. 148 Centre console: front drink holders.
Front drink holders
Place drinks in the holder Fig. 148. Placement of two drinks is possible. There is also the possibility of placing larger plas- tic bottles in the trims of the doors.
WARNING
Do not place any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot drinks could spill and cause burns, which may cause an accident.
Do not use hard china cups or glasses. These could cause injury in the event of an accident.
CAUTION
You should avoid putting open drinks con- tainers in the drink holders. The drinks could otherwise spill over and cause damage to e.g. the electrical equipment or the seat covers.
Glove compartment
Fig. 149 Glove compartment
Opening/closing
To open the glove compartment, pull the handle in the direction of the arrow.
To close the glove compartment, move the cover upwards until it engages.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD player is located in the glove compartment. Separate operating instructions are enclosed for this equipment in the corresponding In- struction Manual.
WARNING
The cover of the glove compartment should always be closed while driving. Failure to fol- low this instruction could result in an acci- dent.
Other storage compartments
You will find more object holders, compart- ments and supports in other parts of the ve- hicle:
In the top of the glove compartment in ve- hicles that do not have a CD reader. The load of the compartment should not exceed 1.2 kg.
In the centre console under the centre arm- rest*.
Coat hooks in the door frames .
Other storage compartments are found in the rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats.
151
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
WARNING
Please make sure that any items of clothing hanging from the coat hooks do not obstruct your view to the rear.
The coat hooks should only be used for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.
Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could interfere with the func- tion of the head-protection airbags.
Socket
Fig. 150 Centre console: 12 volt socket
Remove the cap located on the centre con- sole of the socket Fig. 150.
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.
Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket. The appliances connec-
ted to each power socket must not exceed a power rating of 120 Watt.
WARNING
The power socket works only when the igni- tion is on. Improper use may cause serious injury or even fire. Children should therefore not be left in the vehicle unattended if the button is also left behind. Otherwise there is a possibility that they may be injured.
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.
Note
The use of electrical appliances with the en- gine switched off will cause a battery dis- charge.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in the luggage compartment. Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
Place heavy objects as far forward as possi- ble in the luggage compartment.
Place the heavy objects first.
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings page 155.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the lug- gage compartment could cause serious inju- ries.
Always stow objects in the luggage com- partment and secure them on the fastening rings.
Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob- jects.
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in- creased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating air- bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out- ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.
Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly, to avoid accidents.
152
Transport and practical equipment
Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If said weights are exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in- juries and damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- cially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.
Note
Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compartment. Ensure that the ventilation slots are never covered.
Straps for securing the load to the fasten- ing rings are commercially available.
Luggage compartment cover
Fig. 151 Rear lid open with the luggage com- partment cover.
The luggage compartment cover blocks the view into the luggage compartment.
Removing
Remove the straps A and unfasten the cover of the support B by pressing up- wards in the direction of arrow 1 .
Fitting
Insert the cover horizontally so that it coin- cides with the plate on the axis of the supports B and press down until it engag- es.
Attach the straps to the rear lid A .
WARNING
The luggage compartment cover must al- ways be fixed properly (risk of accident).
The luggage compartment cover should not be used as a storage shelf. Articles placed on this cover could cause injury to vehicle occu- pants in an accident or if the brakes are ap- plied suddenly.
153
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Storing the rear shelf
Fig. 152 In the luggage compartment: covers for storing the rear shelf.
Fig. 153 In the luggage compartment: fitting the storage compartment shelf.
The rear shelf can be stored under the lug- gage compartment variable floor.
Remove the left and right covers Fig. 152.
Press the rear shelf until it engages in its housing Fig. 153.
Put the left and right covers in their original position.
Tailboard for transporting long items*
Fig. 154 On the rear seat backrest: opening the tailboard.
Fig. 155 In the luggage compartment: open- ing the tailboard.
On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, there is a tailboard for transporting long items in the interior, such as skis.
To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before they are inserted through the tailboard.
When the armrest is down, nobody may trav- el in the centre rear seat.
Opening the tailboard
Lower the centre armrest.
Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow and push the tailboard cover Fig. 154 1 down and forwards.
Open the rear lid.
Insert the long objects through the gap from the luggage compartment.
Secure the objects with the seatbelt.
Close the rear lid.
Closing the tailboard
Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The red mark on the luggage compartment side should never be visible.
Close the rear lid.
Lift the centre armrest if necessary.
Note
The tailboard can also be opened from the luggage compartment. To do so, press the
154
Transport and practical equipment
release lever down, in the direction of the ar- row, and the cover upwards Fig. 155.
Fastening rings*
Fig. 156 In the luggage compartment: fasten- ing rings
In the front and rear part of the luggage com- partment there are fastening rings to secure the luggage Fig. 156.
In order to use the front fastening rings, they must be lifted beforehand.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be launched across the passenger compart- ment and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.
Belts and retaining straps should be se- curely fastened to the fastening rings.
Objects in the luggage compartment that are unsecured could move suddenly and mod- ify the handling of the vehicle.
Secure all objects, little and large.
Never exceed the maximum tensile load of the fastening ring when securing objects.
Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.
Note
The maximum tensile load that the fasten- ing rings can support is 3.5 kN.
Belts and securing systems for the appro- priate load can be obtained from specialised dealerships. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
The fastening rings are rendered unusable for versions with a spare wheel.
Retaining hooks
Fig. 157 In the luggage compartment: retain- ing hooks
At the rear of the luggage compartment, on the left and right, there are fixed retaining hooks Fig. 157.
The retaining hooks have been designed to secure light shopping bags.
WARNING
Never use the retaining hooks as fastening rings. In case of sudden braking or an acci- dent, the hooks could break.
CAUTION
Each hook is designed for a maximum load of 2.5 kg.
155
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Net bag*
Fig. 158 In the luggage compartment: net bag hooked to the ground.
Fig. 159 In the luggage compartment: rings 1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.
The luggage compartment prevents light lug- gage from moving. The net bag has a zip and can be used to store small objects.
The net bag can be hooked up to the luggage compartment in different ways.
Hooking the net bag into the luggage com- partment floor
As applicable, lift the front fastening rings Fig. 158 2 .
Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings 2 . The bag zip should be facing up-
wards.
Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings 1 .
Hook the net bag next to the load threshold
Secure the short net hooks to the fastening rings Fig. 159 1 . The bag zip should be facing upwards.
Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .
Removing the net bag
The hooked up net bag is taut .
Remove the hooks and the net bag straps from the fastening rings and from the bag hooks.
Store the net bag in the luggage compart- ment.
WARNING
To secure the elastic net bag on the fastening rings it must be stretched out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or un- hooked incorrectly the hooks could cause in- juries.
Always secure the net hooks properly so that they do not suddenly release from the fastening rings when hooking or unhooking them.
On hooking or unhooking them, protect your eyes and face in case the hooks are re- leased suddenly.
Always hook up the net bag hooks in the described order. If a hook is unexpectedly re- leased the risk of injury is increased.
156
Transport and practical equipment
Luggage compartment variable floor
Fig. 160 Luggage compartment variable floor: positions.
Fig. 161 Luggage compartment variable floor: grooves tilted.
Variable floor in the high position
Lift the floor using handle Fig. 160 1
and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .
Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle 1 .
Variable floor in the low position
Lift the floor using handle Fig. 160 1
and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .
Now match the front part with the lower grooves of the supports and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and lower the floor at the same time with the han- dle 1 .
Variable floor in the tilted position
When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.
Lift the variable floor using handle Fig. 160 1 and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the tilted grooves Fig. 161 3 .
Pass the floor through these slots using the handle 1 , pushing until the movable front of the variable floor folds and rests on the floor itself.
Variable floor with folded seats
Lift the variable floor by the handle Fig. 160 1 and pull it back a little.
Push the variable floor towards the folded rear seats with the handle 1 using some
downward pressure so that the moving part of the floor is flush with the backs of the rear seats.
WARNING
During a sudden driving or braking manoeu- vre, or in the event of an accident, objects could be flung though the interior and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Always secure objects, even when the lug- gage compartment floor is properly lifted.
Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ried between the rear seat and the raised lug- gage compartment floor.
Only objects that do not weigh than ap- proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compart- ment floor.
CAUTION
The maximum weight that can be loaded on the luggage compartment variable floor in the top position is 150 kg.
Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Other- wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged.
Note
SEAT recommends the use of straps to secure objects to retaining rings.
157
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Roof carrier
Introduction
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems can- not be secured to the roof water drains.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.
Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri- er system should be disassembled.
When they are not used.
When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- mum height, for example, in some garages.
WARNING
When heavy or bulky loads are transported on the roof carrier system, car driving per- formance is affected, as the centre of gravity shifts and there is greater wind resistance.
Always secure the load properly using belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.
Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg- ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of gravity and driving performance.
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.
CAUTION
Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier system before entering a car wash.
Vehicle height is increased by the installa- tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and the load secured on them. For this purpose, check that your vehicle's height does not sur- pass the headspace limit, for example, for un- derpasses or for entering garage doors.
Cross bars, the roof carrier system and the load secured on them should not interfere with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.
On opening the rear lid make sure that it does not knock into the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel.
Attach the cross bars of the roof carri- er system
Fig. 162 Attachment points for the roof rail- ings for the roof carrier system.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe- cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons, special fixtures must be used to safely trans- port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof car- rier system properly. Always take the assem- bly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system in question into account.
The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- ings. The distance between crossbars Fig. 162 A should be between 70 and 90 cm and the distance between the crossbars
158
Transport and practical equipment
and the brackets of the roof railings B must be 15 cm.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- bars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries.
Always take the manufacturer assembly in- structions into account.
Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys- tem when they are in perfect condition and are properly secured.
Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly.
Check threaded joints and attachments travelling and if necessary tighten them after you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threaded joints whenever you stop for a rest.
Always fit the special roof carrier systems correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system.
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system carefully and keep them in the vehi- cle.
Loading the roof carrier system
The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- stalled .
Maximum authorised roof load
The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. This figure comes from the combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on the roof .
Always check the weight of the roof carrier system, the cross bars and the weight of the load to be transported and weigh them if necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- thorised roof load.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions.
Distributing a load
Distribute loads uniformly and secure them correctly .
Check attachments
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system have been installed, check the bolted con- nections and attachments after a short jour-
ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- cy.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load can result in accidents and considerable vehi- cle damage.
Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi- cle's maximum authorised weight.
Never exceed the load capacity of the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even if the maximum authorised roof load has not been reached.
Secure heavy items as far forward as possi- ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.
WARNING
If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause acci- dents and injuries.
Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.
Secure the load properly.
159
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Air conditioning
Heating, ventilation and cool- ing
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully page 44
Viewing Climatronic information
On the screen of Climatronic control unit and on the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con- nect system, the theoretical values of the temperature zones are shown.
The unit of temperature measurement can be changed in the Easy Connect system.
Dust and pollen filter
The dust and pollen filter with its activated charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in- terior.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed regularly so that air conditioner performance is not adversely affected.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollution, the filter must be changed more frequently than stated in the Service Sched- ule.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows in- creases the risk of serious accidents.
Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, so as to maintain good visibility of everything outside.
The maximum heat output required to de- frost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Only drive when you have good visibility.
Always ensure that you use the heating system, fresh air system, air conditioner and the heated rear window to maintain good visi- bility to the outside.
Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.
WARNING
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re- duce driver concentration possibly resulting in a serious accident.
Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.
CAUTION
To replace the pollen filter, always visit a service centre.
Switch the air conditioner off if you think it may be broken. This will avoid additional damage. Have the air conditioner checked by a specialised workshop.
Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Note
When the cooling system is turned off, air coming from the outside will not be dried. To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom- mends leaving the cooling system (compres- sor) turned on. To do this, press the button . The button lamp should light up.
The maximum heat output required to de- frost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en- sure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the windows from misting over.
160
Air conditioning
Adjust using the Easy Connect sys- tem*
3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System Touch/Colour.
In the Easy Connect system it is also possible to perform various adjustments to the Clima- tronic.
Open the air conditioner menu
Press the button of the Climatronic controls.
OR: press the MENU button in Easy Con- nect. With the rotating switch select the air conditioner menu and open it.
On the touch screen you can see and change the current settings, for example, the temper- ature set for the driver and passenger sides, the air distribution and the fan speed. With button the driver and passenger side temperatures are synchronised Book- let Media System Touch/Colour, chapter Air conditioning.
To switch a function on or off, or to select a submenu, you must press the corresponding function button.
For more information about functions page 112.
Func- tion
button Function
OFF Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.
SETUP
The air conditioning settings submenu is opened. It is possible to make the following adjustments: Function button Air conditioning profile : to ad- just the level of the fan in AUTO mode. You can choose between low, medium and high. Function button Automatic air recirculation to switch on and off automatic air recircula- tion page 163. BACK function button to close the sub-
menu.
Adjust using the Easy Connect sys- tem*
3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System Plus/Navi System.
In the Easy Connect system it is also possible to perform various adjustments to the Clima- tronic.
Open the air conditioner menu
Press the button of the Climatronic controls.
On the top of the screen you can see and change the current settings, such as, for ex- ample, the temperature set for the driver side
and for that of passenger. Temperatures up to +22C (+72F) are shown with blue arrows, and temperatures over +22C (+72F) with red arrows.
To switch a function on or off, or to select a submenu, you must press the corresponding function button.
Function button
Function
Air condi- tioning pro-
file
Adjust the fan level in AUTO mode. You can choose between low, medium and high.
OFF Climatronic is switched off.
ON Climatronic is switched on.
SETUP
The air conditioning settings submenu is opened. It is possible to make the fol- lowing adjustments: Function button Air conditioning profile : to adjust the level of the fan in AUTO mode. You can choose between low, me- dium and high. Function button Automatic air recirculation
to switch on and off automatic air recir- culation page 163. BACK function button to close the
submenu.
161
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Function button
Function
Automatic supplemen- tary heating
Activate/deactivate the automatic acti- vation of the supplementary heating for colder countries (only for engines with supplementary heating). With the option deactivated, depending on the outside temperature the heating may need more time than normal to reach a comfortable temperature.
Air conditioning user instructions
The interior cooling system only works when the engine is running and fan is switched on.
The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quick- ly by opening the windows and the panoram- ic sliding sunroof briefly.
Climatronic: change the temperature unit on the screen of the radio or on the factory-fit- ted navigation system
Changing the temperature display from Cel- sius to Fahrenheit on radio or on the factory- fitted navigation system is done using the menu on the instrument panel page 30.
The cooling system cannot be activated
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on, this may be caused by the fol- lowing:
The engine is not running.
The fan is switched off.
The air conditioner fuse has blown.
The outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +3C (+38F).
The air conditioner compressor has been temporarily switched off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a specialised work- shop.
Special Characteristics
If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak!
Note
After starting the engine, any residual humid- ity in the air conditioner could mist over the windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as soon as possible to clear the windscreen of condensation.
162
Air conditioning
Air outlets
Fig. 163 On the dash panel: air vents
Air vents
To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- lation in the vehicle interior, air vents Fig. 163 1 should remain open.
Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de- tail) in the required direction to open and close the air vents. When the thumbwheel is in the position, the corresponding air vent is closed.
Change the air direction using the ventila- tion grille lever.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell and in the rear area of the interior.
Note
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi- tive objects should never be placed in front of the air outlets as they may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the air vents.
Air recirculation mode
Basic points
Air recirculation:
Manual recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior.
When the outside temperature is very high, selecting manual air recirculation mode for a short period refreshes the vehicle interior more quickly.
For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is switched off when the button is press- ed or the air distributor turned to .
Switching the manual air recirculation mode on and off
To switch system on: press the button un- til the warning lamp lights up.
To switch system off: press the button un- til the warning lamp goes off.
163
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Functioning mode of automatic air recircula- tion (air conditioning menu)
With the automatic air recirculation mode ac- tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin interior is enabled. If the system detects a high concentration of hazardous substances in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched on automatically. When the level of impurities drops to within a normal range, re- circulation mode is switched off.
The system is unable to detect unpleasant smells.
The air recirculation will not connect auto- matically in versions without humidity sensor and in the following external conditions:
The outside temperature is lower than +3C (+38F).
The cooling system is switched off and the outside temperature is below +10C (+50F).
The cooling system is switched off, the out- side temperature is below +15C (+59F) and the windscreen wipers are switched on.
Activation/deactivation of automatic air recir- culation is done in the air conditioner menu, under Configuration.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Intro- duction on page 160.
If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limit- ing visibility.
Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.
CAUTION
Do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on in vehicles with an air condition- er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool- ing system vaporiser and on the activated charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil- ter, leading to a permanently unpleasant smell.
Note
Climatronic: air recirculation mode is activa- ted to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant odours from entering the vehicle interior when it is in reverse and while the automatic windscreen wiper is working.
164
Air conditioning
Auxiliary heater (additional heater)*
Introduction
The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve- hicle's tank and can be used while you are driving and when the vehicle is stationary.
The auxiliary heater can be switched on using the fast heating button of the air condition- ing controls, with the remote control or by previously programming a departure time in the auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment system.
In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched on, you can defog the windscreen and leave it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be- fore you start driving.
If the outside temperature is very high, the vehicle interior can be ventilated with the en- gine off using the auxiliary heater.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diameter or any other button battery can cause serious and even fatal injuries within a very short time.
Always keep the remote control, keyrings with batteries, the spare batteries, button batteries and all other batteries over 20 mm out of reach of children.
If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
WARNING
The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never switch on the auxiliary heater or leave it running in enclosed spaces or areas with no ventilation.
Never programme the auxiliary heater so that it switches itself on and is running in an enclosed space or an area with no ventila- tion.
WARNING
The components of the auxiliary heater are extremely hot and could cause a fire.
Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with easily flammable materials that might be be- low the vehicle, such as dried grass.
CAUTION
Never place food, medicines or other temper- ature-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other objects sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged or made un-
suitable for use by the air coming from the vents.
Note
After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed or after a jump start some system settings (such as the time, the date, the per- sonalised comfort settings and the program- ming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is suf- ficiently charged.
Switching on and off the auxiliary heater
Switching the auxiliary heater on:
Manually with the fast heating button of the air conditioner controls. The control lamp of the button will light up page 160.
Manually with the remote control page 166.
Automatically by programming and activating a departure time page 167.
Switching the auxiliary heater off:
Manually with the fast heating button of the air conditioner controls. The control lamp of the button goes off page 160.
Manually with the remote control page 166. 165
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Switching the auxiliary heater off:
Automatically once the programmed departure time has arrived or after the programmed oper- ating time has elapsed page 167.
Automatically when the control lamp (fuel level indicator) page 280 lights up.
Automatically when the 12-volt battery charge is too low page 293.
Special feature
Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will continue to operate for a short period of time in order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys- tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes.
Remote control
Fig. 164 Auxiliary heater: remote control.
Fig. 164 Meaning
Switch the auxiliary heater on
Switch the auxiliary heater off
1 Control lamp
If the buttons of the remote control are press- ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxil- iary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of range or when the control lamp is flashing.
Control lamp on the remote control
When the buttons are pressed, the control lamp on the remote control provides the user with different information:
Control lamp 1 Meaning
It will light for about 2 sec- onds in green.
The auxiliary heater has been switched on using the button.
It will light for about 2 sec- onds in red.
The auxiliary heater has been switched off using the button.
It flashes green slowly for approximately 2 seconds (approximately 4 times per second).
No ona) signal has been received.
Control lamp 1 Meaning
It flashes green quickly for approximately 2 seconds (approximately 10 times per second).
The auxiliary heater is locked. Possible causes: The fuel tank is almost empty, the 12-volt battery charge is too low or there is a fault.
It flashes orange for ap- proximately 2 seconds (approximately 4 times per second).
No offa) signal has been received.
It will light for about 2 sec- onds in orange, then green or red.
The remote control battery is almost flat. However, the on or off signal has been received.
It will light for about 2 sec- onds in orange, then it flashes green or red.
The remote control battery is almost flat. No on or off signal has been received.
It flashes orange for ap- proximately 5 seconds.
The remote control battery is flat. No on or off signal has been received.
a) The remote control is out of range. In this case it will be nec- essary to get closer to the vehicle and press the corresponding button again.
Replacing the remote control battery
If, when pressing the buttons of the remote control, control lamp 1 flashes orange for approximately 5 seconds or it does not switch on, the remote control battery will need replacing.
166
Air conditioning
The battery is located beneath a cover on the back of the remote control.
To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot- tom and slide it down.
Remove the old battery.
Insert the new battery. When doing so, take into account the polarity and use batteries of the same type .
Replace the battery cover by inserting the tabs at the top and pressing the bottom.
Range
The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remote control, when fitted with new batteries, has a range of several hundred metres. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged bat- teries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.
CAUTION
The radio frequency remote control con- tains electronic components. Therefore, avoid getting it wet and exposing it to knocks or di- rect sunlight.
The use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote control. For this reason, always replace the used bat- tery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries cor- rectly and with respect for the environment.
The remote control battery may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions re- garding disposal.
Care should be taken so as not to operate the remote control unintentionally so as to prevent the auxiliary heater being switched on accidentally.
Programming the auxiliary heater
Before programming it, check that the vehi- cle's date and time are set correctly .
The auxiliary heater is programmed in the Auxiliary heater menu of the infotain- ment system.
Open the Auxiliary heater menu.
Press the button in the Climatronic control panel.
Press the function button.
Function button: function
Switch off : The auxiliary heater is immediately switched off.
Function button: function
Heat , Ventilate : Set to heat or ventilate the vehicle interi- or when the auxiliary heater is switched on. By pressing the function button , you can select the desired mode.
Set : Opens the Auxiliary heater menu.
Departure time 1 , Departure time 2 , Departure time 3 : Three different departure times (hh.mm) may be programmed. If the auxiliary heater should only be switched on a certain day of the week, this can also be selected.
Duration : The duration determines the operating time of the auxiliary heater when switched on us- ing the fast heating button on the air condi- tioning controls. The duration is also used to cal- culate the departure time for the manual air con- ditioner. It can be set between 10 and 60 mi- nutes at 10-minute intervals.
This returns to the main menu.
The programmed departure time determines the approximate time it should take to reach the temperature set in the vehicle. The start of the heating operation is determined auto- matically depending on the outside tempera- ture.
Checking the programming
When a departure time is activated and the ignition is switched off the control lamp of the fast heating button lights up for ap- proximately 10 seconds.
167
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
WARNING
Never programme the auxiliary heater so that it switches itself on and is running in an en- closed space or an area with no ventilation. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death.
Operating instructions
The auxiliary heater exhaust system located below the vehicle must be kept clear of snow, mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes must be able to exit freely. The emissions generated by the auxiliary heater are re- moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath the vehicle.
On heating the vehicle interior, depending on the outside temperature, the warm air is first directed at the windscreen and then to the rest of the vehicle interior through the air vents. Directing the diffusers towards the windows for example can affect air distribu- tion.
When will the auxiliary heater not be activa- ted?
The auxiliary heater requires about as much power as the dipped beam headlights. If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the
auxiliary heater switches off automatically and cannot be switched on. This avoids prob- lems when starting the engine.
The heating must be activated every time you want to set off. Similarly, the departure time must reactivate each time.
The control lamp (fuel level indicator) lights up.
Note
Noises will be heard while the auxiliary heater is running.
When the air humidity is high and the in- side temperature low, condensation from the heating and ventilating system may evapo- rate when the auxiliary heater is switched on. In this case, steam may be released from un- derneath the vehicle. This does not mean that there is a vehicle malfunction.
If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater may be restricted if the fuel tank level is low (just above the reserve level).
If the auxiliary heater is used a number of times for a long period of time, the 12-volt battery will lose its charge. To recharge the battery, the vehicle must be driven for a num- ber of kilometres from time to time. As a guideline: The journey should last approxi- mately as long as the heater was connected.
At temperatures below +5C (+41F), the auxiliary heater may switch itself on automat- ically when the engine is switched on. The
auxiliary heater is switched off again after a certain time.
168
Driving
Driving
Start and stop the engine
Switching the ignition on and starting the engine with the key
Fig. 165 Ignition key positions.
Read the additional information carefully page 24
Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer than usual to start on cold days. Therefore the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or the brake pedal (automatic gearbox) must re- main pressed until the engine starts up. Dur- ing preheating, the warning lamp remains lit.
The preheating time depends on the coolant and exterior temperatures. With the engine at operating temperature, or at outside temper- atures above +8C (+46F), the warning
lamp will light up for about one second. This means that the engine starts immediate- ly.
If the engine does not immediately start up, interrupt the starting process and try again after 30 seconds. To start the engine again, return the key to position 1 .
Start-Stop System*
If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on.
Automatic gearbox: before leaving the vehi- cle, make sure that the ignition is switched off and the selector lever is in position P.
Driver messages on the instrument panel display
Press the clutch This message appears on vehicles with a manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the engine without having the clutch pedal pressed. The engine will only start if you press the clutch pedal.
Press the brake This message appears on vehicles with an automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start the engine without having the brake pedal pressed.
Select N or P This message appears if you try to start or stop the engine when the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P or N. The engine can only start or stop in certain positions.
Engage position P; the vehicle can move; doors can only close in position P. For safety reasons, this driver message ap- pears and an audible warning sounds if the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P after you switch off the ignition. Put the selector lever in position P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.
Gear change: selector lever in the drive position! This driver message is displayed when the selector lever is not in the position P when the driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzer will sound. Put the selector lever in position P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.
Ignition is switched on This driver message is displayed and a buz- zer is sounded when the driver door is opened with the ignition switched on.
169
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
WARNING
Never run the engine in confined spaces, as the exhaust gases are poisonous.
CAUTION
Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and extreme load conditions until the engine has reached its normal operating temperature, otherwise this can damage the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine by idling it. You should drive off as soon as you start the en- gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex- haust emissions.
Note
If it is difficult to turn the ignition key to the position 2 , turn the steering wheel to both sides to release the steering lock.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve lifters. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected and reconnected, the key must remain in the posi- tion 1 for around 5 seconds before starting up.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: after switching off the ignition, you can only re- move the ignition key if the selector lever is
in position P (parking lock). Next, the se- lector lever is locked.
Switching off the engine with the key
Switching off the engine
Stop the vehicle.
Turn the ignition key to position 1
Fig. 165.
Engaging the steering wheel lock
In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni- tion key can only be removed when the selec- tor lever is in position P.
Remove the key from the ignition in posi- tion 1 Fig. 165 .
Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en- gage.
Possible vehicle theft is prevented with the steering lock engaged.
WARNING
Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is stationary. The brake servo and power steering functions will not be completely cov- ered under warranty. More force may also be needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury.
Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- ing could suddenly lock, making it impossible to steer the vehicle: risk of accident!
Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor- tant if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the en- gine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause in- juries.
CAUTION
If the engine has been running under high load for a long time, there is a risk of heat building up in the engine compartment after it has been switched off; this could cause en- gine damage. For this reason, you should idle the engine for approximately 2 minutes be- fore you switch it off.
Note
After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine compartment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar ra- diation.
170
Driving
Starter button*
Fig. 166 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: starter button.
The vehicle engine can be started with a starter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the area of the front or rear seats.
In vehicles with the Keyless Access page 116 system, the engine can also be started with the key in the luggage compart- ment.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the vehicle activates the electronic lock on the steering column if the ignition is disabled.
Switching the ignition on/off manually
Briefly push the starter button without touch- ing the brake or clutch pedal .
For vehicles with both manual and automatic transmission, the starter button text
START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat when the system is preset for switching the ignition on and off.
Automatic ignition switch-off
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve- hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on, the ignition is switched off automatically after a certain time. If at that time the dipped beam is on, the parking lights will stay on for approx. 30 minutes. The side light can be turned off by blocking the vehicle page 116 or manually page 135.
Emergency starting function
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, an emergency start-up will be required. The relevant message will appear in the dash panel display. This may happen when, for ex- ample, the battery of the vehicle key button is very low or flat:
Immediately after pushing the starter but- ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right trim of the steering column.
The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically.
Emergency disconnection
If the engine does not switch off after briefly pressing the starter button, an emergency disconnect will be required:
Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- ond .
The engine turns off automatically.
Engine restart feature
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 seconds to restart it. A warning will display on the dash panel screen.
After this interval, it will not be possible to start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve- hicles with the Start-Stop system
The ignition is switched off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- matic engine shutdown is active, if:
The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
the driver does not step on any pedal,
the driver door is opened.
After automatically turning off the ignition, if the dipped beam is on, the side light re- mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat- tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out.
171
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
WARNING
Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury.
When switching on the ignition, do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine could start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- out due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury.
Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor- ised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition and, in this way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the windows).
Note
Before leaving the vehicle, always discon- nect the ignition manually and, if appropri- ate, take into account the instructions on the screen of the dash panel.
If the vehicle is stationary for a long time with the ignition on, the vehicle battery might be discharged and it might not be pos- sible to start the engine.
In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in the engine starting if it requires preheating.
If during the STOP phase you press the START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is
switched off and the button flashes.
If the indication Start-Stop system deacti- vated: Start the engine manually is dis- played on the dash panel display, the START ENGINE STOP button will blink.
Starting the engine 3 Valid for vehicles: with Keyless Access
Step Starting the engine with the starter but- ton page 171 (Press & Drive).
1. Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 is performed.
1a. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press and hold the clutch down until the engine starts.
2. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector lever in position P or N.
3.
Briefly press the starter button Fig. 166 with- out pressing the accelerator. For the engine to start there must be a valid key in the vehicle. After starting the engine, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed
light indicating that the engine has started.
4. If the engine does not start, stop and wait for approx. 1 minute before trying again. If neces- sary, perform an emergency start page 171.
5. Disconnect the electronic parking brake when you are about to start driving page 174.
WARNING
Never leave the vehicle with the engine run- ning, especially if a gear or gear range is en- gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move or something strange could happen that would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
WARNING
Cold start sprays could explode or cause a sudden increase in the engine speed.
Never use sprays to cold start the engine.
CAUTION
The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to start the engine while driving or if you restart it immediately after switching it off.
If the engine is cold, avoid high engine speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap- id acceleration.
Do not start the engine by pushing the ve- hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Note
Do not wait until the engine warms up with the vehicle stationary; if you have good visi- bility through the windows, start driving im- mediately. This helps the engine reach oper- ating temperature faster and reduces emis- sions.
172
Driving
Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts.
When starting with a cold engine, noise levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor- mal, and no cause for concern.
When the outside temperature is below +5C (+41F), if the engine is diesel, some smoke may appear under the vehicle when the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.
Stopping the engine 3 Valid for vehicles: with Keyless Access
Step Switch off the engine with the starter button page 171.
1. Stop the vehicle completely .
2. Press and hold the brake pedal until the step 4 is performed.
3. If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place the selector lever in position P.
4. Connect the electronic parking brake page 174.
5.
Briefly press the start-up button Fig. 166. The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. If the engine fails to switch off, perform an emer- gency disconnect page 171.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gear- box, put it into 1st or reverse.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is moving. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle, accidents and serious injury.
The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off.
The brake servo does not work with the en- gine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
Power steering does not work when the en- gine is not running. You need more strength to steer when the engine is switched off.
If the ignition is switched off, the steering column could be locked, making it impossible to control the vehicle.
CAUTION
If the engine is made to work hard for a long time, it may overheat after being switched off. To prevent damage to the engine before switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi- nutes in neutral.
Note
After switching off the engine, the cooling fan may continue to operate in the engine com- partment for a few more minutes, even with the ignition off. The radiator fan is automati- cally switched off.
My Beat Function
For vehicles with a convenience key there is the My Beat function. This feature provides an additional indication of the vehicle igni- tion system.
When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening the doors with the remote control, the START ENGINE STOP button flashes, drawing at-
tention to the relevant starter system button.
Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. With the engine switched off, after a few seconds, the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashing and goes out.
With the engine running, the START ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-
cating that the engine is running. Upon switching the ignition off with the START ENGINE STOP button, it starts flashing
again.
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the My Beat function also offers additional in- formation:
When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but- ton stays on, since, even though the engine is off, the Start-Stop system is active.
When the engine cannot be stated again with the Start-Stop system, page 192, and needs to be started manually, the
173
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate this fact.
Braking and parking
Electronic parking brake
Fig. 167 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: electronic parking brake button.
The electronic parking brake replaces the handbrake.
Activating the electronic parking brake
The electronic parking brake can be activated whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the ignition is switched off. Activate it whenever you leave or park the vehicle.
Pull and hold the Fig. 167 button.
The parking brake is activated when the control light of the Fig. 167 button (arrow)
and the red control light of the display in the dash panel are on.
Release the button.
Releasing the electronic parking brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press the button Fig. 167. At the same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the engine is running, press the accelerator ped- al slightly.
The control light of the Fig. 167 button (arrow) and the red control light of the dis- play in the dash panel go out.
Automatic release of the electronic parking brake on starting the engine
The electronic parking brake is automatically switched off when starting if, after the driv- er's door is closed and the driver's seat belt fastened, any of the following situations take place:
On vehicles with an automatic gearbox: A gear range is engaged or the vehicle is switched to another one and the accelerator pedal is lightly pressed.
In vehicles with a manual gearbox: The clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press- ed.
To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are exceptions that allow the automatic parking
brake to be released without the driver's seat belt being fastened.
The parking brake can be prevented from be- ing automatically released by continuously pulling up the Fig. 167 switch when starting off.
The electronic parking brake is not discon- nected until the button is released. This can facilitate starting off when a heavy load is towed page 259.
Automatic activation of the electronic park- ing brake when exiting the vehicle incorrect- ly
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the electronic parking brake is activated auto- matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly if:
The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi- tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.
AND: the vehicle is stationary.
AND: the driver door is open.
Emergency braking function
Only use the emergency brake function if you are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot brake .
Pull and hold the Fig. 167 button in this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At
174
Driving
the same time, an acoustic warning can be heard.
To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.
WARNING
The improper use of the electronic parking brake can cause accidents and serious injury.
Never use the electronic parking brake to stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. Braking distances can be considerably lon- ger, since, under certain circumstances, only the rear wheels brake. Always use the foot brake.
Never accelerate from the engine when a gear range or a gear is engaged and the en- gine is running. The vehicle could move, even if the electronic parking brake is activated.
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally moving when parking it, first apply the elec- tronic parking brake and then remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Note
In vehicles with a manual gearbox, releas- ing the clutch and accelerating at the same time automatically disconnects the electronic parking brake.
If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be possible to disconnect the electronic parking brake. Use the jump-start page 60.
When the electronic parking brake is ap- plied or released, noises may be heard.
The system performs automatic and audi- ble tests sporadically in the parked vehicle if some time elapses without the electronic parking brake being used.
Parking
The electronic parking brake should always be applied when the vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when park- ing the vehicle:
Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
Apply the electronic parking brake.
Put it in 1st gear.
Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle.
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.
If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point to- wards the kerb.
If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the kerb.
Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the electronic parking brake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.
Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle occupants.
Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- ample, by releasing the electronic parking brake or the gearshift lever, which would cause the vehicle to move, but uncontrolla- bly.
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi- cle. This can be fatal.
175
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Information on the brakes
New brake pads
For the first 400 km (250 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum braking capacity, and need to be run in first. However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking effect by applying more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid overloading the brakes while running them in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a particular problem in urban traffic and short stretches, or with very sporty driving.
Depending on the speed, the braking force and the environmental conditions (for exam- ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be produced on braking.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain situations (for example, on driving through flooded areas, in severe downpours or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- tion could be delayed if the discs and pads are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
At high speed and with the windscreen wip- ers activated, the brake pads will briefly touch the brake discs. This takes place, al- though unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals to improve the response time of the brakes when they are wet.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt on the road in win- ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the discs and pads can be removed by gently ap- plying the brakes a few times.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a moderately high speed .
Fault in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and remember that you will have to apply
more pressure on the brake pedal and allow for longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu- id level is monitored electronically.
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works only when the engine is running.
WARNING
Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake system only in a suitable traffic situation. Do not put other road users in danger: there is risk of causing an accident.
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident.
If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the ef- ficiency of the brakes.
CAUTION
Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stopping distances and greater wear.
176
Driving
Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed and select a lower gear. This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continu- ously.
Note
If the brake servo is out of action, for exam- ple when the car is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces- sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Front assist system
Electronic stability control (ESC)
The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces the tendency to skid and improves the stabil- ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC detects critical handling situations, such as vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehi- cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc- ing the engine torque. The warning lamp will
flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is intervening .
The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system (ABS), the front assist system (HBA), the trac- tion control system (ASR), electronic differen- tial lock (EDS), electronic torque control (XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*. ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by chang- ing the torque.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- der braking until the vehicle has reached a virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not pump the brakes. You will feel the brake ped- al pulsate while the ABS is working.
Front assist system (HBA)
The brake assist system can reduce the re- quired braking distance. The braking force is automatically boosted if you press the brake pedal quickly in an emergency. You must keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- ger has passed.
Traction control system (ASR)
In the event of wheelspin, the traction control system reduces the engine torque to match the amount of grip available. This helps the
car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gra- dient.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel and directs the power to the other driven wheel. This function is active up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve- hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*
If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control the following: Tractor-trailers tend to sway. When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- matically brake the towing vehicle within the limits of the system and mitigate the sway. Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available in all countries.
Electronic torque management (XDS)
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out- er wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner wheel. This may mean that in certain
177
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
situations the torque delivered to the inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer or lengthening of the trajectory.
The XDS system can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess driving torque of that wheel. This means that the driver's desired trajectory is much more precise.
The XDS system works in combination with the ESC and is always active, even when ASR traction control is disconnected, or the ESC in Sport mode or disconnected.
Multi-collision brake
In an accident, the multi-collision brake can help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of skidding during the accident, which could lead to further collisions.
The multi-collision brake works for front, side or rear accidents, when the airbag control unit records its activation level and the acci- dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam- aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on- board network
The following actions control automatic brak- ing during the accident:
When the driver presses the accelerator, the automatic braking does not take place.
When the braking pressure through press- ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- tems braking pressure the vehicle will brake automatically.
Multi-collision braking will not be available if ESC is malfunctioning.
WARNING
The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electronic torque control system cannot exceed the lim- its imposed by the laws of physics. Always bear this in mind, especially on wet or slip- pery roads. If you notice the systems cutting in, you should reduce your speed immediate- ly to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not be encouraged to take risks by the pres- ence of more safety systems. If you do, an ac- cident may occur.
Please remember that the accident risk al- ways increases if you drive fast, especially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and the elec- tronic torque control system cannot prevent accidents: risk of accidents!
Accelerate with caution on slippery surfa- ces (for example, icy or snow-covered). De- spite the control systems, the driven wheels
could spin, affecting the stability of the vehi- cle: risk of accident!
Note
The ABS and ASR will only operate correctly if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
The regulating processes of the systems can make noises when they intervene.
If the warning lamp lights up, or alter- natively, there could be a fault page 110.
Switching on/off the ESC and ASR
The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started, and only works when the engine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and ASR systems.
The ASR function should only be switched off in situations in which traction is insufficient, including:
When driving in deep snow or on surfaces that are not very firm.
To free the vehicle if it gets stuck.
Then switch the ASR function back on.
178
Driving
Depending on the finishes and versions, there is the possibility of disconnecting only the ASR or activating the ESC Sport mode.
Disable ASR
The Easy Connect system menu is used to switch off the ASR page 112. The traction control system will be disabled.
The control lamp lights up. For vehicles with a driver information system* the driver will be informed that ASR is disabled.
Activate ASR
The Easy Connect system menu page 112 is used to switch on the ASR. The traction control system will be enabled.
The control lamp switches off. For vehicles with a driver information system* the driver will be informed that ASR is enabled.
ESC in Sport mode
Sport mode can be connected via the Easy Connect page 112 system menu. The ac- tion of the ESC and the ASR is limited .
The control lamp lights up. For vehicles with a driver information system* the driver will be informed that:
Electronic Stability Control (ESC): sport. Warning! Limited stability
Disable ESC Sport mode
Through the Easy Connect system menu page 112. The warning lamp will switch off. For vehicles with a driver information sys- tem* the driver will be informed that:
Electronic Stability Control (ESC): On
ESC in Offroad1) mode
Turn the Driving Experience button to select the Offroad mode and connect it page 230. The interventions of the ESC, as well as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt to irregular terrain.
The control lamp lights up.
In the following exceptional situations it may make sense to activate the Offroad mode to allow the wheels to spin:
When swinging the vehicle to get it un- stuck.
Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.
When driving on rough terrain with much of the car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle articulation).
Steep descents with braking on unpaved terrain.
For your safety we recommend that you turn off the Offroad mode when it is not absolute- ly necessary.
Disable the ESC Offroad mode
Turn the Driving Experience button to select a different driving mode page 230. The warning lamp will switch off.
ESC in Snow mode1)
Turn the Driving Experience button to select the Snow mode and connect it. page 230 Traction control system (ASR) in- terventions adjust to the adhesion of snowy roads.
Disable the ESC Snow mode
Turn the Driving Experience button to select a different driving mode page 230.
WARNING
The ESC Sport mode should be activated only when traffic conditions and the ability of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!
With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited to allow for a sportier
1) Only for 4Drive models. 179
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
drive. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could skid.
WARNING
You should only activate the Offroad Mode or disable the ASR if the experience of the driver and traffic conditions allow it. Danger of skid- ding!
With the Offroad mode activated, the stabi- lisation function is limited. In particular, if the road is too smooth and slippery, the driv- ing wheels could spin and the vehicle could skid.
Note
If the ASR is disconnected or the ESCs Sport mode is selected, cruise control* will be switched off.
Manual gearbox
Changing gear
Read the additional information carefully page 41
In some countries the clutch pedal must be fully pressed down for the engine to start.
Selecting reverse gear
Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is stopped.
Changing down gears
While driving, changing down a gear must al- ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di- rectly below and when the engine speed is not too high . Changing down while by- passing one or various gears at high speeds or at high engine speeds can damage the clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch pedal remains depressed .
WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released. This is also the case with the electronic parking brake switched on.
Never engage reverse gear when the vehi- cle is moving.
WARNING
If the gear is changed down inappropriately by selecting a gear that is too low, you may lose control of the vehicle, causing an acci- dent and serious injuries.
CAUTION
When travelling at high speeds or at high en- gine speeds, selecting a gear that is too low
can cause considerable damage to the clutch and the gearbox. This can also occur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held and it does not engage.
CAUTION
To prevent damage and avoid premature wear, please observe the following:
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure applied by your hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector forks.
Always ensure that the vehicle is complete- ly stopped before engaging the reverse gear.
Always press the clutch to the floor when changing gears.
Never hold the vehicle on the clutch on hills with the engine on.
Automatic gearbox/DSG auto- matic gearbox*
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- mitted via two independent clutches. They re- place the torque converter found on conven- tional automatic gearboxes and allow for
180
Driving
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the vehicle.
The tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears manually if desired page 183, Changing gears in tiptronic mode*.
Selector lever positions
Read the additional information carefully page 42
The selector lever position engaged is high- lighted on the display in the instrument clus- ter. With the selector lever in the manual gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged gear is also indicated on the display.
P Parking lock
When the selector lever is in this position, the driven wheels are locked mechanically. The parking lock must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary .
The interlock button (the button on the selec- tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si- multaneously the brake pedal must be de- pressed before moving the selector lever ei- ther in or out of position P.
R Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling .
To move the selector lever to position R, the interlock button must be pressed in and at the same time the brake pedal must be de- pressed. The reverse lights come on when the selector lever is in the R position with the ignition on.
N Neutral (idling)
With the selector lever in this position, the gear is in neutral.
D/S Permanent drive (forward) position
The selector lever in the D/S position enables the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), move the selector lever backwards. Moving the lev- er again will select normal mode (D). The se- lected driving mode is shown on the instru- ment panel display.
In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical- ly selects the best gear ratio. This depends on the engine load, the road speed and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP).
Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the engine's maximum power output. When ac- celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.
Press the brake pedal to move the selector lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta- tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) .
Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv- ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to tiptronic mode page 183, in order to manually select gear ratios to suit the driving conditions.
WARNING
Take care not to accidentally press the ac- celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The vehicle could otherwise start moving im- mediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident.
With selector lever in any position (except P) the vehicle must always be held with the foot brake when the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends to creep. The accelerator pedal must on no account be pressed inadvertently when a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary. The vehicle could otherwise start moving im- mediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
181
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
While you are selecting a gear and the vehi- cle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident.
As a driver you should never leave your ve- hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en- gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is running, you must apply the handbrake and engage the parking lock (P).
To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake and put the selector lever in position P before opening the bonnet and working on the vehi- cle with the engine running. Please always observe the important safety warnings page 286, Work in the engine compart- ment.
Note
If the selector lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before se- lecting gear range D or S again.
Should the power supply to the selector lever be interrupted in position P, the selector lever will be locked. If this should happen the manual release can be used page 42.
Selector lever lock
Fig. 168 Selector lever lock.
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve- hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.
The selector lever lock is released as follows:
Switch the ignition on.
Press the brake pedal and, at the same time, hold the lock button in the direction of the arrow Fig. 168.
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition switched on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P and N. The brake pedal must be pressed to release the lever while pressing the release button if the selector lever is in the position P. As a re- minder for the driver, with the lever in posi- tions P or N the following message will be shown on the display:
When stationary, apply footbrake while selecting a gear.
Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta- tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h (3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the lever lock is automatically deactivated in position N.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly through posi- tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck. The selector lever lock engages auto- matically if the brake pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about two seconds.
Interlock button
The interlock button on the selector lever handle prevents the driver from inadvertently engaging certain gears. Press the button in to disengage the selector lever lock.
Safety interlock for ignition key
Once the ignition has been turned off, the key may be removed only if the gear selector is in position P. While the key is not in the ig- nition, the selector lever is locked in position P.
182
Driving
Note
If the selector lever lock does not engage, there is a fault. The transmission is interrup- ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally moving. Follow the procedure below in order for the selector lever lock to engage again:
With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake pedal and release it again.
With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake pedal. Move the selector lever to posi- tion P or N and subsequently engage a gear.
Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle does not move forwards or back. Proceed to the next mode:
When the vehicle does not move in the required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engaged. Press the brake pedal and engage the gear range again.
If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system mal- function. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked.
Changing gears in tiptronic mode*
Fig. 169 Centre console: changing gear with tiptronic
Fig. 170 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox levers
The tiptronic gives the driver the option to change gears manually.
Changing gear manually with the selector lever
It is possible to change to tiptronic mode, both when the vehicle is stopped and while driving.
To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se- lector lever from position D/S to the right. As soon as the change is made the selector level will be shown in the position M on the instrument panel display (for example M4 means that the fourth gear is engaged).
Move the selector lever forwards + to se- lect a higher gear Fig. 169.
Move the selector lever backwards to select a lower gear.
Changing gear manually with the gearshift paddles*
The gearshift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the position D/S or M.
Press the gearshift paddle + to select a higher gear Fig. 170.
Press the gearshift paddle to select a lower gear.
With the selector lever in position D/S, if no paddle is operated during a short period of time, the gearbox control system switches back to automatic mode. To switch to per- manent manual gear change using the gearshift paddles, move the selector lever from position D/S to the right.
183
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
When accelerating, the gearbox automatical- ly shifts up into the next gear shortly before the maximum engine speed is reached.
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear- box will not shift down until there is no risk of over-revving the engine.
When the kick-down feature is used, the gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend- ing on road speed and engine speed.
Driving tips
The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical- ly as the vehicle moves.
The engine can only start with the selector lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, below -10C (50F), the engine can only start with the selector lever in position P.
Starting the vehicle
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Press and hold the interlock button (the button on the selector lever handle), move the selector lever to the desired position, for instance D page 181, and release the interlock button.
Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a slight movement can be felt).
Release the brake and press the accelerator .
Stopping briefly
Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle briefly when stationary (for instance at traf- fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.
Stopping/Parking
If the driver door is opened and the selector lever is not in position P, the vehicle could move. The driver message will be: Gear change: selector lever in the drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.
Press and hold the brake pedal .
Apply the handbrake.
Move the selector lever to position P.
Holding the car on a hill
Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- vent the vehicle from moving backwards; if necessary, apply the handbrake . Do not try to stop the vehicle rolling back by increasing the engine speed when a gear is engaged (pressing the accelerator) .
Starting off uphill
Apply the handbrake.
Once you have engaged a gear press the accelerator carefully and disengage the handbrake.
Driving down hills: in some situations (on mountain roads or when towing a trailer or caravan) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to the manual gearbox pro- gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec- ted manually to suit the driving conditions .
On level ground it is sufficient to move the selector lever to position P. On slopes, first engage the parking brake and then put the selection lever into the P position. This avoids overloading the locking mechanism and it will be easier to move the selector lev- er from position P.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Selector lever positions on page 181.
Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long periods. Constant braking causes overheating in the brakes. This could significantly reduce brak- ing power, increase braking distance or even result in the total failure of the brake system.
To avoid rolling back on gradients always hold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand- brake if you have to stop.
CAUTION
If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing the accelerator when a gear has been selec- ted. This could cause overheating and
184
Driving
damage the automatic gearbox. Apply the handbrake firmly or press the brake pedal in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling back.
If you allow the car to roll with the selector lever in position N with the engine switched off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged as it will not be lubricated.
In certain driving situations or traffic condi- tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged creeping of the vehicle or traffic jams with continuous stoppages, the gearbox could overheat causing damage! If the warning lamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as possible and wait for the gearbox to cool page 187.
Kick-down feature
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- celeration to be reached.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resistance at full throt- tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.
Launch control programme 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet- rol engines superior to 140 kW.
The Launch control programme enables maxi- mum acceleration.
Important: the engine must have reached op- erating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned.
The engine speed for launch-control is differ- ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the launch-control you must disconnect the anti- slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con- nect system menu page 112. The warning lamp will stay switched on or will flash slowly depending on whether or not the vehi- cle has a driver information system*.
On vehicles with the driver information sys- tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and the corresponding text message Stability
control deactivated (temporary) ap- pears on the instrument panel to indicate the deactivation status.
When the engine is running, switch off the traction control (ASR)1).
Turn the selector lever to the position S or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv- ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile* page 229.
Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and hold it down for at least one sec- ond.
With your right foot, press the accelerator down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about 2,000 rpm (diesel engine).
Take your left foot off the brake pedal.
WARNING
Always adapt your driving style to the traf- fic conditions.
Only use the launch control programme when road and traffic conditions permit, and make sure your manner of driving and accel- erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or endanger other road users.
1) Vehicles without driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver in- formation system: the warning lamp stays on.
185
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Make sure that the ESC remains switched on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci- dent!
After putting the vehicle into gear, the sport mode of the ESC should be deactiva- ted again by briefly pressing the OFF but- ton.
Note
After using the Launch control programme, the temperature in the gearbox may have in- creased considerably. In this case, the pro- gramme could be disabled for several mi- nutes. The programme can be used again af- ter the cooling phase.
Accelerating with the Launch control pro- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of the vehicle. This can result in increased wear and tear.
Downhill speed control*
The downhill speed control function helps the driver when driving down steep gradi- ents.
Downhill speed control is activated when the selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto- matically engages a lower gear that is suita- ble for the slope. The downhill speed control
function attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of physics and technical drive limitations). It may be necessary to adjust the speed again using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv- en that the downhill speed control can only change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de- scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and reduce the charge on the brakes.
Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal.
On vehicles with cruise control system* page 197, downhill speed control is acti- vated when you set a cruising speed.
WARNING
The downhill speed control cannot defy the laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be maintained constant in all situations. Always be prepared to use the brakes!
Inertia mode
The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer- tain stretches to be driven without using the accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.
Use the inertia mode to let the vehicle roll before, for example, arriving in a town.
Switching on inertia mode
Important: selector lever must be in position D, gradients below 12 %.
Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode page 229.
Take your foot off the accelerator.
The driver message Inertia will be dis- played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12 mph), the gearbox will automatically disen- gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi- cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.
Stopping inertia mode
Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.
To make use of the braking force and switch off the engine again, simply press the brake pedal briefly.
Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged section with less energy) and the switching off using inertia (= shorter section without the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and emission balance.
186
Driving
WARNING
If the inertia mode has been switched on, take into account, when approaching an ob- stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal, that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu- al manner: risk of accident!
When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: risk of accident!
If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode.
Note
Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEAT Drive Profile*) driving mode.
The driver message Inertia is only dis- played with the current consumption. In iner- tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed (for example E will appear instead of E7).
On downhill sections with gradients above 15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be switched off temporarily.
Backup programme
A backup programme is in place if a fault should occur in the control system.
If all the positions of the selector lever are shown over a light background on the instru- ment panel display, there is a system fault and the automatic gearbox will operate in
with the backup programme. When the back- up programme is activated, it is possible to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and within a selected range of gears. In some ca- ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi- ble.
CAUTION
If the gearbox operates with the backup pro- gramme, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.
Clutch
Clutch overheating! Please stop!
The clutch has overheated and could be dam- aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear- box to cool with the engine at idling speed and the selector lever in position P. When the warning lamp and the driver message switch off, have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay. If the warning lamp and the driver message do not switch off, do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tance.
Gearbox malfunctions
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve- hicle and place the lever in the position P.
There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ing. Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: System fault! You may continue driving.
Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving with re- strictions. Reverse gear disa bled
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until switching off the engine
Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- tance.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your driving accordingly
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When the warning lamp switches off, you can con- tinue driving in a normal manner.
187
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Gearbox: press the brake and engage a gear again.
If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a high temperature, this driver message will be displayed when the gearbox has cooled again.
Run-in and economical driving
Running-in the engine
A new vehicle should be run in over a dis- tance of 1500 km (1000 miles). For the first 1,000 km the engine speed should not ex- ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine speed. In doing so, do not accelerate at full throttle and do not drive with a trailer! From 1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) you can gradually increase the engine rpm and road speed.
During its first few hours of running, the in- ternal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bed- ded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 km influences the future engine perform- ance. Subsequently, also drive at a moderate rate, especially when the engine is still cold: this will lead to less engine wear and tear and will prolong its useful life.
You should also avoid driving with the engine speed too low. Change down to a lower gear when the engine no longer runs smoothly. If the engine revs too much, cut fuel injection to protect the engine.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufac- ture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage recy- cling
Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling
Modular construction to facilitate disman- tling
Increased use of single-grade materials.
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
Use of recycled materials.
Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated.
Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources.
Reduction of volatile components, includ- ing odour, in plastic materials.
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- valent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities.
Use of plastic film as protection during ve- hicle transport.
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- tems.
Recycling and energy recovery from resi- dues (RDF).
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.).
The use of water-soluble paints.
188
Driving
Economical and environmentally- friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump- tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco- nomical driving style and proper anticipation of traffic conditions. The following section gives you some tips on lessening the impact on the environment and reducing your oper- ating costs at the same time.
Active cylinder management (ACT)*display
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active cylinder management (ACT) may automati- cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders if the driving situation does not require too much power. When it is switched off, no fuel is injected into these cylinders, hence total fuel consumption may be reduced. The num- ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in- strument panel display page 31.
Foresight when driving
Acceleration causes the vehicle to consume more fuel. If you think ahead when driving, you will need to brake less and thus acceler- ate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll slowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in- stance when you can see that the next traffic lights are red). This takes advantage of the engine braking effect, reducing wear on the
brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con- sumption will drop to zero due to the overrun fuel cut-off.
Changing gear to save energy
An effective way of saving is to change in ad- vance to a higher gear. Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces- sary amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second gear as soon as possible. In any case, we rec- ommend that you change to a higher gear upon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the highest possible gear appropriate for the driving sit- uation (the engine should continue function- ing with cyclical regularity).
Automatic gearbox: accelerate gradually and without reaching the kick-down position.
Avoid driving at high speed
Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos- sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmful gases and noise pollution multiply dispropor- tionately as speed is increased. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Reduce idling time
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is automatically reduced. In vehicles without the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off the engine, for example, at level crossings
and at traffic lights that remain red for long periods of time. When an engine has reached operating temperature, and depending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off for a minimum of about 5 seconds already saves more than the amount of fuel necessa- ry for restarting.
The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- tant emissions are also especially high dur- ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Regular maintenance
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even before the engine is started. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their optimal operating temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions.
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- ing temperature after about four kilometres
189
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re- turn to a normal level.
Check tyre pressure
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the correct pressures page 296 to save fuel. If the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump- tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa- ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to always check the luggage compartment to make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- ing transported.
Since the luggage rack increases the aerody- namic drag of the vehicle, you should remove it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel.
Save electrical energy
The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen- erating electricity. This implies that any in- crease in power consumption also increases fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that use a lot of electricity includes the blower at
a high setting, the rear window heating or the seat heating*.
Engine management and ex- haust gas purification system
Introduction
WARNING
Because of the high temperatures which can occur in the exhaust purification system (catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil- ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex- haust can come into contact with flammable materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at the forest edge). Fire hazard!
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle around the area of the exhaust system: Fire hazard!
Note
While the control lamps , , or re- main lit, there may be engine problems, fuel consumption may increase and the engine may lose power.
Catalytic converter 3 Applies to vehicles with petrol engine
The vehicle must only be used with unleaded petrol, otherwise the catalytic converter will be irreparably damaged.
Never drive until the tank is empty; an irregu- lar supply of fuel can cause faulty combus- tion. In these cases, unburned fuel reaches the exhaust system, which can overheat and damage the catalytic converter.
Diesel particulate filter 3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys- tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil- ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is cleaned automatically without need for indi- cation by the warning lamp . This may be noticed because the engine idle speed in- creases and an odour may be detected.
If automatic filter purification cannot be car- ried out (because only short trips are taken, for example), soot will accumulate on the fil- ter and the Diesel particulate filter warning lamp will switch on.
Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc- ess by driving in the following manner: drive for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear
190
Driving
(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en- gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The rise in temperature causes the soot on the fil- ter to burn. On completion of the cleaning the warning lamp will switch off. If the warn- ing lamp does not switch off, go immediately to a specialised workshop to rectify the prob- lem.
Engine management*
This warning lamp monitors the engine man- agement system for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con- trol) lights up when the ignition is switched on while system operation is being verified. It should go out once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are driving, this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi- cle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Emission control system*
Control lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.
The control lamp lights up:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.
Engine pre-heating/fault system*
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.
The control lamp lights up
If the control lamp lights up when the en- gine is started it means that the glow plugs are preheating. The engine can be started straight away when the lamp switches off.
Control lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving, the glow plug system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Driving tips
Driving on flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- ing through water, for example, along a floo- ded road, please observe the following:
The water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork.
Drive at pedestrian speed.
WARNING
After driving through water, mud, sludge, etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight- ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully several times will remove the moisture and restore the full braking effect.
CAUTION
Driving through flooded areas may severely damage vehicle components such as the en- gine, transmission, running gear or electrical system.
Whenever driving through water, the Start- Stop system* must be switched off page 192.
Note
Check the depth of the water before enter- ing the flooded zone.
191
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or stop the engine in any situation.
Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite direction may splash water that could exceed the maximum permitted water height for your vehicle.
Avoid driving through salt water (corro- sion).
Driver assistance systems
Start-Stop System*
Description and operation
The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re- duce CO2 emissions.
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- cally switch off when the vehicle stops, when stopping at traffic lights for example. The ig- nition remains switched on during the stop- ping phase. The engine automatically switches back on when required. In this sit- uation the light of the START ENGINE STOP but- ton stays on.
As soon as the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activa- ted.
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode
The driver door must be closed.
The driver must have their seat belt fas- tened.
The bonnet must be closed.
The engine must have reached a minimum service temperature.
The reverse gear must not be engaged.
The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.
WARNING
Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is stationary. The brake servo and power steering functions will not be completely cov- ered under warranty. More force may also be needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury.
Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- ing could lock making it impossible to steer the vehicle.
To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment page 194.
CAUTION
The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded areas page 194.
Stopping/Starting the engine
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
When the vehicle is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear on the instrument panel dis- play.
192
Driver assistance systems
When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- gine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a stop and keep the brake pedal pressed down with your foot. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear in the display.
When you take your foot off the brake pedal the engine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.
Additional information related to the auto- matic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to when in manual mode. With the selector lev- er in position P, the engine will also remain switched off when you take your foot off the brake pedal. In order to start the engine up again the accelerator must be pressed, or an- other gear engaged or the brake released.
If the selector lever is placed in position R during the stopping phase, the engine will start up again.
Change from position D to P to prevent the engine from accidentally starting when changing and passing by position R.
Note
You can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or increasing the brake force applied. While the vehicle re- mains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for exam- ple. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop.
In vehicles with manual gearbox, during the stopping phases the brake pedal must re- main depressed to prevent the vehicle from moving.
If the engine stalls in vehicles with man- ual gearbox, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal.
General notes
The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode frequently for different reasons.
The engine does not switch off
Before the stopping phase, the system veri- fies whether certain conditions are met. The engine does not switch off, in the following situations for example:
The engine has not yet reached the mini- mum required temperature for the Start-Stop mode.
The interior temperature selected for the air conditioner has not yet been reached.
The interior temperature is very high/low.
Defrost function button activated page 44.
The parking aid* is switched on.
The battery is very low.
The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- ing turned.
If there is a danger of misting.
After engaging reverse gear.
In case of a very steep gradient.
The indication is shown on the instrument panel display, and in addition, the driver in- formation system* shows, .
The engine starts by itself
During a stopping phase the normal Start- Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow- ing situations: The engine restarts by itself without involvement from the driver.
The interior temperature differs from the value selected on the air conditioner.
Defrost function button activated page 44.
The brake has been pressed several times consecutively.
The battery is too low.
High power consumption. 193
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Note
In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the selector lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6 mph) for the system to return to conditions in which the engine can be stopped.
Manually switching on/off the Start- Stop system
Fig. 171 Centre console: Start-Stop system button
If you do not wish to use the system, you can switch it off manually.
To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop system, press the button . The button symbol remains lit up yellow when the sys- tem is switched off.
Note
The system is automatically switched on each time the engine is deliberately stopped dur- ing a stopping phase. The engine will start automatically.
Driver messages on the instrument panel display
Start-Stop system deactivated. Start the engine manually This driver message is displayed when cer- tain conditions are not met during the stop- ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot restart the engine. The engine must be star- ted manually.
Start-Stop system: Fault! Func- tion not available There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault repaired.
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Description and operation 3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive
Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steep descents by automatically braking all four
wheels, both when moving forward and in re- verse. As the anti-lock brake system remains active, it prevents the wheels from locking. In vehicles with manual transmission, the Hill Descent Control adapts the theoretical speed without slowing the engine below its idling speed.
After starting the descent of a slope below 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a min- imum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the driver may increase or decrease the speed within the limit by pressing the accelerator or the brake. At this point the function is inter- rupted and, if necessary, it is then reactiva- ted.
Even so, it is imperative that the surface guarantees sufficient adhesion. For this rea- son, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its function when, for example, descending a slope with a frozen or slippery surface.
Hill Descent Control is available when the dash panel display shows the message .
Hill Descent Control automatically intervenes if the following conditions are met:
The vehicle engine is running.
The Offroad driving profile has been selec- ted page 229. Driving at a speed below 30 km/h (18 mph) (the message is shown on the dash panel display).
194
Driver assistance systems
The slope of the descent is at least 10% when driving forward and 9% when driving in reverse.
The brake and the accelerator are not pressed.
Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press- ing the brake and the accelerator or if the slope is below 5%. The function may be dis- connected manually in the Easy Connect sys- tem by pressing the button and the HDC
function button Fig. 41.
Control lamps
in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
It lights up white
Hill Descent Control is active.
It lights up grey
Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.
Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
WARNING
Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an acci- dent could occur and cause injury.
Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary system that in some situations may not suffi- ciently brake the vehicle when going down a slope.
The speed of the vehicle may increase de- spite the intervention of Hill Descent Control.
Auto Hold Function
Description and operation
Fig. 172 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: Auto Hold function button.
The control light of the Fig. 172 button remains on when the Auto Hold function is connected.
Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station- ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri- od of time with the engine running, for exam- ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit- tent stops.
When connected, the Auto Hold function au- tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling when stationary without pressing the brake pedal.
After detecting that the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal has been released, the Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driver can lift their foot off the brake pedal.
When the driver touches the accelerator ped- al or accelerates slightly to continue driving, the Auto Hold function releases the brake. The vehicle moves according to the slope of the road.
If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con- ditions required by the Auto Hold function is impaired, it disconnects itself and the but- ton's control light goes out Fig. 172. The electronic parking brake connects automati- cally, if necessary, to park the vehicle safe- ly .
Conditions for keeping the vehicle stationary with the Auto Hold function
The driver door must be closed.
The driver's seat belt must be fastened. 195
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
The engine is running.
Switching the Auto Hold function on and off
Press the button . The control lamp on the button goes out when the Auto Hold func- tion is switched off.
Automatically engaging and disengaging the Auto Hold function
If the Auto Hold function was switched on with the button before disengaging the ig- nition, the function will remain on after the ignition is re-engaged.
If the Auto Hold function was not switched on, it will automatically remain off next time the ignition is engaged.
The Auto Hold function is automatically switched on if the following conditions are met:
All conditions must be met at the same time :
Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox
1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake ped- al on a flat surface or on a slope.
2. The engine rotates correctly.
All conditions must be met at the same time :
Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox
Upon pressing the clutch and accelerating at the same time, the brake releases gradu- ally.
Upon accelerating, the brake releases gradu- ally.
The Auto Hold function is automatically turned off if the following conditions are met:
Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox
1.
If any of the conditions mentioned on page 195, Conditions for keeping the vehicle
stationary with the Auto Hold function are no lon- ger met.
2. If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly
is detected.
3. If the engine is turned
off or stalls. If the engine is switch-
ed off.
4. The clutch and the ac-
celerator are pressed at the same time.
If the accelerator is pressed.
5.
If any of the tyres has only minimal contact
with the ground, e.g. in the case of axle articu-
lation.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the Auto Hold function cannot defy the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The greater convenience provided by the Auto Hold function should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety.
Never leave the vehicle running and with the Auto Hold function switched on.
The Auto Hold function cannot always keep the vehicle stationary uphill or downhill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on slippery or frozen surfaces.
Note
Before entering a car wash, always switch off the Auto Hold function, because if the elec- tronic parking brake is automatically connec- ted, it may cause damage.
196
Driver assistance systems
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Operation
Fig. 173 Instrument panel display: CCS status indications
Read the additional information carefully page 37
The cruise control system (CCS) is able to maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 mph).
The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas- ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the vehicle .
Control lamp
When the warning lamp is lit, cruise con- trol is active.
Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.
Displayed on the CCS screen
Status Fig. 173:
CCS temporarily switched off. The set speed is displayed in small or darkened figures.
System error. Contact a specialised work- shop.
CCS switched on. The speed memory is empty.
The CCS is switched on. The set speed is displayed in large figures.
WARNING
Use of the cruise control could cause acci- dents and severe injuries if it is not possible to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safety distance.
Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf- fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is insufficient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
Never use the CCS when driving off-road or on unpaved roads.
A
B
C
D
Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation.
To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time you fin- ish using it.
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions.
When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends to accelerate under its own weight. Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
Operating the cruise control system*
Read the additional information carefully page 37
The value indicated in the table in brackets (in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru- ment panels with indications in miles.
197
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Changing gear in CCS mode
The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- cally after a gear is engaged.
Travelling down hills with the CCS
When travelling down hills the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle down using the brake pedal and reduce gears if required.
Automatic off
The cruise control system (CCS) is switched off automatically or temporarily:
If the system detects a fault that could af- fect the working order of the CCS.
If you press and maintain the accelerator pedal for a certain time, driving faster than the stored speed.
If the dynamic driving control systems in- tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC).
If the airbag is triggered.
Speed limiter
Display messages and warning and control lamp
Fig. 174 On the instrument panel display: messages on the status of the speed limiter.
The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a speed individually programmed upwards of approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in forwards gears
Display messages on the speed limiter
Status Fig. 174:
The speed limiter is active. The last speed set is displayed in large figures.
The speed limiter is not active. The last speed set is displayed in small or dark- ened figures.
The speed limiter is switched off. The to- tal mileage is displayed.
A
B
C
Warning and control lamp
Lights up green
The speed limiter is switched on and active.
Flashes green
The speed set by the speed limiter has been exceeded.
Lights up
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speed limiter are active.
Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.
WARNING
After use, always switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes.
The speed limiter does not relieve the driv- er of their responsibility to drive at the appro- priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary.
Using the speed limiter with adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents, e.g. because of aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You should use the speed limiter function only when traffic, road and weather conditions al- low it to be used safely.
198
Driver assistance systems
When driving downhill, the speed limiter cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will increase due to its own weight. In this case, select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
Note
Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary.
If when switching the ignition off, the cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter were switched on, then the cruise control system
or the adaptive cruise control will automati- cally switch themselves on when the ignition is back on. However, no speed will be stored. The last set speed of the speed limiter will be stored.
Operate the speed limiter
Fig. 175 On the left of the steering column: control and buttons to operate the speed lim- iter.
Fig. 176 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the speed limiter.
Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 175 or the third lever Fig. 176
Effect
Switching on the speed limiter Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed lim- iter is stored. It does not take effect yet.
199
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 175 or the third lever Fig. 176
Effect
Switching between the speed limiter and cruise control (CCS) or the adaptive cruise control (ACC) (with the speed limiter switched on)
Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the adaptive cruise control (ACC).
Switching on the speed limiter Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or button 1 on the third lever. The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and the limiter is switched on.
Temporarily switching off the speed limit- er limitation
Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position or move the third lever into position .
The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be stored.
Temporarily switch off the speed limiter limitation pressing down the accelerator (kick-down)
Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to over- take). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off temporarily.
The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after return- ing to less than the set speed.
Switching the speed limiter on again Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into posi- tion .
The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the speed you are driving at is lower than the speed set as maximum.
Increasing the set speed of the limiter
Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or press 1 on the third lever to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.
The speed is limited to the set value Press on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.
Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.
Reducing the set speed of the limiter
Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or move the third lever into position to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.
The speed is limited to the set value Press on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.
Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to continuously decrease speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and to set it.
200
Driver assistance systems
Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 175 or the third lever Fig. 176
Effect
Switching off the speed limiter Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lever into position .
The system switches off. The set speed will be stored.
The values shown in the table in brackets, in mph, are displayed only in instrument panels with indications in miles.
Going down slopes with the speed limiter
If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee- ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards the warning and control lamps flash page 198 and an acoustic warning may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low- er gear.
Switching off temporarily
If you wish to temporarily switch off the speed limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control Fig. 175 1 of the turn signal lever into po- sition or the third lever into pressure point or press button 2 on any lever.
After overtaking, the speed limiter can be switched on with the previously set speed by pressing button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or by moving the third lever in- to pressure point.
Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by pressing down the accelerator (kick-down)
If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- down) and the set speed is exceeded be- cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is temporarily disabled.
To confirm it being switched off an acoustic signal sound once. While the limiter is off, the warning and control lamp flashes.
When the accelerator is no longer pressed down and the speed is reduced below the set value, the limiter switches on again. The con- trol lamp will light up and remain lit.
Automatic off
The speed limiter is automatically switched off:
If the system detects a fault that could neg- atively affect the working order of the limiter.
If the airbag is triggered.
CAUTION
For automatic switching off due to system failures, for security reasons, the limiter is only completely switched off when the driver
stops pressing the accelerator at some point or consciously switches off the system.
Adaptive Cruise Control ACC*
Introduction
Fig. 177 Detection area.
table on page 2
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten- sion of the normal cruise control system (CCS) .
The ACC function allows the driver to estab- lish a cruise speed of between 30 and 210
201
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
km/h (18 and 150 mph), as well as the tem- porary distance required with regard to the vehicle in front. The ACC function will adapt the vehicle's cruise speed at all times, main- taining a safe distance with the vehicle in front.
The ACC function is based on a radar sensor that can measure the distance to the vehicles in front.
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it stops.
Driver intervention prompt
During driving, the ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent in the system. In other words, in certain circumstances the driver will have to adjust speed him or herself, as well as the distance from other vehicles.
In this case, the instrument panel screen will warn you to intervene by applying the brake and a warning tone will be heard page 203.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the ACC cannot overcome the system's inherent limitations or change the laws of physics. If used negli- gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness.
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, on steep roads, with several bends or in slip- pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads.
Never use the ACC when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de- signed for use on paved roads only.
The ACC does not react on approaching a fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stopped at the traffic lights.
The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes- trian monitoring system is available. In addi- tion, the system does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or approaching head-on down the same lane.
If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient- ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applying the pedal.
If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off.
If the vehicle continues to move involuntar- ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the pedal.
If the dash panel displays a driver interven- tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself.
The driver should be ready to accelerate or brake by him/herself at all times.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar sen- sor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
Repairs to the radar sensor require special- ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- pose.
Note
If the ACC system does not work as descri- bed in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.
Maximum speed with the ACC activated is limited to 210 km/h (150 mph).
When the ACC is switched on, strange noises may be heard during automatic brak- ing cause by the braking system.
202
Driver assistance systems
Indications on the display, warning and control lamps
Fig. 178 On the instrument panel display: (A) ACC temporarily inactive, vehicle detected in front, temporary distance adjusted. (B) ACC active, vehicle detected in front, temporary distance adjusted.
Status display
Indications on the display Fig. 178:
Vehicle in front, the ACC is inactive.1
Distance margin selected, the ACC is in- active.
Vehicle detected in front. The ACC is ac- tive.
Adjustment of the temporary distance from the vehicle in front with a program- med speed.
Temporary distance adjustment from the vehicle in front with a programmed speed.
Warning and control lamps
in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
The speed reduction by the ACC to maintain the distance from the vehi- cle in front is not sufficient.
Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.
The ACC is not currently available.a)
With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and start it up again. Check the SEAT badge area on the front Fig. 179 (in case it is dirty or icy or it has been hit). If it is still unavailable, refer to a specialised workshop to have the system inspected.
a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in colour.
2
3
4
5
The ACC is active.
No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed remains constant.
If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac- tive.
A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts speed and distance from the vehicle in front.
If the symbol is grey: the ACC is not active.
The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.
The ACC and the speed limiter are active.
The ACC and the cruise control system (CCS) are active.
It lights up green
The ACC is active.
Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.
203
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
Note
When the ACC is connected, the indications on the instrument panel screen may be con- cealed by warnings from other functions, such as an incoming call.
Radar sensor
Fig. 179 On the front behind the SEAT badge: radar sensor.
On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar sensor has been installed to capture the traf- fic situation Fig. 179. This sensor can de- tect vehicles in front up to a distance of ap- proximately 120 m.
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. The instrument panel displays the following message: ACC: No sensor vision! If necessary, clean the SEAT badge area .
When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the ACC will automatically be available again. The message on the instru- ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra- dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex- ample, in a closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works).
The area in front of and around the radar sen- sor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect ACC operation.
If structural modifications are made to the ve- hicle, for example, if the suspension is low- ered or the front spoiler is modified, ACC op- eration may be affected. So structural modifi- cations should only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.
If work is done incorrectly on the front of the vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged or lose its settings, and ACC operation may be affected. So repair work should only be
made by specialised workshops. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- pose.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar sen- sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis- connect the ACC. This will avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
The sensor may become damaged or lose its settings when knocked, for example, dur- ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro- mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.
Repairs to the radar sensor require special- ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- pose.
Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.
204
Driver assistance systems
Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC
Fig. 180 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control.
Fig. 181 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is connected, the green control lamp will light up on the instrument panel, and the programmed speed and ACC status will be displayed Fig. 178.
Conditions for the adaptive cruise control to be activated
The selector lever must be at the D or S po- sition or in the tiptronic selection track. In manual gearbox any forward gear must be engaged, except the 1st gear.
In vehicles with manual gearbox, if there is no programmed speed, drive at least at 30 km/h (18 mph).
Speed control
When the ACC is connected, speed can be programmed and adjusted. The programmed speed must be different from the speed at which the vehicle travels if the distance is be- ing adjusted at the time.
What functions can be operated?
If you activate the ACC the current speed can be programmed as the control speed.
During driving, control can be operated at any time and the speed also modified.
The following settings can also be adjusted:
Distance.
Driving Programme.
Driving style.
Activating/Deactivating
Any speed1) between 30 and 210 km/h (19 and 150 mph) can be adjusted.
Activating the ACC
Pull the lever to position 1 Fig. 180. ACC standby will be shown on the instrument panel display.
Programme speed and activate control
Press the SET Fig. 181 button to pro- gramme current speed.
Automatic gearbox: apply the brake pedal to activate control with the vehicle stationary.
Deactivating the ACC
Move the lever to position 0 until it en- gages. The text ACC: off appears.
Altering speed
To increase or reduce speed step by step, press the lever up/down briefly Fig. 181.
1) Different speed limits apply in each country and depend on the unit indicated on the speedometer.
205
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Any modification to the programmed speed is shown on the bottom left part of the instru- ment panel display.
Adjusting distance level
The distance according to speed with regard to the vehicle in front can be controlled on the Easy Connect system on 5 levels page 27.
In wet road conditions, you should always set a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in front than when driving in dry conditions.
The following distances can be preselected:
Very short
Short
Media
Long
Very long
You can use the Easy Connect system to ad- just the level of distance that should be ad- justed when the ACC is switched on with the button and the SETUP and Driver assistance
function buttons page 27.
Adjusting the driving programme
In vehicles with driving profile selection (SEAT Drive Profile), the profile selected can influence acceleration behaviour page 229.
The following driving programmes items can be selected:
Normal
Sport
Eco
Convenience
In vehicles without the driving profile selec- tion function, acceleration behaviour can be influenced by selecting a driving programme on the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETUP and Driver assistance
function buttons page 27.
The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react:
If the accelerator is pressed.
If there is no gear engaged.
If the ESC is controlling.
If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged.
If the vehicle is reversing.
Driving faster than 210 km/h (150 mph).
WARNING
There is a danger of rear collision when the minimum distance to the vehicle in front is exceeded and the speed difference between
both vehicles is so great that a speed reduc- tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this case the brake pedal should be applied immedi- ately.
The ACC may not be able to detect all situa- tions properly.
Stepping on the accelerator may cause the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver braking will have priority over intervention by the speed control or adaptive cruise control.
Always be ready to use the brakes!
Observe country-specific provisions gov- erning obligatory minimum distances be- tween vehicles.
Note
The programmed speed is erased once the ignition or the ACC are switched off.
When the traction control system (ASR) is deactivated during acceleration or else the ESC is activated in Sport* Mode ( page 112), the ACC switches off automati- cally.
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the engine switches off automatically during the ACC stopping phase and restarts automatical- ly to begin driving.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until
206
Driver assistance systems
it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it stops.
The ACC will still be available for a few sec- onds. The vehicle will restart by itself if the vehicle in front moves (traffic jam assistant).
Disconnection criteria
The ACC will switch off if the driver applies the brake pedal or the driver's door is opened.
Restarting the vehicle with the ACC manually
The ACC can be activated again by moving the lever to position 2 Fig. 182.
CAUTION
If your vehicle with ACC does not start up as expected, you can drive off by briefly step- ping on the accelerator.
The Start-Stop system usually acts if you are driving with ACC.
Interrupting control
Fig. 182 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control.
Important: the ACC is active.
Interrupting control during driving
Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACC standby message is displayed to the driver. or
Brake.
To resume the programmed speed, turn the lever to position 2 .
Interrupt speed control with the vehicle sta- tionary
Applies to vehicles with automatic gearbox:
Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACC standby message is displayed to the driver.
To resume control, apply the brake and turn the lever to position 2 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to activate control and resume the programmed speed if the road, traffic or weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of accident!
Setting the distance
Fig. 183 Control lever: setting the distance.
To display the distance currently program- med, briefly press the rocking button Fig. 183.
To increase/reduce the distance one level, press the rocking button again towards the left/right. The instrument panel display modifies the distance between both vehicles.
If the vehicle approaches another vehicle de- tected in front of it, the ACC reduces the
207
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
speed accordingly and then controls the ad- justed distance. If the vehicle detected in front accelerates, the adaptive cruise control will also accelerate up to the target speed programmed at most.
The greater the speed, the greater the dis- tance in metres should be . We recom- mend the setting Distance 3.
WARNING
With regard to distance setting, the driver is responsible for observing country-specific legislation.
Driver messages
ACC not available
The system can no longer continue to guar- antee safe vehicle detection and will be de- activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.
ACC: currently not available. No sensor vi- sion
ACC and Front Assist: currently not availa- ble. No sensor vision
This message will be displayed to the driver if the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for
example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt. Clean the SEAT badge Fig. 179.
ACC: currently not available. Gradient too steep
The maximum road slope has been excee- ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on.
ACC: only available in D, S or M
Select the D/S or M position on the selector lever.
ACC: parking brake applied
The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is applied. The ACC is available once again after the parking brake is released.
ACC: currently not available. Intervention of stability control
The message for the driver is displayed when the electronic stability control (ESC) inter- venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically switched off.
ACC: Take action!
The message for the driver is displayed if, when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al- though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding with another vehicle.
ACC: speed limit
The message for the driver is displayed if, in vehicles with manual gearbox, the current speed is too low for the ACC mode.
The speed to be stored must be at least 30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).
ACC: available as of the 2nd gear
The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear (manual gearbox).
ACC: engine speed
The message for the driver is displayed if, when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv- er does not shift up or down a gear in time, which means exceeding or not reaching the permissible engine speed. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.
ACC: clutch pressed
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing the clutch pedal for longer abandons control mode.
Door open
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle station- ary and the door open.
208
Driver assistance systems
Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con- trol ACC temporarily in certain situa- tions
In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated due to the system's limitations :
When changing lanes, on tight bends and roundabouts, in acceleration and decelera- tion lanes on motorways or in sections with road works to prevent involuntary accelera- tion to reach the programmed speed.
When going through a tunnel, as operation could be affected.
On roads with several lanes, when other ve- hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak- ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be overtaken on the right.
In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the vehicle in front might not be detected proper- ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be detected at all.
WARNING
If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- tions described, serious accidents and inju- ries may occur.
Always switch off the ACC in critical situa- tions.
Note
If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore- mentioned situations, you may commit a le- gal offence.
Special driving situations
Fig. 184 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy- clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor.
Fig. 185 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One vehicle turning and another stationary.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain physical limitations inherent in the system. For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unexpected or come late from the driver's point of view. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessa- ry.
For example, the following traffic situations call for the utmost attention:
Starting driving after a stopping phase (only vehicles with automatic gearbox)
After a stopping phase the ACC may begin driving automatically when the vehicle in front drives off.
209
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Overtaking
When the turn signal lights up before the ve- hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically and thus reduces the distance from the vehi- cle in front.
When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane, if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro- grammed speed and maintains it.
System acceleration can be interrupted at any time by pressing the brake or moving the third lever backwards page 205.
Driving through a bend
On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen- sor may no longer determine the vehicle in front or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane Fig. 184 A. In these situations the vehicle may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re- act to the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to intervene by accelerating or in- terrupting the braking process by applying the brake or pushing the third lever back- wards page 205.
Driving in tunnels
When driving through tunnels the radar sen- sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- nels.
Narrow or misaligned vehicles
The radar sensor can only detect narrow or misaligned vehicles when they are within range Fig. 184 B. This applies particularly to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.
Vehicles with special loads and accessories
Special loads and accessories of other vehi- cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or over the top may be out of the ACC's range.
Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi- cles with special loads and accessories or when overtaking them. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Vehicles changing lanes a short distance away from your own can only be detected when they are within range of the sensors. Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re- act Fig. 185 C. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.
Stationary vehicles
The ACC does not detect stationary objects while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged vehicles.
If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to it
Fig. 185 D. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.
Vehicles driving in the opposite direction and vehicles crossing your path
The ACC does not react to vehicles approach- ing from the opposite direction or vehicles crossing your path.
Metal objects
Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works, can confuse the radar sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.
Factors that may affect how the radar sensor operates
If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is deactivated temporarily. The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel dis- play. If necessary clean the SEAT badge Fig. 179.
When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the ACC will automatically be available again. The message on the instru- ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra- dar reverse reflection, for example in a closed car park.
210
Driver assistance systems
Trailer mode
When driving with trailer the ACC controls less dynamically.
Overheated brakes
If the brakes overheat, for example after abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes, the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
Adaptive cruise control can be reactivated once brake temperature has cooled suffi- ciently. The message will disappear from the instrument panel display. If the message ACC not available remains on for quite a long time it means that there is a fault. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis- iting a SEAT dealership.
WARNING
If the message ACC ready to start ap- pears on the instrument panel display and the vehicle in front starts up, the vehicle will start up automatically. In this case the radar sensor may not detect obstacles on the road. This could cause an accident and serious in- juries.
Before driving off, check that the road is clear. If necessary, apply the brake.
Front Assist system including City emergency braking and pedestrian monitoring*
Introduction
The Front Assist system including City emer- gency braking and pedestrian monitoring can help avoid collisions.
The Front Assist system may warn the driver, within the constraints of the system, of im- pending collisions, prepare the vehicle for emergency braking in case of danger, provide support during braking and apply automatic braking.
The City emergency braking and pedestrian monitoring functions are an integral part of the Front Assist system.
The Front Assist is not a replacement for driver awareness.
Distance warning
If the system detects that safety is endan- gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by means of a message on the instrument panel when driving at a speed of between approximately 60 km/h (37 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph) Fig. 186.
The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour.
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by means of an audible warning and an indica- tion on the instrument panel when driving at a speed of between approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph) Fig. 186.
The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possible emergency braking .
Critical warning
If the driver fails to react to the advance warning, the system may actively intervene in the brakes when driving at a speed of be- tween approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph), generating a brief jolt to warn of the imminent collision.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the advance warning, the system may brake the vehicle automatically, by progressively increasing braking effect driving at a speed of between approximately 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). By reducing speed in case of a possible collision, the system may contribute to reducing the consequences of an accident.
211
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Front assist
If the Front Assist notices that the driver is not braking sufficiently in case of a collision hazard, the system can increase braking ef- fect and thus avert the collision when driving at a speed of between approximately 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Front assist only acts while the brake pedal is pressed down hard.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Front Assist cannot change the laws of physics. The driver is always responsible for braking in time. If the Front Assist issues a warning, then, de- pending on the traffic circumstances, you must brake immediately or dodge the obsta- cle.
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- dents and serious injuries.
In complex driving situations, the Front As- sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in- tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in traffic islands.
If the operation of the Front Assist is im- paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra- dar sensor has lost its settings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and inter- vene inopportunely in the braking.
Front Assist does not react to animals or ve- hicles crossing your path or approaching head-on down the same lane.
The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.
Note
When the Front Assist causes a braking, the brake pedal is harder.
Automatic interventions by the Front Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.
If the Front Assist does not work as descri- bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.
On-screen warning lamps and mes- sages
Fig. 186 On the instrument panel display: Warning indications.
Distance warning
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will appear on the instrument panel display .
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
Note
When the Front Assist is connected, the indi- cations on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by warnings from other func- tions, such as an incoming call.
212
Driver assistance systems
Radar sensor
Fig. 187 On the front behind the SEAT badge: radar sensor.
On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar sensor has been installed to capture the traf- fic situation Fig. 187. This sensor can de- tect vehicles in front up to a distance of ap- proximately 120 m.
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the Front Assist monitoring system does not work. The instrument panel displays the fol- lowing message: Front Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary, clean the SEAT badge area .
When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the Front Assist will automati- cally be available again. The message will disappear from the instrument panel display.
Front Assist operation may be affected by a strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- cur, for example, in a closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works).
The area in front of and around the radar sen- sor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect Front Assist operation.
If structural modifications are made to the ve- hicle, for example, if the suspension is low- ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As- sist operation may be affected. So structural modifications should only be made by speci- alised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.
If work is done incorrectly on the front of the vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged or lose its settings, and Front Assist opera- tion may be affected. So repair work should only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar sen- sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis- connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos- sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
The sensor may become damaged or lose its settings when knocked, for example, dur-
ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro- mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.
Repairs to the radar sensor require special- ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- pose.
Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.
Operating the Front Assist
Fig. 188 On the instrument panel display: Front Assist switched off message.
The Front Assist monitoring system is active whenever the ignition is switched on.
When the Front Assist is switched off, so too are the advance warning function (pre warn- ing) and the distance warning.
213
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- ways switched on. Exceptions page 214, Temporarily switching the Front Assist sys- tem off in the following situations.
Switching the Front Assist monitoring sys- tem on and off
With the ignition switched on, the Front As- sist can be switched on and off as follows:
Select the corresponding menu option us- ing the button for the driver assistance sys- tems page 31.
OR: switch the system on and off in Easy Connect using the button and the SETUP
and Driver assistance function buttons page 27.
When the Front Assist monitoring system is switched off, the instrument panel will inform that it has been switched off with the follow- ing indicator Fig. 188.
Switching the advance warning function on or off
The advance warning function may be switch- ed on and off in the Easy Connect system us- ing the button and the SETUP and Driver assistance function buttons
page 27.
The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the advance warning function switched on at all times.
Depending on the infotainment system in- stalled in the vehicle, the advance warning function may be adjusted as follows:
Ready
Medium
Delayed
Deactivated
SEAT recommends driving with the function in Medium mode.
Switching distance warning on and off
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will appear on the instrument panel display . In this case, increase the safe dis- tance.
The distance warning may be switched on and off in the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETUP and Driver assistance function buttons
page 27.
The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance warning switched on at all times.
Temporarily switching the Front Assist system off in the following situations
In the following situations the Front Assist Monitoring System should be deactivated due to the system's limitations :
When the vehicle is to be towed.
If the vehicle is on a test bed.
When the radar sensor is damaged.
If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for example in a rear collision.
If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
If the radar sensor is covered temporarily with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ditional headlight or the like.
When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, ferry or train.
WARNING
If the Front Assist is not switched off in the situations described, serious accidents and injuries may occur.
Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa- tions.
System limitations
The Front Assist Monitoring System has cer- tain physical limitations inherent in the sys- tem. Thus, in certain circumstances some of
214
Driver assistance systems
the system's reactions may be inopportune or be delayed from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order to intervene if nec- essary.
The following conditions may cause the Front Assist Monitoring System not to react or do so too late:
On taking tight bends.
Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- aged.
If the ASR has been manually disconnec- ted.
If the ESC is controlling.
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged.
If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works.
If the vehicle is reversing.
If the vehicle over-accelerates.
In case of snow or heavy rain.
In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- bikes.
Misaligned vehicles.
Vehicles crossing the other's path.
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- tion.
Special loads and accessories of other ve- hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards or over the top.
City Emergency braking function
Fig. 189 On the instrument panel display: ad- vance warning message
The City Emergency braking function is part of the Front Assist monitoring and is active whenever the system is switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the City emer- gency braking function may be switched on and off in the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETUP and
Driver assistance function buttons page 27.
The City Emergency braking function picks up, at speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 30 km/h (19 mph) approximately, the traffic situation in front of the vehicle up to a dis- tance of about 15 m.
If the system detects a possible collision with a vehicle in front of it, the vehicle prepares for a possible emergency braking .
If the driver fails to react to a possible colli- sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto- matically, by progressively increasing braking effect driving to reduce speed in the event of a collision. The system can thus help to re- duce the consequences of an accident.
Status display
Automatic deceleration by means of the City Emergency braking function is displayed on the instrument panel by means of the ad- vance warning Fig. 1891).
WARNING
The smart technology included in the City Emergency braking function cannot defy the laws of physics. The driver is always respon- sible for braking in time.
1) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in colour.
215
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
The City Emergency braking function alone cannot prevent accidents or serious injury.
In complex driving situations, the City Emergency braking function may issue unnec- essary warnings and intervene inopportunely in braking, such as in work areas or if there are metal rails.
If the operation of the City Emergency brak- ing function is impaired, for example, by dirt or because the radar sensor has lost its set- tings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inopportunely in the braking.
The City emergency braking function only reacts to people if the vehicle has a pedes- trian-monitoring system. The system does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or approaching head-on in the same lane.
Note
When the City Emergency braking function causes a braking, the brake pedal is hard- er.
Automatic interventions on the brakes by the City Emergency braking function may be
interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera- tor or moving the wheel.
The City Emergency braking function can brake the vehicle until it stops completely. However, the brake system does not halt the vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake!
If several inopportune intervenes occur, switch off the Front Assist and with it the City Emergency braking function. Take it to a spe- cialised workshop, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.
If numerous unnecessary interventions oc- cur, the City Emergency braking function may switch off automatically.
Pedestrian Monitoring*1)
Fig. 190 On the instrument panel display: Advance warning message. Pedestrian Monitoring deactivated.
The pedestrian monitoring system can help prevent accidents involving pedestrians or reduce the consequences of an accident.
The system warns of danger of collision, pre- pares the vehicle for emergency braking, as- sists in the braking and brakes automatically.
If the system detects a possible collision with a pedestrian, it warns the driver with an acoustic signal and a message on the dash panel display Fig. 190.
1) Depending on the vehicle equipment, pedestrian monitoring is not available in all countries.
216
Driver assistance systems
The pedestrian monitoring system, including the advance warning, is automatically con- nected when the ignition is switched on page 169.
SEAT recommends always having the pedes- trian monitoring system connected. The ex- ceptions set out for the Front Assist system are equally valid for the pedestrian monitor- ing system page 214.
Switching the pedestrian monitoring system on and off
With the ignition on, the pedestrian monitor- ing system can be switched on and off as fol- lows:
Switch the system on and off in the info- tainment system using the button and the SETUP and Driver assistance function but- tons page 27.
When the pedestrian protection system is switched off, the dash panel display shows a message indicating this Fig. 190 . The pedestrian monitoring system is switched off with the Front Assist function.
WARNING
The technology in the pedestrian monitoring system cannot defy the laws of physics and only works within the system's limits. The driver is always responsible for braking in time. If the pedestrian monitoring system is-
sues a warning, brake the vehicle immediate- ly with the brake pedal or swerve to avoid the pedestrian, depending on traffic conditions.
The pedestrian monitoring system alone cannot avoid accidents or serious injury.
In complex driving situations, the pedes- trian monitoring system may issue unneces- sary warnings and intervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in main roads with turnings.
If the operation of the system is impaired, for example, because the radar sensor and camera are covered or have lost their set- tings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inopportunely in the braking.
The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.
Note
When the vehicle is braked via the pedes- trian monitoring system, the brake pedal be- comes stiffer.
Automatic interventions by the pedestrian monitoring system on the brakes may be in- terrupted by pressing the accelerator or mov- ing the wheel.
If the pedestrian monitoring system does not work as described in this chapter (e.g. if it intervening unnecessarily several times), switch if off, contact a specialist workshop immediately and request to have the system checked. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Lane Assist system*
Introduction
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Lane Assist system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and by the very nature of the system. Careless or uncontrolled use of the Lane Assist system may cause accidents and injury. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation.
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so it can be turned at any time.
The Lane Assist system does not detect all road markings. The road surfaces, road struc- tures or objects in poor condition can be in- correctly detected as road markings under certain circumstances by the Lane Assist sys- tem. In such situations, switch the Lane As- sist system off immediately.
Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary.
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings.
When the area of vision of the camera be- comes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane Assist system function can be affected.
217
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
CAUTION
In order to avoid influencing the operation of the system, the following points must be tak- en into account:
Regularly clean the area of vision of the camera and keep it in a clean state, without snow or ice.
Do not cover the area of vision of the cam- era.
Check that the area of vision of the wind- screen camera is not damaged.
Note
The Lane Assist system has been exclusive- ly developed for driving on paved roads only.
If the Lane Assist system does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it and contact a specialised workshop.
If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.
Indications on the display and lamps
Fig. 191 On the instrument panel display: In- dication on the Lane Assist system display (example 1).
Fig. 192 On the instrument panel display: In- dication on the Lane Assist system display (example 2).
Status display
The system is active, but not available, either because the minimum speed has not been reached or because the lane lines are not recognised Fig. 191 A.
The system is active and available, both lane lines are recognised. The steering angle is not being corrected at this mo- ment Fig. 191 B.
218
Driver assistance systems
The system is operational, the highligh- ted line A indicates that there was a risk of involuntarily crossing the lane line and that the steering is being adjus- ted to correct the angle Fig. 192 C.
The two lines A light up simultaneously when both lane lines are recognised and the Lane Assist function is active Fig. 192 D.
Control lamps
Blinks or lights up yellow: Lane Assist active but not available.
The system can not accurately recognise the lane. Please see page 220, the Lane Assist system is not available (the control lamp is lit up yellow).
Blinks or lights up green:
Lane Assist system active and available.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
Operation
Fig. 193 In the windscreen: field of vision of the Lane Assist system camera.
Using the camera located in the windscreen, the Lane Assist system detects the possible lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in- voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has detected, the system notifies the driver with a corrective steering movement. This move- ment can be over-regulated at any time.
No warning is produced with the turn signals activated, given that the Lane Assist system understands that a lane change is required.
Steering wheel vibration
The following situations can cause vibration in the steering wheel and require the driver to take active control of driving:
When the limits of the very nature of the system are reached.
When the maximum rotational torque dur- ing the corrective steering movement is not enough to keep the vehicle inside the lane.
When no lane is detected during the correc- tive steering movement.
Switching the Lane Assist system on or off
Through the Easy Connect system
Press the Easy Connect button .
Press the SETUP function button.
Press the function button Driver assistance to open the menu.
OR: through the driving assist button on the turn signal level*.
The Lane centring guide is activa- ted/deactivated in the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETUP function button page 112.
Self-deactivation: the Lane Assist system can be automatically deactivated if there is a sys- tem malfunction. The control lamp disap- pears.
Hands-Off Function
In the absence of steering wheel activity the system alerts the driver with acoustic signals and a text message on the dash panel asking to actively take over the steering.
219
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
If the driver does not react to this, the system also alerts the driver with a little shaking mo- tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle has it, activates the Emergency Assist func- tion page 222.
In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the adaptive lane guidance function will be disa- bled after the corresponding warnings to the driver.
The lane assist system is active but it is not available (the control lamp is lit up yellow)
When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38 mph).
When the Lane Assist system does not de- tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam- ple, in the event warnings indicating road works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec- tions.
When the radius of a curve is too small.
When no road markings can be seen.
When the distance to the next marking to too great.
When the system does not detect any clear and active steering movement during a long period of time.
Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic driving styles.
If a turn signal is activated.
With the stability control system (ESC) in Sport mode or switched off.
Side Assist PLUS
If the vehicle is also equipped with Side As- sist and the system is switched on, the driver is alerted when changing lanes during a pos- sible critical situation (level of information, warning level) through a corrective steering wheel intervention. This occurs even if the turn signal is activated in the corresponding direction. If the driver over-regulates the steering wheel intervention, an additional warning is given through a vibration in the steering wheel.
Note
Before starting a journey, verify that the field of vision of the camera is not covered Fig. 193.
Always keep the field of vision of the cam- era clean.
Switching off the Lane Assist system in the following situations
Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, switch it off in the following situations:
When more attention is required of the driver
When driving in a sporty style
In unfavourable weather conditions
On roads in poor condition
In areas of road works
Traffic Jam Assist
Description and operation
table on page 2
Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the car within its lane and to move in convoy in case of traffic congestion or slow traffic.
Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of Lane Assist page 217 and combines Lane Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) page 201. Therefore, it is essential that you read these two chapters carefully and note the limitations of the systems and the information about them.
Operation of Traffic Jam Assist
At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis- tance preset by the driver with respect to the vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane .
To do this, the system automatically controls the acceleration, brakes and steering, and slows down the vehicle until it stops fully when behind another vehicle that is stop- ping. It then automatically moves off again when the car in front does so.
220
Driver assistance systems
Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never use it in city traffic.
Switching Traffic Jam Assist on and off
If Lane Assist is on, page 217 Traffic Jam Assist is switched on and off in the infotain- ment system using the button and the SETUP and Driver assistance function buttons
page 27.
It is activated by switching on Lane Assist and the lane centring guide in the infotain- ment system. If the lane centring guide is not active, the Traffic Jam Assist system is not ac- tive
Traffic Jam Assist may be disconnected using the button for driver assistance systems to- gether with Lane Assist page 31.
Technical requirements for using Traffic Jam Assist
Lane Assist must be activated page 217, Lane Assist system*.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be con- nected and active page 201.
The selector lever must be in the D/S posi- tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.
The speed must be below 60 km/h (38 mph).
The lane centring guide must be active page 219.
Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane As- sist control light turns yellow)
If any of the conditions mentioned on page 221, Technical requirements for using Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met.
If any of the conditions required for opera- tion of the Lane Assist are not met page 217.
If any of the conditions necessary for the adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no longer fulfilled page 201.
Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must be switched off
Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic Jam Assist must always be switched off in the following situations:
When more attention is required by the driver.
When driving in a very sporty style.
In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case of snow or heavy rain.
When driving on roads in poor condition.
In sections with roadworks.
In city journeys.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into Traf- fic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of phys- ics; it only works within the limits of the sys-
tem. Accidents and severe injury may occur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negligently or invol- untarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions.
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour- neys.
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is poor visibility, for example, in case of snow, ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slippery sections or flooded roads.
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or on roads where the surface is not firm. Traffic Jam Assist has been designed for use on paved roads only.
Traffic Jam Assist does not react to people or animals or vehicles crossing your path or that approach you head-on down the same lane.
If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce speed sufficiently, brake the vehicle immediately by applying the pedal.
If the vehicle continues to move when you wish it to stop after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the pedal.
If driver intervention is requested on the dash panel display, immediately resume con- trol of the vehicle.
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any
221
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
time. The driver is always responsible for keeping the vehicle in its own lane.
Always be prepared to take charge of driv- ing (accelerating or braking) yourself.
Note
If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter, stop using it and con- tact a specialised workshop.
If the system is faulty, take it to a special- ised workshop and have it checked.
Emergency Assist
Description and operation
Emergency Assist detects whether there is in- activity by the driver and can automatically keep the car within the lane and stop it alto- gether if necessary. This way the system can actively help avoid an accident.
Emergency Assist is an additional function of Lane Assist page 217 and combines Lane Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) page 201. Therefore, it is essential that you read these two chapters carefully and note the limitations of the systems and the information about them.
Operation of Emergency Assist
Emergency Assist detects when the driver ceases to perform any activity and repeatedly requests that he/she regain active control of the vehicle, through the use of optical and acoustic warnings and by applying the brakes.
If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys- tem automatically takes over the accelerator, brakes and steering in order to brake the ve- hicle and keep it in its lane . If the re- maining braking distance is sufficient, if nec- essary the system slows down the vehicle un- til it stops completely and automatically switches on the electronic parking brake page 174.
When the Emergency Assist is actively adjust- ing, the hazard warning lights come on page 139 and the vehicle makes slight zig- zag movements in the lane in order to warn other drivers.
Switching the Emergency Assist on and off
The Emergency Assist is switched on auto- matically when the Lane Assist is switched on page 217.
Technical requirements for using the Emer- gency Assist
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be switched on page 201.
The Lane Assist must be switched on page 217.
The selector lever must be at the D/S posi- tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.
The system must have detected a lane sep- aration line on both sides of the vehicle Fig. 192.
The following conditions may cause the Emergency Assist not to react or to switch off automatically:
If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves the steering wheel.
If any of the conditions mentioned in page 222, Technical requirements for us- ing the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.
If any of the conditions required for opera- tion of the Lane Assist are not met page 217.
If any of the conditions necessary for the adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no longer fulfilled page 201.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the Emergency Assist cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle.
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the
222
Driver assistance systems
visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time.
The Emergency Assist alone cannot always avoid accidents or serious injuries.
If the operation of the Emergency Assist is impaired, for example if the radar sensor of the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the Lane Assist camera are covered or have lost their settings, the system may intervene inoppor- tunely in braking or in steering.
The Emergency Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane.
WARNING
If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor- tunely, serious accidents and injuries may oc- cur.
If the Emergency Assist does not operate properly, switch off the Lane Assist page 217. Doing so will also switch off the Emergency Assist.
Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Note
Automatic interventions by the Emergency Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the accelerator or brake or by mov- ing the wheel.
Hazard warning lights that come on auto- matically can be switched off by pressing the accelerator or the break, moving the steering wheel or pressing the hazard warning light switch.
If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a com- plete stop.
When the Emergency Assist is activated, it is only available again after the ignition has been switched off and back on again.
223
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance (RCTA)*
Introduction
table on page 2
The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect the traffic situation behind the vehicle.
The integrated parking assistant (RTA) helps the driver when backing out of a parallel parking spot and in manoeuvring.
The blind spot detector has been developed for driving on paved roads.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis- tance (RCTA) included cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Acci- dents and severe injury may occur if the blind spot detection system or the rear cross traffic alert are used negligently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time.
Pay attention to the control lamps that may come on in the external rear view mirrors and on the instrument panel, and follow any in- structions they may give.
The blind spot assistant could react to any special constructions that might be present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high or irreg- ular dividers. This may cause erroneous warn- ings.
Never use the blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert has been designed for use on paved roads.
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings.
Never use the blind spot detector or the parking assistant if the radar sensors are dirty.
The external rear view mirror control lamps may have limited functionality due to solar radiation.
CAUTION
The radar sensors on the rear bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- sion, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least possibly hav- ing its functionality diminished.
In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of snow and ice and do not cover it.
The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spot detector's functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used.
Note
If the blind spot detector with parking assis- tant does not work as described in this chap- ter, do not use it and contact a specialised workshop.
Control lamps
Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:
Lights up
Lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activa- ted and ready to operate.
Lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the blind spot.
Flashes
The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in the direction of the detected vehicle .
For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist page 217, a warning to switch lanes will also appear even though the turn signal has not been engaged (blind spot detector Plus).
224
Driver assistance systems
Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.
If there are no indications from the control lamp in the external rear view mirror, this means that the blind spot detector has not detected any other vehicles in the area .
If the dipped beam is on, then the control lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be dimmed (night mode).
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci- dents and severe injuries.
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- es.
Carry out the necessary operations.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- sponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.
Blind spot detector (BSD)
Fig. 194 In the exterior mirrors: indication of the blind spot detector.
Fig. 195 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sen- sor zones.
The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle Fig. 195. The system does this by measur- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The blind spot de- tector will not work at speeds of less than ap- prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti- cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to notify the driver.
Indication in the external rear view mirrors
The control lamp (expanded view) provides an indication in the corresponding external mirror Fig. 194 regarding the traffic situa- tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex- ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.
225
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or windows with tinted film, the indications of the external mirrors may not be seen clearly or correctly.
Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- hesives or other similar materials.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located on the left and right of the bumper and are not visible from
the outside Fig. 195. The sensors have a range of approx. 20 metres behind the vehi- cle, including the blind spots to the left and right of the vehicle. The range to the sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the width of a lane.
The lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- tween two lanes, the indications may be in- correct. Furthermore, the system can detect
vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if there are any), and can also detect stationary objects such as dividers, and thus give an in- correct indication.
226
Driver assistance systems
Driving situations
Fig. 196 Schematic diagram: Passing sit- uation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi- cation from the blind spot detector in the left- hand external mirror.
Fig. 197 Schematic diagram: Situation of passing and then moving into the right-hand lane. Indication from the blind spot detec- tor in the right-hand external mirror.
In the following situations, an indication will be displayed in the external mirror Fig. 196 (arrow) or Fig. 197 (arrow):
When being overtaken by another vehicle Fig. 196 .
When overtaking another vehicle Fig. 197 with a speed differential of ap- prox. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is pass-
ing at a considerably higher speed, no indi- cation will be displayed.
The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner an indication will be displayed in the external mirror, because the blind spot detector takes into account the speed differential with other vehicles. Thus even though the distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indication will appear sooner in some cases and later in others.
Physical limitations inherent to the system
In some situations the blind spot detector may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ly. E.g. in the following situations:
on tight bends;
in the case of lanes with different widths;
at the top of slopes;
in adverse weather conditions;
227
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
in the case of special constructions to the side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di- viders.
Parking assistant (RTA)
Fig. 198 Schematic representation of the rear cross traffic alert: monitored zone around the vehicle being parked.
The parking assistant uses the radar sensors on the rear bumper Fig. 195 to monitor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of a parallel parking space or as it is be- ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi- bility conditions.
If the system detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- cle Fig. 198, an acoustic alarm is heard.
The acoustic alarm comes from the same acoustic indicator used by the ParkPilot.
In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on the radio screen. This signal is displayed in the form of a red strip at the back of the im- age of the vehicle on the radio screen. This strip displays the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is approaching.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
If the rear cross traffic alert detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehicle and the driver does not step on the brake, the system will engage the brakes automatically.
The parking system helps the driver by auto- matically engaging the brakes to reduce any damage. The system will brake automatically if the vehicle is reversing at a speed of ap- proximately 1-12 km (1-7 mph). Once it has detected that the vehicle has stopped, the system will keep the vehicle stopped for ap- prox. 2 seconds.
After automatically braking to reduce dam- age, the system will not be able to automati- cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- onds.
You can interrupt the automatic braking by stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
The system should never be used in limited visibility conditions or complicated traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing multiple lanes.
Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle's surroundings, since the system often fails to detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians.
The rear cross traffic alert itself will not brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RTA)
Activating and deactivating the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RTA)
The blind spot detector with parking assis- tant can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistance systems menu on the dash panel display using the steering wheel controls. If the vehicle is equipped with a multifunction camera, it can also be ac- cessed by means of the driver assistance sys- tems key located on the main beam head- light lever.
228
Driver assistance systems
Open the Assistants menu.
BSD
Parking Assist.
If the verification box on the control panel is checked , the functionality will be automat- ically activated at ignition.
When the blind spot detector is ready to op- erate, the indications in the external mirrors will turn on briefly as confirmation.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- ment in the system will remain active.
If the blind spot detector was automatically deactivated, it will only be possible to restart the system after turning the vehicle off and restarting it.
Automatic deactivation of the blind spot de- tector (BSD)
The radar sensors of the blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- cally deactivated when, among other rea- sons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently covered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice in front of one of the sensors.
The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display.
Trailer mode
The Blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will be automatically deactivated and it will be impossible to activate them if the tow hitch is electrically connected to a trailer or other similar object.
As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a message will appear on the instrument panel display indicating that the blind spot detec- tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti- vated. Once the trailer has been unhitched from the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you will have to reactivate them in the corre- sponding menu.
If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, then the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer.
SEAT Drive Profile*
Introduction
The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to choose between four profiles or modes, Eco, Normal, Sport and Individual, that modify the behaviour of various vehicle func- tions, providing different driving experiences.
In addition, the 4Drive version features the Offroad and Snow profiles.
The Individual profile can be configured according to personal preferences. The other profiles have a fixed configuration.
Description
Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the following functions:
Engine
Depending on the profile selected, the en- gine responds more spontaneously or more in harmony with the movements of the accel- erator. Additionally, when the Eco profile is selected, the Start-Stop function is automati- cally activated.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the gear change points are modified to position them in lower or higher engine speed ranges. Additionally, the Eco profile activates the in- ertia function, enabling consumption to be further reduced.
In manual gearbox vehicles, the Eco profile causes the gear change recommendation in- dications that appear on the dash panel to vary, facilitating more efficient driving.
229
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Address
The power steering varies its driving modes and adapts to the profile selected, thus offer- ing the best behaviour for each situation.
Air conditioning
In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate in Eco mode, especially restricting fuel con- sumption.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
The acceleration gradient of the adaptive cruise control varies according to the active driving profile page 201.
Electronic stability control (ESC)
In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, the electronic stability Control (ESC) page 177 adjusts to adapt to the terrain.
In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti- vated in the Offroad profile page 194.
Adjusting driving profile
Fig. 199 Centre console: Driving Experience button.
table on page 2
You can select the Eco, Normal, Sport, In- dividual, Offroad1) and Snow1) profiles in the following way:
Turn the Driving Experience button until the required profile lights up on the Easy Con- nect system display as well as on the Driving Experience button Fig. 199.
OR: select the required profile on the touch-screen of the Easy Connect system, in the menu that opens up on turning the Driving Experience button.
The features of each profile can be seen by pressing the Profile information button of the Easy Connect system display.
In the Individual profile it is possible to configure the characteristics of the vehicle using the Profile setup button of the Easy Connect system display.
An icon on the Easy Connect system display provides information about the active profile if it is different than Normal. The selector identifies the profile chosen by means of a red LED light.
Driving profile
Characteristics
Eco Places the vehicle in a particularly low state of consumption, facilitating a fuel- saving driving style that is respectful to the environment.
Normal Offers a balanced driving experience, suitable for everyday use.
Sport Provides a complete dynamic perform- ance in the vehicle, enabling the user a more sporty driving style.
Individ- ual
It allows you to personalise the configura- tion. The functions that can be adjusted depend on the equipment fitted in the ve- hicle.
1) Only for 4Drive models. 230
Driver assistance systems
Driving profile
Characteristics
Offroada) It adjusts the vehicle's parameters in or- der to maintain optimal off-road driving.
Snowa) It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour for driv- ing on slippery road surfaces, optimising grip and manoeuvrability.
a) Only for 4Drive models.
WARNING
When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten- tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause an accident.
Note
When the vehicle is switched off it will al- ways store the driving profile that was selec- ted when the ignition key was removed, ex- cept in the following cases:
When the vehicle is restarted after using the Sport profile, the engine and the gearbox will not restart in the sportiest setting so as to reduce fuel consumption. To return the engine and the gearbox to their sportiest position, select the Sport driving profile again.
When the vehicle is restarted after using the Offroad or Snow settings, the sys- tem is always activated in the Normal profile.
Your speed and driving style must always be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic conditions.
The Eco profile is not recommended when towing a vehicle.
Kick-down
The Kick-down feature allows maximum ac- celeration to be reached.
If the Eco* profile has been selected in the SEAT Drive Profile page 230 and the accelerator is pressed beyond a hard point, the engine power is automatically controlled to give your vehicle maximum acceleration.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.
231
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Traffic sign detection system*
Introduction
The traffic sign detection system records the standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle with a camera located on the base of the in- terior mirror and provides information about speed limits and overtaking prohibitions. Within its limitations, the system also dis- plays additional signals, such as time-specif- ic prohibitions, signs for vehicles towing trail- ers page 259 or limitations that only apply in the event of rain. Even on journeys without signs, the system may display any applicable speed limits.
In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads, besides speed limits and overtaking provi- sions the system also displays the end of prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the time in other countries is always shown.
Countries in which it works
When this instruction manual went to print, the traffic sign detection system was operat- ing in the following countries:
Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Monaco, the Netherlands, Northern Ireland, Norway, Po- land, Portugal, Romania, San Marino, Slova-
kia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, the United Kingdom and the Vatican City.
WARNING
The technology in the traffic sign detection system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works within the system's limits. Do not let the extra conven- ience afforded by the traffic sign detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions.
Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog may lead to the system failing to display traf- fic signs or not displaying them correctly.
If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- ered or damaged, system operation may be impaired.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic indi- cations shown on the traffic sign detection system may differ from the actual current traffic situation.
The system may not detect or correctly show all the traffic signs.
Traffic signs and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and dis- plays provided by the system.
Note
In order not to compromise the system's op- eration, please take the following points into account:
Regularly clean the area of vision of the camera and keep it in a clean state, without snow or ice.
Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- era.
Always replace damaged or worn blades when required to avoid lines on the camera's field of vision.
Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vision.
Note
The use of outdated maps on the naviga- tion system may cause the system to show traffic signs incorrectly.
In the waypoints mode of the navigation system, the traffic sign detection system is only partly available.
232
Driver assistance systems
Indication on display
Fig. 200 On the instrument panel display: ex- amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- tions with their respective additional signs.
The traffic signs detected by the system are displayed on the dash panel display Fig. 200 and, depending on the navigation system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- ment system as well page 27.
Traffic sign de- tection system messages
Cause and solution
There are no traffic signs available
The system is booting up. OR ELSE: the camera has not rec- ognised any obligation or pro- hibition signs.
Error: Detec- tion of traffic signs
There is a fault in the system. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.
Speed warning currently un- available.
The speed warning function of the traffic sign detection system is faulty. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.
Detection of traffic signs: Clean the wind- screen!
The windscreen is dirty in the camera area. Clean the windscreen.
Detection of traffic signs: Limited at the moment
The navigation system is not transmitting any data. Check that the navigation sys- tem's maps are up-to-date. OR ELSE: the vehicle is currently in a region that is not included in the navigation system's map.
No data availa- ble
The traffic sign detection system does not work in the current country.
WARNING
If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe inju- ries.
Never ignore the messages displayed.
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.
Note
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- sponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.
Operation
The traffic sign detection system does not work in all countries page 232, Countries in which it works. Keep this in mind when travelling abroad.
Activating and deactivating traffic sign dis- play on the instrument panel
The permanent display of traffic signs on the instrument panel can be activated or deacti- vated on the infotainment system by means of the button and the function buttons SETUP and Driver Assistance .
Display of traffic signs
When the traffic sign detection system is con- nected, a camera located on the base of the
233
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
interior rear-view mirror records the traffic signs in front of the vehicle. After checking and evaluating the information from the cam- era, the navigation system and the current vehicle data, up to three valid traffic signs are displayed Fig. 200 B in conjunction with their corresponding additional signs.
The sign that is currently valid for the driver is shown in the left side of the screen For example, a maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (100 mph) Fig. 200 A.
A sign valid only in certain circum- stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown second, together with the addi- tional rain sign.
If the windscreen wiper is working while you are driving, the signal with the additional rain sign will be shown first, on the left, as it is the one that is applicable at the time.
A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. No overtaking at certain times, will be displayed third Fig. 200 C.
Speed warning
If the system detects that the permitted speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver with a gong and visually with a message on the dash panel display.
The speed warning can be adjusted or deacti- vated completely on the infotainment system
First:
Second:
Additional sign:
Third:
using the button and the SETUP and Driver Assistance function buttons
page 27. The speed is adjusted in steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a range of be- tween 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) above the maximum speed permitted.
Trailer mode
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory and a trailer that is electrically connected to the vehicle, it is pos- sible to activate or deactivate the display of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi- tions. Activation or deactivation is performed on the infotainment system by means of the button and the function buttons Setup and Driver Assistance page 27.
For trailer mode, the display of speed limits applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed greater than that which is permitted in the country in question for driving with a trailer, the system automatically displays the usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h (50 mph).
If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- vated, the system displays the speed limits as if there were no trailer hitched.
Limited operation
The traffic sign detection system has certain limitations. The following cases may lead the system to operate with limitations or not at all:
In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, rain, fog or intense mist.
In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- on traffic or by the sun.
When driving at high speeds.
If the camera is covered or dirty.
If the traffic signs are out of the camera's field of vision.
If the traffic signs are partially or totally covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve- hicles.
In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil the regulations.
In the case of damaged or bent traffic signs.
In the case of variable messages on over- head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traf- fic signs or other lighting units).
If the maps on the navigation system are not up-to-date.
In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on lorries.
234
Driver assistance systems
Fatigue detection (break rec- ommendation)*
Introduction
The Fatigue detection informs the driver when their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi- cient in length when making long journeys.
The driver always assumes the responsibil- ity of driving to their full capacity.
Never drive if you are tired.
The system does not detect the tiredness of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in- formation in the section page 235, System limitations.
In some situations, the system may incor- rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu- vre as driver tiredness.
No warning is given in the event of the ef- fect called microsleep!
Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
Fatigue detection has been developed for driving on motorways and well paved roads only.
If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.
Function and operation
Fig. 201 On the instrument panel display: fa- tigue detection symbol.
Fatigue detection determines the driving be- haviour of the driver when starting a journey, making a calculation of tiredness. This is constantly compared with the current driving behaviour. If the system detects that the driv- er is tired, an audible warning is given with a sound and an optic warning is shown with a symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display Fig. 201. The message on the instrument panel display is
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- pending on the case, is repeated. The system stores the last message displayed.
The message on the instrument panel display can be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multi function steering wheel page 30.
The message can be recalled to the instru- ment panel display using the multifunction display page 30.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Switching on and off
Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- vated in the Easy Connect system with the button and the SETUP page 112 func-
tion button. A mark indicates that the adjust- ment has been activated.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations inherent to the system. The following condi- tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- vent it from functioning.
At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) 235
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
When cornering
On roads in poor condition
In unfavourable weather conditions
When a sporty driving style is employed
In the event of a serious distraction to the driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long pe- riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the system automatically re-establishes the tired- ness calculation. When driving at a faster speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- ted.
Park Assist*
Introduction
table on page 2
The Park Assist system is an additional func- tion of ParkPilot page 243 and helps the driver to:
find a suitable parking space,
select a parking mode,
park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- dicular and parallel spaces,
park driving forwards in suitable perpen- dicular spaces,
exit a parking space driving forwards from a parallel space.
In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- tory radio the front, rear and side areas are represented, and the position of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.
The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver .
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the Park Assist system cannot overcome the lim- its imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The greater convenience provided by Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury.
Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.
Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor-
rectly, these objects or people wearing such clothes.
Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. In certain circum- stances this may prevent them from detect- ing people or objects.
The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not regis- tered.
Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the ultrasound sensors do not detect small children, animals or certain ob- jects in all situations.
WARNING
Quick turns of the steering wheel when park- ing or exiting a parking space with Park As- sist can cause serious injury.
Do not hold the steering wheel during ma- noeuvres to park or exit a parking space until the system requests it. Doing so disables the system during the manoeuvre, resulting in the parking being cancelled.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trailer tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle.
Retrofitting of certain accessories to the ve- hicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere
236
Driver assistance systems
with the operation of the Park Assist system and cause damage.
The Park Assist system uses as a reference parked vehicles, curbs and other objects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not damaged while parking. If necessary, oppor- tunely interrupt the parking manoeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.
The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- sion, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space.
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not apply it directly unless very briefly and al- ways from a distance of more than 10 cm.
A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the regis- tration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause:
false detections,
loss of sensor visibility.
cancellation of the parking manoeuvre or defective parking.
If one of the ultrasonic sensors is damaged, the area corresponding to that group of sen- sors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot be activated until the fault is corrected. How- ever, you can still use the sensors of the oth- er bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a specialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Note
In order to guarantee good system opera- tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of the bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other objects.
Certain sources of noise, such as rough as- phalt or paving stones and the noise of other vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warnings.
In order to become familiar with the system and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice operating the Park Assist system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.
Description of the Park Assist system
Fig. 202 At the top of the centre console: but- ton to switch on the Park Assist system.
The components of Park Assist system are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front
and rear bumpers, the Fig. 202 button to switch the system on and off and the mes- sages on the instrument panel display.
Prematurely stopping or automatically inter- rupting the manoeuvres for parking or exit- ing a parking space
Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space in any of the following cases:
Button is pressed.
The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h (4 mph).
The driver takes hold of the steering wheel.
The parking manoeuvre does not end with- in approximately 6 minutes following activa- tion of the automatic steering.
There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable).
ASR is switched off.
ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.
The driver door is opened.
Seven parking manoeuvres are made.
To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that none of these things occur and that button is pressed again.
237
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Special Characteristics
The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. For exam- ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends.
While entering or exiting a parking space, a brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to change between forward and reverse gears. If this signal does not sound, the gear change will be indicated when the continuous signal sounds (object at 30 cm) in ParkPilot.
When the Park Assist system turns the steer- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-
strument panel also displays the symbol . Press down the brake pedal so that the turn takes place with the vehicle stationary and the smallest possible number of manoeuvres take place in the parking space.
Trailer mode
The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket page 259 is electrically connected to a trailer.
After changing a wheel
If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correctly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place during driving. Making turns slowly, at less than 20 km/h (12 mph) may contribute to this adaptation process in Introduc- tion on page 236.
Selecting a parking mode
Fig. 203 Overview of reduced displays for park- ing modes: Parallel parking in reverse. Per- pendicular parking in reverse. Perpendicular parking forwards.
238
Driver assistance systems
Fig. 204 On the instrument panel display: displaying the Park Assist system with re- duced display.
Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist with prior step in front of the space
After activating the Park Assist system and after detecting a parking space, the display on the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the parking mode automatically. The selected mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- play Fig. 204. The reduced display of other possible parking modes is also shown Fig. 203. If the mode selected by the sys-
tem does not correspond to the desired mode, you can select another mode by press- ing button Fig. 202.
Action
1. The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 240.
2.
Press button .
A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the se- lected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display and the reduced display shows an- other parking mode it can be changed to.
3.
Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the side of the road where you are parking. The instrument panel displays the side correspond- ing to the road. By default, if the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in the direction of traffic.
4.
If necessary, press the button again to change parking mode.
Once you have switched to all possible parking modes, if the button is pressed again, the system switches off.
Action
5. Press the button again to switch the system back on.
6. Follow the instructions displayed on the instru- ment panel while paying attention to traffic and drive the vehicle past the parking space.
Special case of perpendicular parking space to park forwards without driving past first
Action
1. The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 240.
2. Drive forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle.
3.
Press the button once.
A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the se- lected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display without reduced display.
4. Release the steering wheel in Introduction on page 236.
239
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Park with Park Assist
Fig. 205 On the instrument panel display: paral- lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park- ing position. Manoeuvring.
Fig. 206 On the instrument panel display: per- pendicular parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.
Key to Fig. 205 and Fig. 206:
Message to move forwards
Your vehicle
Parked vehicle
Parking space detected
Message to park
Message to press the brake pedal
Progress bar
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Progress bars
The progress bar Fig. 205 7 and Fig. 206 7 on the screen of the instrument panel displays the relative distance to be covered. The greater the distance, the fuller the progress bar. When driving forward, the content of the pro- gress bar decreases upwards, and when re- versing, it decreases downwards.
Necessary conditions to park with Park As- sist
For parallel parking spaces
For perpendicular parking spaces
The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 178.
240
Driver assistance systems
For parallel parking spaces
For perpendicular parking spaces
Do not exceed approxi- mately 40 km/h (25 mph)
when driving past the parking space.
Do not exceed approxi- mately 20 km/h (12 mph)
when driving past the parking space.
Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when driv- ing past the parking space.
Length of the space: length of the vehicle +
0.8 metres
Width of the space: width of the vehicle + 0.8 me-
tres
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when parking.
Parking
Do the following:
1. The necessary conditions have to be met to park with Park Assist page 240 and the parking mode must be selected page 238.
2.
Look at the display on the instrument panel to see if the space has been detected as appropri- ate and if the correct position for parking has been reached Fig. 205 or Fig. 206 .
The space is considered appropriate if the dis- play on the instrument panel shows the message to park 5 .
3. Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engage the reverse gear.
4. Release the steering wheel in Introduction on page 236.
Do the following:
5.
Please note the following message: Active au- tomatic steering. Watch out around you. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).
During the parking manoeuvre, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa- ry, change gears and brake.
6.
Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.
OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays the message to go forwards Fig. 205 1
or Fig. 206 1 .
OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays the message Park Assist finished.
The progress bar 7 indicates the distance to cover page 240.
7.
Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist system has finished turning the steering wheel.
OR: until the symbol on the instrument panel display switches off.
8. Select first gear.
Do the following:
9.
Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.
OR: go forward until the instrument panel display shows the message to reverse.
The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it centres it in the space Fig. 205 or Fig. 206 .
10.
For best results, wait at the end of each manoeu- vre until the Park Assist system has finished turn- ing the steering wheel.
The parking manoeuvre ends when a correspond- ing message is displayed on the instrument panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.
Note
If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely during parking, the result may not be the best.
241
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Exiting a parking space with Park As- sist (only for parallel spaces)
Fig. 207 On the instrument panel display: ex- iting a parallel parking space.
Key to the Fig. 207:
Parked vehicle
Your vehicle in reverse gear
Progress bar to indicate the distance left to cover
Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space
Necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist
Only for parallel parking spaces
The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 178.
Length of the space: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres
1
2
3
4
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.
Exiting a parking space
Do the following:
For parallel parking spaces
1. The necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist have to be met page 242.
2. Switch on the engine page 169.
3.
Press the button Fig. 202.
A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on.
4. Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the road you will enter when exiting the parking space.
5. Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.
6.
Release the steering wheel in Introduction on page 236.
Please note the following message: Active automatic steering. Watch out around you. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).
When exiting the parking space, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa- ry, change gears and brake.
For parallel parking spaces
7.
Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.
OR: reverse until the instrument panel display shows the message to go forward.
The progress bar Fig. 207 3 indicates the dis- tance to cover page 240.
8.
Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist system has finished turning the steering wheel.
OR: press down the brake pedal until the sym- bol on the instrument panel display switches off.
9.
Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.
OR: go forward until the instrument panel display shows the message to reverse.
The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it can exit the space.
10.
The vehicle can exit the space when a corre- sponding message is displayed on the instru- ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic sig- nal sounds.
Take charge of the steering with the turning an- gle set by the Park Assist system.
11. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parking space.
242
Driver assistance systems
Automatic braking intervention by Park Assist
Park Assist helps the driver by automatically braking in certain situations.
The driver is always responsible for braking in time .
Automatic braking intervention to avoid ex- ceeding the speed limit
To avoid exceeding the speed limit of approx- imately 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving a parking space, the brakes may acti- vate automatically. After automatically acti- vating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a parking space may continue.
The brakes are only automatically activated once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- ing space. If the speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- sponding operation is halted.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
Depending on certain conditions, the Park Assist system can automatically brake the ve- hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac- tioning and holding down the brake ped- al . Following this the driver must press the brake pedal.
Automatic braking intervention to reduce damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- ishing.
WARNING
The automatic braking intervention by Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. In certain situations, the automatic braking interven- tion may only work in a limited way or not work at all.
Always be ready to use the brakes yourself!
The automatic braking intervention will end after approximately 1.5 seconds. Following this, brake the vehicle yourself.
Parking System Plus (ParkPi- lot)*
Description
Fig. 208 Represented area.
During parking, Parking System Plus assists the driver by visually and audibly warning them about obstacles detected in front of and behind the vehicle.
There are ultrasound sensors integrated in the front and rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warn- ings and visually on the Easy Connect sys- tem.
In the event of danger of a frontal collision, the audible warnings come from the front of the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of a rear-end collision they come from the rear.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues and the like, as this could affect the system's opera- tion. Cleaning instructions page 272.
The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:
1.20 m
1.60 m
0.90 m
As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- val between the audible warnings will be re- duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning will be constant: do not continue to move forward (or backward)!
If you maintain separation from the obstacle, the volume of the warning begins to reduce
A
B
C
243
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning).
In order to view the entire periphery of the ve- hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me- tres forwards and backwards. Thus the miss- ing areas are screened and the periphery of the vehicle is calculated.
Special features of ParkPilot with Area View
In the following situations the screened area on the side of the vehicle is automatically hidden:
When a vehicle door is opened.
When the ASR is switched off.
When there is ASR or ESC regulation.
If the vehicle remains stationary for more than approximately 3 minutes.
WARNING
Always pay attention, also when looking straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur- roundings. The assistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. When in- serting or removing the vehicle from a park- ing space, or when performing similar ma- noeuvres the driver always assumes the re- sponsibility.
Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.
The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not regis- tered. Pay special attention to children and animals.
Always keep visual control of the vehicle surroundings: use the mirrors for additional help.
CAUTION
Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- fected by different factors that may lead to damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- rounds:
Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects:
Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, fences, posts and thin trees.
Objects that are located above the sen- sors, such as protrusions in a wall.
Objects with certain surfaces or struc- tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- der snow.
Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- nals. The system cannot detect these objects or people wearing such clothes correctly.
Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. In certain circum- stances this may prevent them from detect- ing people or objects.
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give any further warning. In certain circumstances, objects such as high kerbs that could damage the bottom of the vehicle are not detected either.
If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig- nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable damage.
The knocks or damage on the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- body can adjust the orientation of the sen- sors. This can affect the parking aid function. In this case, have the function checked by a specialised workshop.
A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the regis- tration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause:
false detections,
loss of sensor visibility.
Note
In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area, e.g:
with rough or cobbled floors or ground with long grass;
with external ultrasound sources, such as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles equip- ped with ultrasound systems;
in downpours, intense snow, hail or dense exhaust gases,
244
Driver assistance systems
if the number plate is not perfectly se- cured to the bumper surface,
or in locations such as the brow of a hill.
In order to guarantee good system opera- tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other objects.
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply it directly only very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm.
Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the operation of the Parking Aid.
Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist.
In order to familiarise yourself with the sys- tem, it is advised that you practice parking in an area or car park that is free from traffic. There must be good weather and light condi- tions.
The volume and tone of the warnings can be modified, in addition to the indications page 250.
In vehicles without an infotainment system, these parameters can be modified in a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised workshop.
Please observe information on towing a trailer page 251.
The display on the Easy Connect screen shows a slight time delay.
Parking Aid operation
Fig. 209 Centre console: Park Assist button (depending on the version).
Manual connection of Parking Aid
Press the button once.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid
Press the button again.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display (the audible sounds remain active)
Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system.
OR: Press the BACK function button.
Automatic connection of Parking Aid
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.
OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle that is in its forwards path at a speed below
10 km/h (6 mph) page 246. The obstacle is detected as of a distance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic connection is activated in the infotainment system. A reduced display is shown.
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
Move the selector lever to position P.
OR: accelerate to more than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) forward.
Temporary suppression of sound in Parking Aid
Press the function button.
Change from reduced view to full view
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.
OR: press the car icon in reduced view.
If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image (Rear View Camera RVC)
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.
OR: Press the RVC function button.
A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up yellow when the system is switched on.
245
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Automatic activation
Fig. 210 Miniature indication of automatic ac- tivation
When the Parking System Plus is switched on automatically, a miniature of the vehicle will be displayed and the segments will be shown on the left side of the screen Fig. 210.
Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap- proaching an obstacle located in front of the vehicle. It only operates every time the speed is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) for the first time.
If the parking aid is switched off using the button, the following actions must be carried out in order for it to automatically switch on:
Switch off the ignition and switch it on again.
OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- fore reducing speed below this number again.
OR: place the selector lever in position P and then move it from this position.
OR: switch on and off the automatic activa- tion in the Easy Connect system menu.
The automatic activation with parking aid miniature indication can be switched on and off from the Easy Connect system menu page 27:
Switch the ignition on.
Select: button > Setup > Parking and manoeuvring.
Select the Automatic activation op- tion. When the function button check box is activated , the function is on.
If the system has been activated automatical- ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv- en when obstacles in front are at a distance of less than 50 cm.
CAUTION
The automatic connection of the Parking Aid only works when you are driving slowly. If driving style is not adapted to the circum- stances, an accident and serious injury or damage may be caused.
Segments of the visual indication
Fig. 211 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen.
The distance of separation from the obstacle can be estimated using the segments around the vehicle.
The optical indication of the segments works as follows:
a white segment is dis- played when the obstacle is not within the vehicle's trajectory or the direction of travel is in the opposite direction to its location.
obstacles located in the vehicle's trajectory and which are more than 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in yellow.
obstacles that are less than 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- played in red.
White segments:
Yellow segments:
Red segments:
246
Driver assistance systems
Moreover, with the SEAT Media System Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi- cates the vehicle's expected trajectory based on the steering wheel angle.
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audible warning will sound.
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob- stacles are represented in red, including those out of the path. Do not continue to move forward (or backward) in Descrip- tion on page 244, in Description on page 244 !
If the car is equipped with the Top View Cam- era, the Park Assist visual display will appear in accordance with the view selected in the Top View Camera system.
Adjusting the display and audible warnings
The settings for the display and audible warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- nect*.
Automatic activation
on activates the Automatic activa- tion option page 246.
off deactivates the Automatic ac- tivation option page 246.
Front volume*
Volume in the front and rear area.
Front sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front area.
Rear volume*
Volume in the rear area.
Rear sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear area.
Adjust volume
With the parking aid switched on, the active audio/video source volume will be reduced to the intensity of the selected setting.
Error messages
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is switched on, if a message reporting a Park-
ing aid error is displayed on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the system.
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, next time that parking aid is engaged in reverse, it will not be indi- cated.
If there is a fault in the parking aid system a message will appear on the instrument panel indicating the error. In addition the key LED will blink.
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the Easy Connect display in front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and B are displayed Fig. 208. If a front sensor
is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C
and D are displayed.
Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.
247
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Driving with a trailer
Fig. 212 ParkPilot display on the screen with trailer attached.
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear sensors will not be activated when reverse gear is engaged, when the selector lever is turned to position R or when the button is pressed.
The distance to possible obstacles at the rear of the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis- played on the screen and will not be indica- ted by means of audible sound signals.
The Easy Connect system screen will only dis- play objects detected at the front, and the ve- hicle's trajectory will be hidden.
Parking aid (ParkPilot)*
Description
Various systems are available to help you when parking or manoeuvring in tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehicle.
The rear parking aid is an audible assistant that warns of obstacles located behind the vehicle.
There are sensors integrated in the rear bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings and visually on the Easy Connect system.
If the Top View Camera* system is installed, the rear parking aid will give an audible warning about objects near the rear of the ve- hicle, and the Top View Camera* image will be available on the Easy Connect screen, giv- ing a real image of the objects around the car.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the like, as this could affect the system's op- eration. Cleaning instructions page 272.
The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is:
side area 0.60 m
central area 1.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- val between the audible warnings will be re- duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning will be constant: Do not continue to move forward (or backward) , !
If you maintain separation from the obstacle, the volume of the warning begins to reduce after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning).
Activating/Deactivating
When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid is automatically switched on. This is con- firmed with a short warning.
On disengaging reverse gear, the parking aid system is switched off.
WARNING
Always pay attention, also when looking straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur- roundings. The assistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. When in- serting or removing the vehicle from a park- ing space, or when performing similar ma- noeuvres the driver always assumes the re- sponsibility.
Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.
248
Driver assistance systems
The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not regis- tered. Pay special attention to children and animals.
Always keep visual control of the vehicle surroundings: use the mirrors for additional help.
CAUTION
Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- fected by different factors that may lead to damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- rounds:
Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects:
Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, fences, posts and thin trees.
Objects that are located above the sen- sors, such as protrusions in a wall.
Objects with certain surfaces or struc- tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- der snow.
Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- nals. The system cannot detect these objects or people wearing such clothes correctly.
Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. In certain circum- stances this may prevent them from detect- ing people or objects.
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give any further warning. In certain circumstances, objects such as high kerbs that could damage the bottom of the vehicle are not detected either.
If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig- nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable damage.
The knocks or damage on the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- body can adjust the orientation of the sen- sors. This can affect the parking aid function. In this case, have the function checked by a specialised workshop.
Note
In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area, e.g:
with rough or cobbled floors or ground with long grass;
with external ultrasound sources, such as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles equip- ped with ultrasound systems;
in downpours, intense snow, hail or dense exhaust gases,
if the number plate is not perfectly se- cured to the bumper surface,
or in locations such as the brow of a hill.
In order to guarantee good system opera- tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free
of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other objects.
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply it directly only very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm.
Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the operation of the Parking Aid.
In order to familiarise yourself with the sys- tem, it is advised that you practice parking in an area or car park that is free from traffic. There must be good weather and light condi- tions.
The volume and tone of the warnings can be modified, in addition to the indications page 250.
In vehicles without an infotainment system, these parameters can be modified in a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised workshop.
Please observe information on towing a trailer page 251.
The display on the Easy Connect screen shows a slight time delay.
Parking Aid operation
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display (the audible sounds remain active)
Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system.
OR: Press the BACK function button. 249
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Parking Aid connection
Engage reverse (for manual gears) or set the selector lever to R (for automatic gears).
Parking Aid disconnection
Place the selector level in position P, N or D (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- verse (for manual gearboxes). If you set the lever to N or D, the system will remain active for approximately 8 seconds before switching off, except with Top View Camera*, when it will be switched off immediately after engag- ing reverse.
Temporary suppression of sound in Parking Aid
Press the function button. If you have the Top View Camera* system installed, you can- not use the temporary suppression of sound in Parking Aid.
Switch from reduced to full-screen view if the rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera RVC)
Press the car icon in the reduced view.
If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image (Rear View Camera RVC)
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.
OR: press the RVC function icon.
Segments of the visual indication
Fig. 213 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen.
The distance to the obstacles can be estima- ted with the help of the segments at the rear of the vehicle.
The optical indication of the segments works as follows:
they are displayed if the obstacle is not in the vehicle's direction of travel, even when the electric parking brake is activated.
obstacles located in the vehicle's trajectory and which are more than 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in yellow.
obstacles that are less than 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- played in red.
White segments:
Yellow segments:
Red segments:
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audible warning will sound.
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob- stacles are represented in red, including those out of the path. Do not continue to re- verse in Description on page 248, in Description on page 249 !
If your vehicle is equipped with Top View Camera*
Segments are not displayed when the vehicle is equipped with Top View Camera*.
The PDC system will give an audible warning for objects that are near the rear of the vehi- cle, and the Top View Camera* image will be available on the screen, giving a real image of the objects around the car.
Adjusting the display and audible warnings
The settings for the display and audible warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- nect*.
250
Driver assistance systems
Rear volume*
Volume in the rear area.
Rear sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear area.
Adjust volume
With the parking aid switched on, the active audio/video source volume will be reduced to the intensity of the selected setting.
Error messages
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is switched on, if a message reporting a Park- ing aid error is displayed on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the system.
If the fault disappears before disconnecting the ignition, next time that parking aid is en- gaged in reverse it will not be indicated.
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the Easy Connect display.
Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.
Towing bracket
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear sensors will not be activated when reverse gear is engaged (manual gears) nor when the selector lever is turned to position R (auto- matic gears).
Area view system (Top View Camera)*
Introduction
table on page 2
Using 4 cameras, the system generates a rep- resentation that is shown on the infotain- ment system display. The cameras are loca- ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors and the rear lid.
The functions and representations of the Area View system may vary depending on whether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.
WARNING
The image from the cameras does not make it possible to calculate the distance to the ob- stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) precisely, so
using them could cause serious accidents and injury.
The camera lenses augment and distort the visual field and the objects on the screen are seen differently and imprecisely.
Certain objects may not be shown or may not be shown very clearly, for example, posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolution or if light conditions are insufficient.
The cameras have blind spots in which ob- stacles and people are not registered.
The camera lens must be kept free, without snow or ice, and should not be covered.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the area view system (Top View Camera*) system cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. The greater convenience provided by the Area View system should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. If used negligently or in- voluntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions.
Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen.
Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the cameras do not capture small
251
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
children, animals and certain objects in all situations.
The use of a number plate may interfere in the views shown on the screen, since the cameras' field of vision may be reduced.
The system will probably be unable to rep- resent all areas clearly.
CAUTION
The camera images are only two-dimen- sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, objects that jut out or holes on the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all.
In certain circumstances, the camera does not capture objects such as beams, fences, posts or thin trees, which could damage the vehicle.
The system displays the auxiliary lines and boxes regardless of the vehicle's environ- ment, no objects are detected. The driver is responsible for determining that the vehicle will fit in the parking space.
CAUTION
In order to guarantee good system operation, keep the cameras clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or oth- er objects.
Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lenses.
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Doing so could damage the lenses.
Area View system
Fig. 214 Display of the Area View system: aer- ial view.
There are four different views to choose from:
Key to the Fig. 214:
Symbol Meaning
A Front camera area
B Right camera area
C Rear camera area
D Left camera area
Exit the current display.
Key to the Fig. 214:
Symbol Meaning
Three-dimensional views
Depending on the equipment: connect- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot sound.
Setting the display: brightness, contrast and colour.
The aerial view is generated by combining the images from all the cameras Fig. 214. The aerial view can be selected by pressing the vehicle in the area.
Select the corresponding view by pressing the different areas Fig. 214 A to D of the aerial view or the reduced aerial view.
Conditions necessary for the use of the Area View system
The doors and the rear lid must be closed.
The image must be reliable and clear. For this reason, for example, the camera lens must be clean.
The area around the vehicle must be clearly and totally visible.
The area for parking or manoeuvring should be a flat surface.
The vehicle should not be loaded very heavily at the rear.
The driver must be used to the system. 252
Driver assistance systems
There should be no damage to the vehicle in the camera area. If the position or installa- tion angle of the cameras have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the system should be checked by a specialised workshop.
Camera image view
Aerial view (bird's eye view): to obtain a panoramic view of the vehicle , three-di- mensional views, from different camera posi- tions.
Front Camera (front view): to observe traffic ahead of the vehicle (vehicles crossing) , for front parallel parking , when approach- ing an obstacle and in off-road driving .
Side cameras (side view): to view the area close to the sides of the vehicle, both on the left and on the right , or a combination of both sides .
Rear camera (rear view): To observe traffic behind the vehicle (vehicles crossing) , for reverse perpendicular parking , for reverse parallel parking and for hitching a trailer to the vehicle .
The selected view is displayed on the right side of the screen. The reduced aerial view shown on the right side displays the view framed in yellow. In addition, the right mar- gin of the screen displays the menu options possible and the views (the so-called
modes) of the camera in question. The ac- tive view (mode) at the time is highlighted.
The reduced aerial view can be hidden by pressing the symbol to thus display the se- lected view full-screen.
Instructions for use
Fig. 215 Centre console: button for activat- ing/deactivating the Area View system man- ually in combination with the parking aid sys- tem () or else with the rear ParkPilot system ().
Connecting and disconnecting the Area View system
Manual con- nection of the display:
Press the button Fig. 215 once.
The infotainment system screen dis- plays the aerial view Fig. 214. If you press the button when driving above 15 km/h (9 mph), the image will not be displayed.
Automatic con- nection of the display:
Select reverse gear.
The view of the image of the vehicle's rear camera is shown in parallel park- ing mode with the reduced aerial view.
Manual discon- nection of the display:
Press the button Fig. 215 again.
OR: press a button on the factory- equipped infotainment system, for example the RADIO button.
OR: press the function button.
Automatic dis- connection of the display:
Drive forward at more than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph).
OR: switch the ignition off. The Area View system menu disappears imme- diately.
253
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Special characteristics
Examples of optical illusions caused by the cameras:
The images on the area view system cameras are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, it is dif- ficult or impossible to make out on-screen any holes there may be on the ground, objects jutting out from the ground or parts protruding from other vehicles.
Situations in which the objects or other vehicles appear to be further away or closer than they really are:
On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope.
Examples of optical illusions caused by the cameras:
On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane.
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
If the vehicle approaches protruding objects. These objects may be outside the cameras' angle of visibility.
Trailer mode
The Area View system conceals, in the rear camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines
when the factory-fitted towing bracket is con- nected electrically to a trailer page 259.
Note
In order to become familiar with the system and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice handling the Area View system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.
Menus of the area view system (modes)
Fig. 216 Display on the Area View system screen: Front camera: off-road view Rear camera: off-road view
Key to the Fig. 216:
Symbol Meaning
Depending on the equipment: connect- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot sound.
Key to the Fig. 216:
Symbol Meaning
Showing the reduced display.
Hiding the reduced display.
Key to the Fig. 216:
Symbol Meaning
Exiting the Area View system screen:
254
Driver assistance systems
Key to the Fig. 216:
Symbol Meaning
Setting the display: brightness, contrast and colour.
Aerial views (bird's eye view)
View On-screen display of all cameras
Main mode
The vehicle and its immediate vicinity seen from above are shown. Depending on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path may also be displayed.
Three-di- mensional
views
The vehicle and its vicinity seen from above are shown.
The vehicle and its vicinity seen from above are shown oblique- ly.
The vehicle and its vicinity seen obliquely are shown.
Swipe the infotainment system display with your finger in the direction of the arrows to change the angle of vision in the three-di- mensional views of the vehicle and its vicini- ty.
Front camera views (front view)
View On-screen display of the front camera
Cross traffic at the front
Left area of the screen: street to the left.
Central area of the screen: area directly in front of the vehicle.
Right area of the screen: street to the right.
Parallel park- ing
The area in front of the vehicle is shown. Orientation lines are shown to give guidance.
Off-road
The area directly in front of the vehicle seen from above is shown. For example, on a slope, in order to see the area di- rectly in front of the vehicle. The red line is shown at a distance of approx. 0.4 m from the vehicle.
Side camera views (side view)
View On-screen display of the side cameras
Right and left sides
The areas located directly to the side of the vehicle seen from above are repre- sented in order to navigate possible ob- stacles more precisely. The orange aux- iliary lines are shown at a distance of approx. 0.4 m from the vehicle.
View On-screen display of the side cameras
Left side
The area directly next to the vehicle, on the driver's or front passenger's side, is displayed, and the blind spots all along the vehicle can be seen. The orange auxiliary line is shown at a distance of approx. 0.4 m from the vehicle.
Right side
Rear camera views (rear view)
View On-screen display of the rear camera
Parallel park- ing
The area behind the vehicle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shown to give guid- ance.
Parallel park- ing
The vehicle's initial position on initiat- ing this function will be a decisive fac- tor in determining the place where the manoeuvre executed by the assistant will end.
255
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
View On-screen display of the rear camera
Off-road or hitching a
trailer func- tion
The vehicle's rear is presented. The red auxiliary line establishes the safety dis- tance.
Green and red semicircular auxiliary lines are displayed in vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket. The auxili- ary lines indicate the distance from the towing bracket. The distance between the auxiliary lines (green and red) is ap- prox. 0.3 m. The orange auxiliary line in- dicates, depending on the turn of the steering wheel, the pre-calculated di- rection of the towing bracket.
In vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket, the distance from the red auxil- iary line to the vehicle is approx. 0.4 m. No other auxiliary line is displayed.
Cross traffic at the rear
Left area of the screen: street to the left.
Central area of the screen: area directly behind the vehicle.
Right area of the screen: street to the right.
Rear Assist (Rear View Cam- era)*
Operating and safety warnings
WARNING
The Rear Assist does not make it possible to precisely calculate the distance from ob- stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it overcome the system's own limits, hence us- ing it may cause serious accidents and inju- ries if used negligently or without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her sur- roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.
The camera lens expands and distorts the field of vision and displays the objects on the screen in a different, vague manner. The per- ception of distances is also distorted by this effect.
Some objects may, due to the resolution of the display screen - not be displayed in a sat- isfactory manner or may not be displayed at all. Take special care with thin posts, fences, railings or trees that might not be displayed on screen and could damage the vehicle.
The rear assist has blind spots where it is not possible to represent people or objects (small children, animals and certain objects cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon- itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times.
Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and snow, and do not cover it.
The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Supervise the parking operation at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround- ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen.
The images on the rear assist screen are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, protruding parts or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all.
Vehicle load modifies the representation of the orientation lines displayed. The width represented by the lines diminishes with ve- hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi- cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve- hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying a heavy load.
In the following situations, the objects or other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- tem display appear to be further away or closer than they really are: Pay special atten- tion:
On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope.
On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane.
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
When the vehicle approaches objects that are not on the ground surface or are
256
Driver assistance systems
jutting out from it. These objects may al- so be outside the camera's angle of vi- sion when reversing.
Note
It is important to take great care and pay special attention if you are not yet familiar with the system.
Rear assist will not be available if the vehi- cle's rear lid is open.
Instructions for use
Fig. 217 In the rear lid handle: location of the rear assist camera
A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- sists the driver in reverse parking or manoeu- vring Fig. 217. The camera image is viewed together with orientation lines projected by the system on the Easy Connect system screen. The bottom of the screen displays
part of the bumper corresponding to the number plate area that will be used as refer- ence by the driver.
Rear assist settings:
Rear assist offers the user the possibility to change the image's brightness, contrast and colour settings.
To change these settings:
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
Apply the parking brake.
Switch the ignition on.
If necessary, switch on the Easy Connect system.
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.
Press the function button displayed on the right of the image.
Make the desired adjustments on the menu by pressing the /+ function buttons or by moving the corresponding scroll button.
Necessary conditions for parking and ma- noeuvring with the rear assist
The system should not be used in the follow- ing cases:
If the image displayed is not very reliable or is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty lens.
If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- played very clearly or is incomplete.
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
If the position and installation angle of the camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- end collision. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.
Familiarising yourself with the system
To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- ommends practising parking and manoeu- vring with the rear assist in a place without too much traffic or in a car park when there are good weather and visibility conditions.
Cleaning the camera lens
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow and ice:
Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- based glass cleaning product and clean the lens with a dry cloth.
Remove snow using a small brush.
Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.
CAUTION
Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lens.
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could damage the camera.
257
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Parking and manoeuvring with the rear assist
Fig. 218 Display on the Easy Connect system screen: orientation lines.
Switching the system on and off
The rear assist will switch on when the igni- tion is on or the engine running, on engaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- matic gearbox).
The system switches off 8 seconds after disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) or removing the selector lever from the R po- sition (automatic gearbox). The system will also disconnect immediately after the igni- tion is switched off.
The camera will stop transmitting images above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- verse engaged.
In combination with the Parking System Plus page 248, the camera image will cease to be transmitted immediately when reverse gear is disengaged or when the selector lever is moved from the R position, and the optical information provided by the Parking Aid sys- tem will be displayed.
Also in combination with the system, the rear assist image can also be concealed:
By pressing one of the Infotainment system buttons on the display.
OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that appears on the left of the screen (which switches to the full-screen mode of the Park- ing System Plus's optical system).
If you wish to display the rear assist image again:
Disengage reverse, or change the selector lever's position, engage reverse again or move the selector lever to position R.
OR: Press the RVC function button1)
Meaning of the orientation lines
Fig. 218
Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the approximate width of the vehicle plus the rear view mirrors) on the road surface.
End of the side lines: the area marked in green ends approximately 2 m behind the vehicle on the road surface.
Intermediate line: indicates a distance of approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on the road surface.
Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis- tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the road surface.
Parking manoeuvre
Place the vehicle in front of the parking space and engage reverse gear (manual gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi- tion (automatic gearbox).
Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel so that the side orientation lines lead to- wards the parking space.
Guide the vehicle into the parking space so that the side orientation lines run parallel to it.
1
2
3
4
1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be ac- tivated and available when the reverse gear is en- gaged or the selector lever is set to position R.
258
Towing bracket device*
Towing bracket device*
Trailer mode
Introduction
Take into account country-specific regula- tions about driving with a trailer and the use of a towing bracket.
The vehicle has been developed primarily for carrying people, although it can also be used to tow a trailer if fitted with the correspond- ing technical equipment. This additional load has an effect on the useful life, fuel con- sumption and vehicle performance and in some cases can reduce the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from the vehicle, and thus more concentration from the driver.
In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both the vehicle and the trailer.
Maximum vertical load technically permissi- ble on the coupling
The maximum vertical load technically per- mitted from the trailer draw bar on the towing bracket's tow hitch is 80 kg.
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the
Start-Stop system operates as normal. No special characteristics need to be taken into account.
If the system does not recognise the trailer or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- nected by pressing the corresponding button in the lower part of the centre console before driving with the trailer, and it should remain off for the rest of the journey .
Vehicles with driving profile selection
If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- ded. You are advised to select another of the available driving profiles before beginning to drive with a trailer.
WARNING
Never use the trailer to transport people, since it would put their life in danger and is also prohibited.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents.
Only use the towing bracket if it is in a per- fect state of repair and is properly secured.
Never modify or repair the towing bracket in any way.
In order to reduce the danger of injury in the event of rear-end collisions and to avoid
injury to pedestrians and cyclists when park- ing the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hitch when you are not using a trailer.
Never fit a towing bracket with weight dis- tribution or load compensation. The vehi- cle has not been designed for this type of towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail and the trailer could be released from the ve- hicle.
WARNING
Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects can affect driving properties and even cause an accident.
Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condi- tion.
Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.
Trailers with a high centre of gravity are more likely to overturn than those with a low one.
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Take great care when overtaking.
Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.
Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional circum- stances). This also applies in countries where driving at higher speeds is permitted. Take
259
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
into account the speed limit for vehicles with trailers in the corresponding country, as it could be less than the speed limit for vehi- cles without a trailer.
Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
WARNING
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop system must be disconnected manually whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise the brake system could be damaged and could conse- quently cause a serious accident or injury.
Always disconnect the Start-Stop system manually when using a towing bracket that has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.
Note
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm page 116. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's first 1000 km page 188.
SEAT recommends that, if possible, the tow hitch be disassembled or covered when it is not going to be used. In the event of a rear- end collision, the damage to the vehicle could be greater if the bracket is fitted.
Some retrofitted towing brackets cover the rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing
eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. For this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofitted with a towing bracket, always keep the tow hitch in the ve- hicle when you disassemble it.
Control lamp
The tow hitch is not securely locked in position.
Check that the towing bracket is locked page 261.
Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci- dents and severe injuries.
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- es.
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- sponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.
Technical requirements
Vehicles that are factory-equipped with a towing bracket fulfil all the technical and le- gal requirements for driving with a trailer.
If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for the maximum authorised load of the trailer that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer and must be properly secured to the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for this vehicle. Always check and take into ac- count the towing bracket manufacturer's in- structions. Never fit a towing bracket with weight distribution or load compensation.
Towing bracket fitted on the bumper
Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to the area where the bumper is mounted. The towing bracket should not impair the bum- per's function. Do not make modifications or repairs to the exhaust system or the brake system. Make regular checks to ensure that the towing bracket is secure.
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling system should have sufficient coolant and be prepared for the additional effort involved in driving with a trailer.
260
Towing bracket device*
Trailer brakes
If the trailer has its own brake system, please take the relevant legal requirements into ac- count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- tem to the vehicle's brake system.
Tow rope
Always use a cable between the vehicle and the trailer page 263.
Trailer rear lights
The trailer's rear lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations page 263.
Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not sure that the trailer's electrical connection is correct, have it checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Exterior mirrors
If you cannot see the area behind the trailer with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehi- cle, additional mirrors will have to be instal- led in accordance with the regulations of the country in question. The exterior mirrors should be adjusted before you start driving and must provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.
Trailer maximum electricity consumption
Consumers Europe, Asia, Africa, South America and
Central America
Australia
Brake lights (total) 84 Watts 108 Watts
Turn signal (on each side)
42 Watts 54 Watts
Side lights (on each side)
50 Watts 100 Watts
Reverse lights (on each side)
42 Watts 54 Watts
Rear fog light 42 Watts 54 Watts
Never exceed the values indicated!
WARNING
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is not the right one, the trailer could become detached from the vehicle and cause serious injury.
CAUTION
If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic sys- tem may be damaged.
If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur- rent, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.
Never connect the trailer's electric system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sources. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer.
Electrical unlocking tow hitch
Fig. 219 On the right side of the luggage compartment: button for unlocking the tow hitch.
table on page 2
The tow hitch is located in the bumper. The electrical unlocking tow hitch cannot be dis- assembled.
There should be no person, animal or object in the path of the tow hitch .
261
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Unlock the tow hitch and remove it
Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic parking brake page 174.
Switch off the engine.
Open the rear lid.
Pull the Fig. 219 button briefly. The tow hitch unlocks electrically and automatically turns outwards. The control lamp in the but- ton will flash Fig. 219.
Remove the tow hitch with your hand until you feel and see that it has engaged and the control lamp on the button stays on.
Close the tailgate.
Cover the tow hitch
Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic parking brake.
Switch off the engine.
Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri- cal connection between it and the vehicle. If you are using an adapter, remove it from the trailer's power socket.
Open the rear lid.
Pull the Fig. 219 button briefly. The tow hitch unlocks electrically.
Turn the tow hitch under the bumper with your hand until you feel and see that it en- gages and the control lamp on the Fig. 219 button stays on.
Close the tailgate.
Meaning of control lamp
If the warning light of the button Fig. 219 is flashing, this means that the tow hitch has not been attached properly or is damaged .
If the warning lamp stays on with the rear lid open, the tow hitch is correctly in place both when engaged and when covered.
The control lamp of the button will go off approx. 1 minute after closing the rear lid.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents.
Only use the tow hitch if it is properly en- gaged.
Always ensure that no person, animal or object is to be found in the path of the tow hitch.
Never use a tool or instrument while the tow hitch is moving.
Never press the Fig. 219 button when there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or when a carrier system or other accessories are mounted on the tow hitch.
If the tow hitch is not attached properly, do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised work- shop and have the towing bracket checked.
If you detect any fault in the electrical sys- tem or in the towing bracket, contact a speci- alised workshop and ask them to check it.
If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 mm at any one point, do not use the towing bracket under any circumstances.
CAUTION
If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure or steam devices, do not point the jet directly towards the retractable tow hitch or the trail- er power socket, as this may damage the joints or remove the grease necessary for lu- brication.
Note
At extremely low temperatures, the tow hitch may be impossible to use. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer location (for example, a garage).
Fitting a bicycle carrier on the retract- able tow hitch
The maximum allowed weight of the carrier system, including the load, is 75 kg. The car- rier system should not protrude more than 700 mm backwards from the spherical head. Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicy- cles must be mounted as close to the vehicle as possible (tow hitch).
262
Towing bracket device*
WARNING
The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bicy- cle rack mounted on the tow hitch can cause accidents and injury.
Never exceed the maximum weight or the limits indicated above.
The bicycle rack may not be mounted to the neck of the hitch below the ball because, due to the shape of the neck and depending on the rack model, the rack could be incorrectly mounted on the vehicle.
Always read and take the manufacturer as- sembly instructions into account.
CAUTION
If the maximum weight and limits indicated above are exceeded, the vehicle may suffer considerable damage.
Never exceed the values indicated!
Note
SEAT recommends removing, as far as possi- ble, all removable parts of the bicycles before setting off. These parts include, for example, baskets and saddlebags, child seats or bat- teries. This improves aerodynamics and the centre of gravity of the rack system.
Hooking up and connecting a trailer
Fig. 220 Schematic diagram: assignment of the pins of the trailer's power socket.
Key to the Fig. 220:
Pin Meaning
1 Left turn signal
2 Rear fog light
3 Table of pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
4 Right turn signal
5 Rear light, right
6 Brake lights
7 Rear light, left
8 Reverse lights
9 Permanent live
10 Live charge cable
11 Table for pin 10
Key to the Fig. 220:
Pin Meaning
12 Unassigned
13 Table for pin 9
Trailer power socket
The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine running, electrical devices on the trailer re- ceive power from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket).
If the system detects that a trailer has been connected electrically, the electrical equip- ment on the trailer will receive voltage through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for ex- ample, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan only re- ceive electrical power if the engine is running (through pin 10).
To avoid overloading the electrical system, you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3, pin 11 or pin 13.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available.
263
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Tow rope
The tow rope must always be securely fixed to the towing vehicle and loose enough so that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. However, make sure that the cable does not rub on the ground while driving.
Trailer rear lights
Always check the trailer's rear lights to en- sure they are working correctly and that they comply with the relevant safety regulations. Make sure that the maximum permissible power that can be absorbed by the trailer is not exceeded page 261.
Connection to the anti-theft system
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system if the following conditions are met:
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an anti-theft alarm and towing bracket.
If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power socket.
If the electrical systems of the vehicle and trailer are in perfect condition and have no faults or damage.
If the vehicle is locked with the key and the anti-theft alarm is activated.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- gered if the electrical connection with the trailer is cut off.
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
Trailers with LED rear lights
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- theft alarm system.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does not go off when the electrical connection with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light- emitting diodes.
If the Eco driving profile was selected when hitching the trailer, this will automatically switch to the Normal profile. If the system cannot detect the attached trailer or if the towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au- to repair shop other than SEAT, you must manually select the Normal profile before you start driving with a trailer attached. To recon- nect the Eco profile once the trailer has been unhitched, switch the ignition off and back on once.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, it may lead to an excessive amount of current supplied to the trailer, which can cause abnormalities in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- dents and serious injuries.
Ensure that any repairs that need to be car- ried out on the electrical system are carried out by a specialised workshop.
Never connect the trailer's electric system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sources.
WARNING
Contact between the pins of the trailer power socket can cause short circuits, overloading of the electrical system or failure of the light- ing system, and consequently can cause acci- dents and serious injuries.
Never connect the pins of the trailer power socket to each other.
Make sure any work on bent pins is carried out by a specialised workshop.
CAUTION
Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehi- cle when parked; place it on its support wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or falls due, for example, to a variation of the load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will be placed on the towing bracket and the trail- er, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
Note
In case of malfunctioning of the electrical systems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as of
264
Towing bracket device*
the anti-theft system, have these checked out by a specialised workshop.
If the trailer accessories consume energy through the power socket to the trailer and the engine is turned off, the battery will dis- charge.
If the vehicle battery is running low, the electrical connection with the trailer will be automatically cut.
Loading a trailer
Technically permissible maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling de- vice
The technically permissible maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow . The vertical load on the coupling load is exerted vertically from above on the tow hitch of the towing bracket page 307.
The information on the maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling de- vice contained in the type plate of the towing bracket are experimental values only. The correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle documentation. The information in the vehicle documentation takes prece- dence at all times.
To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom- mends making the most of the maximum ver-
tical load technically permissible on the cou- pling device page 259. An insufficient ver- tical load has a negative influence on the be- haviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
The vertical load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- pacity.
Gross combination weight of the towing ve- hicle and trailer
The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual weight of the loaded trailer.
In some countries trailers are classified into distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob- taining information from a specialised work- shop regarding which type of trailer is most suitable for your vehicle.
Trailer loading
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the load must be as close as possible to the max- imum vertical load technically permissible on the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis- tributed between the back and front of the trailer:
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible or above it.
Secure the trailer load properly.
Tyre pressure
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- ommendations.
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the towing vehicle with the maximum allowable pressure page 296.
WARNING
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the maximum load technically permissible on the coupling point, the maximum authorised ve- hicle weight or the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer are excee- ded, accidents and serious injuries may oc- cur.
Never exceed the values indicated!
The actual weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum per- missible axle weight. The weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maxi- mum permissible weight.
WARNING
A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabili- ty and security of the towing vehicle and trailer, which could lead to accidents and se- rious injuries.
Always load the trailer correctly.
Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condi- tion.
265
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
Driving with a trailer
Adjusting the headlights
When towing a trailer, the front part of the ve- hicle could lift up, and if the dipped beams are on, this could dazzle other drivers. Use the headlight range control to lower the cone of light. If you do not have headlight range control, have the headlights adjusted by a specialised workshop.
Special characteristics of driving with a trail- er
If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- vent the jerking that can be caused by the locking of trailer wheels.
Due to the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis- tance increases.
When going down a slope, go into lower gear (if using a manual gearbox or the Tip- tronic automatic gearbox) to take advantage of the braking power provided by the engine. Otherwise, the braking system could over- heat and even fail.
The trailer weight, as well as the gross com- bination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, change the centre of gravity and the properties of the vehicle.
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail- er is loaded, then the load distribution is in-
correct. Under these conditions, drive slowly and with extra caution.
Hill starts with a trailer
Depending on the slope of the hill and the combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling backwards slightly when you first start up.
For hill-starting with a trailer, do the follow- ing:
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Press the button to disconnect the elec- tronic parking brake page 174.
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way down.
Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se- lector lever to position D/S page 180.
Pull out the button and hold it in that position to stop the towing vehicle and trailer with the electronic parking brake.
Release the brake pedal.
Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch pedal.
Do not release the button until the en- gine has sufficient force to start driving.
WARNING
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury.
Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects will change the vehicle handling and braking distances.
Always drive cautiously and carefully. Brake earlier than usual.
Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions. Slow down, especially when driving down hills or slopes.
Accelerate with particular care and caution. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trail- er is swaying, however slightly.
Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
Take into account the speed limit for vehi- cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than for vehicles without a trailer.
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
The stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer together is an additional function of the electronic stability control (ESC).
266
Towing bracket device*
If the system detects that the trailer is sway- ing, it intervenes automatically with the driv- er steering recommendation to reduce the swaying of the trailer.
Requirements for the stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a compatible towing bracket.
The ESC and ASR are active. The control lamp or is not lit up on the instrument panel.
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power socket.
The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h (approx. 37 mph).
The maximum vertical load technically per- missible is being utilised on the coupling de- vice.
The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
If the trailer has brakes, it must be equip- ped with a mechanical overrun brake.
WARNING
The enhanced security provided by the elec- tric stability control of the towing vehicle and trailer should not lead you to take any risks that could compromise your safety.
Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- fic conditions.
Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery.
When adjusting any settings, stop acceler- ating.
WARNING
The electric stability control for the towing vehicle and trailer may not correctly detect all driving conditions.
When the ESC is switched off, the stabilisa- tion of the towing vehicle and trailer is also switched off.
The stability system does not always detect light and unstable trailers, so it may not sta- bilise these correctly.
When driving on slippery surfaces with poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with the stability system.
Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip even without having previously swayed.
If a trailer is not attached, but the trailer power socket is connected (e.g. installation of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated auto- matic braking may occur in extreme driving conditions.
Retrofitting a towing bracket
Fig. 221 Limits and attachment points for ret- rofitting a towing bracket.
267
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Operation
SEAT recommends that towing brackets be retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex- ample, it may very well be necessary to ad- just the cooling system or mount thermal pro- tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance specifications should always be kept in mind. The distance between the centre of the spherical head and the road Fig. 221 D
must never be less than that indicated. This also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the technically permissible maxi- mum vertical load on the coupling device.
Distance specifications Fig. 221:
Attachment points
932.5 mm
65 mm min.
350-420 mm
220 mm
615.5 mm
1,043 mm
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries.
Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connections of the tail lights
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
or any other unsuitable power sources. Only use suitable connectors to connect the trail- er.
The towing bracket should be retrofitted only at a specialised workshop.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or unsuit- able, the trailer may separate from the vehi- cle while driving. This could cause serious ac- cidents and fatal injuries.
Note
Only use towing brackets that have been ap- proved by SEAT for the model in question.
268
Care and maintenance
Advice
Care and maintenance
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle
Accessories, replacement parts and repair work
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for advice before purchasing accessories and replacement parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety. For this reason, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Official Service for advice before fitting ac- cessories or replacement parts. Your SEAT Of- ficial Service has the latest information from the manufacturer and can recommend acces- sories and replacement parts which are suita- ble for your requirements. They can also an- swer any questions you might have regarding official regulations.
We recommend you to use only SEAT acces- sories and Genuine SEAT parts. SEAT has tested these parts and accessories for suita- bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that the parts are installed correctly and professionally.
Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv- en, such as a cruise control system or elec- tronically-controlled suspension, must be approved for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle it- self (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in the European Union).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or within the working range of the air- bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Modifications
Modifications must always be carried out ac- cording to our specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components, software, wiring or data transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Due to the way the electronic components are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive
wear of components, and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work performed in- correctly.
We therefore recommend that all work should be performed by a SEAT Official Service using genuine SEAT parts.
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Radio transmitters and office equip- ment
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT generally authorises in-vehicle installations of approved types of radio transmitters provi- ded that:
The aerial is installed correctly.
The aerial is installed on the exterior of the vehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth- er with non-reflective aerial trimming).
The effective transmitting power does not exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
269
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- shop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile radio transmitters
Commercial mobile telephones or radio equipment might interfere with the electron- ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to:
No external aerial.
External aerial incorrectly installed.
Transmitting power more than 10 W.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed exter- nal aerial .
Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.
Business equipment
Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- ded the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's immediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the mark. Any retrofit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type approval for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.
WARNING
Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without a prop- erly installed external aerial can create exces- sive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.
Note
The posterior fitting of electric and elec- tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li- cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances.
Please use the mobile telephone/radio op- erating instructions.
Care and cleaning
General information
Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may also be one of the requirements for upholding any war- ranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint defects.
SEAT Official Services and specialist retailers carry stocks of suitable car care materials. Please follow the instructions for use on the packaging.
WARNING
Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your health if misused.
Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
For the sake of the environment
If possible, use environmentally friendly products.
The remains of car care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.
Vehicle exterior care
Washing the vehicle
The longer substances such as insects, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in- dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the ve- hicle, the more damage they do to the paint- work. High temperatures (for instance due to strong sunlight) further intensify the corro- sive effect.
After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
270
Care and maintenance
Automatic car washes
Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such as closing the windows and roof. If the vehicle has spe- cial accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial, etc., it is advisa- ble to consult the car wash tunnel operator.
It is best to use a car wash without revolving bristles if possible.
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- structions for the equipment. This applies particularly to the operating pressure and the spraying distance. Do not hold the nozzle too close to soft materials such as rubber hoses or seals. The same applies to the parking aid sensors*, which are located in the rear and/or front bumpers.
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt.
Stickers attached by the factory
Follow these directions to avoid damaging the stickers:
Do not use high pressure cleaners.
To remove ice or snow from the stickers do not use window scrapers or ice scrapers.
Do not polish the stickers.
Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.
Preferably wash using a soft sponge and soft neutral soap.
Washing the car by hand
When washing the car by hand, use plenty of water to soften the dirt first, and rinse off as well as possible.
Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, glove or brush using only slight pressure. You should start on the roof and work down. Special car soap should only be used for very persistent dirt.
Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of- ten.
Wheels, sills and similar should be cleaned last. Use a second sponge for this.
WARNING
The vehicle should only be washed with the ignition switched off. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident.
Do not clean the underside of chassis, the inside of wheel arches or wheel trims without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Other- wise, there is a risk of sustaining cuts.
When washing the car during the winter season: water and ice in the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness: risk of acci- dent!
CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight otherwise the paint can be damaged.
Do not use sponges, abrasive household sponges or similar to clean insect remains. This could damage the surface.
Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the headlights at regular intervals, for in- stance when filling the fuel tank. The head- lights should only be washed with water, do not wipe them with a dry cloth or sponge. It is best to use soapy water.
Never wash tyres with a jet that sprays the water out in a direct stream. This could dam- age the tyres even if the spray is kept at a distance and only used for a very short time.
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please make sure to retract the ex- terior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. Electrically retractable exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand, always use the electrical power control.
CAUTION
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please proceed as follows to lock the wiper arms so that they are not moved to- wards the top of the windscreen:
the bonnet must be closed.
switch the ignition on and off.
press the windscreen wiper lever forward briefly (windscreen washer function). This will lock the wiper arms.
271
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special wash bays. These areas are prepared to pre- vent oily water from getting into the public drains. In some places, washing vehicles out- side the areas intended for this purpose is prohibited.
Camera sensors and lenses
Use a small brush to remove snow and a de-icer spray to remove ice.
Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod- uct and a soft, dry cloth.
Moisten the camera lens using a standard alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and clean the lens with a dry cloth. In the active lane assist*, the area in front of the lens is normally cleaned with the windscreen wash- er.
CAUTION
When you clean the vehicle with a pressure washer:
Stay a suitable distance from the sensors on the front and rear bumpers.
Do not clean the camera lenses or sur- rounding area with the pressure washer.
Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from the reverse camera lens, as it could crack the lens.
Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the lens.
Waxing and polishing
Care
Waxing protects the paintwork. It is time to apply a coat of good wax when water no lon- ger forms droplets and rolls off the clean paintwork.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro- tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
In the summer, you will find it is much easier to remove dead insects (which accumulate on the bumper and the front of the bonnet) if the car has been treated with care products recently.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be brought back by putting on wax.
If the polish does not contain wax, a wax product should be applied after polishing.
CAUTION
Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain- ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic parts.
Do not apply paint polishes to the side trim that runs around the panoramic roof and ends on the windscreen. However, it can be treated with hard wax.
Trims
In respect for the environment, the silver- plated trims on the body are made of pure aluminium (they do not contain chrome).
Dirt or marks on the trim mouldings should be removed with a cleaning product with a neutral PH (do not use a chrome cleaner). Body polish is also unsuitable for use on trim mouldings. The intensive cleaning fluids of- ten used before the car goes into a car wash may contain alkaline substances, which can cause dull or milky patches when they dry out.
SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning products which have been tested for use on your vehicle and are not harmful to the envi- ronment.
272
Care and maintenance
Plastic parts
Plastic parts are cleaned with a power wash- er. If this is not sufficient, plastic parts should only be treated with a special solvent- free plastic cleaning agent. Do not use paint- work cleaners, polishes or wax on plastic parts.
Carbon parts
The carbon parts on your vehicle have a pain- ted surface. They do not need any special care and are cleaned just like any other pain- ted part page 270.
Paint damage
Minor damage to the paint, such as scratches or stone chips, should be touched up without delay before the metal starts to corrode. Suit- able touch-up brushes or sprays for your car can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service.
The number of the original paint finish on the vehicle is given on the data sticker page 305.
If corrosion is already visible it must be thor- oughly removed by a specialised workshop.
Windows
Clear vision is an essential safety factor.
The windscreen must not be cleaned with in- sect remover or wax, otherwise the wind- screen wipers will not function properly (jud- dering).
Traces of rubber, oil, grease or silicone can be removed with a window cleaning solution or a silicone remover. Wax residue can only be removed with a special cleaner. Your SEAT Official Service will be able to provide you with more detailed information.
The windows should also be cleaned on the inside at regular intervals.
Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry the windows. Cloths used for waxing and polish- ing contain residues that will cause smears on the glass.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions (e.g. in the rain, dark or with a low sun), these coatings may cause dazzle: risk of accident! Such coatings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make noise.
CAUTION
Remove snow and ice from windows and ex- terior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches caused by dirt on the glass, the scraper should only be pushed in one di- rection and not moved to and fro.
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the window. To avoid damaging them, do not apply stickers to these heating elements.
Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
Wheels
The wheels require regular attention to pre- serve their appearance. It is important to re- move road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.
After washing, the wheels should only be cleaned with an "acid-free" cleaning agent for alloy wheels. This is available from SEAT Official Services and specialist retailers. Nev- er leave the cleaning agent on the rims for any longer than specified in the instructions before rinsing it off. If the wheel cleaner fluid contains acid it can attack the surfaces of the wheel bolts.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used for maintaining the rims. If the protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying stones, the damaged area should be re- paired immediately.
273
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
WARNING
Please note when cleaning the wheels that water, ice and road salt can impair the effec- tiveness of the brakes; this can cause an acci- dent.
Exhaust tail pipe
It is important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at regular inter- vals, otherwise the exhaust tail pipe material could be damaged. To remove impurities, do not use rim, paint or chrome cleaners or oth- er abrasive products. Clean the exhaust tail pipes with cleaning products that are suita- ble for stainless steel.
SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning products that have been tested and ap- proved for use on your vehicle.
Caring for the vehicle interior
radio display/Easy Connect* and con- trol panel*
The display can be cleaned with a soft cloth and a professionally available LCD cleaner. Moisten the cloth with a small amount of the cleaning fluid.
The Easy Connect control panel* should first be cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goes into the device or between the keys and housing. Next, we recommend cleaning the Easy Connect control panel* using a cloth dampened with water and washing-up liquid.
CAUTION
To avoid scratching the screen, do not wipe the display with a dry cloth.
To avoid damage, ensure that no liquid goes into the Easy Connect control panel*.
Plastic and leatherette parts
Plastic parts and leatherette can be cleaned with a damp cloth. If this is not sufficient, plastic parts and leatherette should only be treated with a special solvent-free plastic cleaner.
Textile covers and trim parts
Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, door trim) should be cleaned regularly with a vac- uum cleaner. This will remove surface dirt which could otherwise be rubbed into the textile material during use. Do not use steam cleaners, as the steam could carry the dirt deeper into the textile material.
Normal cleaning
We recommend that you use a soft sponge or a commercially available lint-free, micro-fibre cloth for normal cleaning. Only use brushes on floor coverings and mats, as other textile surfaces could become damaged.
In the case of normal surface dirt you can use a foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread the foam on the textile surface and to work it into the material lightly. However, make sure that the textile material does not become soaking wet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab- sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) and vacuum off any residue once the surface is completely dry.
Cleaning stains
Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruit juice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli- cate fabrics. This solution should be applied with a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re- move, a washing paste can be applied direct- ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric. The surface will then have to be wiped with clear water to remove any residue left by the paste. To do so, use a damp cloth or sponge and then dab the stain with an absorbent cloth.
Remove chocolate or make-up stains with a cleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re- move the soap with water (wet sponge).
274
Care and maintenance
A spirit-based cleaner can be used to remove grease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Then dab the dissolved grease or colour particles off with an absorbent cloth or similar. You may also have to treat the stain once more using washing paste and water.
If the covers or textile trim panels are badly soiled we recommend that you have them cleaned by a professional cleaning company with a shampoo and spray.
Note
Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damage the seat upholstery. Make sure they are closed.
Natural leather
General information
Our range of leathers is large. The main type used is particularly nappa in various forms, that is, leather with a smooth surface in dif- ferent colours.
The amount of dye used determines the ap- pearance and properties of leather. If the leather is left in a more natural state, it re- tains its typical natural napped appearance and confers excellent all-weather properties to the seats. Fine veins, healed scars, insect bites, wrinkles and a subtle variation in shad-
ing remain visible; these are the characteris- tic features of genuine natural leather.
Natural napped leather does not have a pro- tective surface coating of dye. It is therefore somewhat more prone to damage. This should be borne in mind if children or pets often travel in the car, or if there are other factors that could lead to damage.
Types of leather with a coloured surface coat- ing are likely to be more resistant to damage. This has a great advantage for day-to-day use. However, this means that the typical natural characteristics of the surface are less apparent, though this does not affect quality.
Cleaning and care
Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides employed, the finished leath- er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc. so a degree of care is required in every- day use and when looking after the leather. Dark clothing (especially if damp or incorrect- ly dyed) may stain leather upholstery on the seats. Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. There- fore leather should be cleaned at regular in- tervals, depending on the actual amount of use. When they have been in use for a certain time, your car seats will acquire a typical and unmistakable patina. This is characteristic for leather as a natural product and is a sign of genuine quality.
To maintain the value of natural leather you should note the following points:
CAUTION
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best to cover the leather.
Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as belts, zip fasteners, rivets or similar, can also leave permanent scratches and rough marks on the surface of the leather.
Note
Use a suitable impregnating cream with ul- tra-violet protection at regular intervals and after cleaning. The cream nourishes and moisturises the leather, keeps it supple and able to breathe. A protective film will also form.
Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months and remove fresh dirt as soon as possible.
Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth- er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similar stains as soon as possible.
Preserve the colour of the leather. A special coloured cream will renew the colour of the leather when required and will eliminate dif- ferences in colour.
275
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
Cleaning and care of leather uphols- tery
Natural leather requires an extra degree of at- tention and care.
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa- ter and wipe over the leather surfaces.
More stubborn dirt
More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution (pure liquid soap: two tablespoons dissolved in one litre of wa- ter).
Do not let the water soak through the leath- er or penetrate into the seams.
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Removal of stains
Remove fresh water-based stains such as coffee, tea, juices, blood etc. with an ab- sorbent cloth or kitchen roll, or use the cleaning agent from the care set for dried- on stains.
Remove fresh grease-based stains that have not penetrated the surface such as butter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an absorbent cloth or kitchen roll or with the cleaning agent from the care set.
Treat fat-based, dried-in stains with grease- dissolving spray.
Treat less common stains on leather, such as ball-pen and other inks, felt-tip pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc. with a special leather stain remover.
Leather maintenance
The leather should be treated regularly (about twice a year) with a special leather- care product.
Apply these products very sparingly.
Then wipe off with a soft cloth.
Should you have questions regarding the care and cleaning of the leather upholstery in your vehicle, we recommend that you contact your SEAT Official Service. Our representa- tives will be happy to advise you and tell you about the product range for leather conserva- tion, for example:
Cleaning and care set.
Coloured leather-care cream.
Stain remover for ball-pen inks, shoe cream etc.
Grease dissolving spray.
New products and further developments
CAUTION
On no account use solvents (such as petrol, turpentine), wax polish, shoe cream or simi- lar materials.
Cleaning Alcantara upholstery
Removing dust and dirt
Moisten a cloth just a little and wipe down the seat covers.
Removing stains
Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di- luted white spirits.
Dab at the stain. Start at the outside and work inwards.
Dry the clean area with a soft cloth.
Do not use leather cleaning products on Al- cantara seat covers.
You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If the car is left standing in the sun for long periods, Al- cantara leather should be protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. How- ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor- mal use.
276
Intelligent technology
CAUTION
Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod- ucts or any similar products on Alcantara.
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialised workshop.
On no account use brushes, hard sponges or similar utensils.
Seat belts
Keep the seat belts clean.
For cleaning, use a mild solution of soap and water.
Check the condition of the seat belts at reg- ular intervals.
The retract function may not operate properly in very dirty belts. Make sure that the inertia reel seat belts are completely dry before al- lowing them to retract.
CAUTION
Do not remove the seat belts from the vehi- cle to clean them.
Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can damage the webbing. Ensure that the seat belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.
If you find any damage to the belt webbing, belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
the belt in question must be replaced by a specialised workshop.
Intelligent technology
Electromechanical steering
Electro-mechanical power steering assists the driver when steering.
Electro-mechanical power steering adapts electronically to the speed of the car, torque and turning angle.
If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off (for instance when being towed), the car can still be steered. However, more effort than normal will be required to turn the steering wheel.
Driver warning lamps and messages
(in red) Faulty steering! To park the vehicle
If the warning lamp remains on and the driver indication appears, the power steering could be faulty.
Do not continue driving. Seek specialist as- sistance.
(in yellow) Steering: System fault! You may continue driving.
If the warning lamp comes on, the steering could react with more difficultly or more sen- sitivity than normal. In addition, when driving in a straight line the steering wheel may be off-centre.
277
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.
(in yellow) Steering lock: fault! Go to an Official Service
The electronic steering lock is malfunction- ing.
Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and have the fault repaired.
WARNING
Take it immediately to a specialised work- shop and have the fault repaired: risk of acci- dent!
Note
If the lamp (in red) or else (in yellow) lights up briefly, you may continue driving.
Four-wheel drive 3 Valid for vehicles: with four-wheel drive
On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow- er is distributed to all four wheels
General notes
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine power is distributed to all four wheels. The distribution of power is controlled automati- cally according to your driving style and the road conditions. Also see page 177.
The four-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine power. This combination gives the vehicle exceptional handling and performance capabilities, both on normal roads and in more difficult condi- tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per- haps especially for this reason), it is impor- tant to observe certain safety points .
Winter tyres
Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend that winter tyres or all- season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to give even better braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive page 58.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling circumfer- ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread depths page 297.
Off-roader?
Your SEAT is not an off-road vehicle: it does not have enough ground clearance to be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid
rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as possible.
WARNING
Even with four-wheel drive, you should al- ways adjust your speed to suit the condi- tions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Risk of accident!
The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no different from a car without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in these condi- tions. Risk of accident!
On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aquaplane and lose contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed to warn the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car. For this reason you should always choose a driving speed suitable for the road condi- tions. Risk of accident!
278
Intelligent technology
Power Management
This system helps to ensure reliable starting
The power management controls the distribu- tion of electrical energy and thus helps to en- sure that there is always enough power avail- able to start the engine.
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- tem is left parked for a long time, the battery will gradually lose its charge because certain electrical devices, such as the electronic gearbox lock continues to draw current even when the ignition is off. In some cases there may not be enough power available to start the engine.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- cantly improves reliability when starting the engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the battery.
The main functions incorporated in the power management system are battery diagnosis, residual current management and dynamic power management.
Battery diagnosis
The battery diagnosis function constantly registers the condition of the battery. Sen- sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur-
rent and battery temperature. This enables the system to calculate the current power lev- el and charge condition of the battery.
Residual current management
The residual current management reduces power consumption while the vehicle is parked. It controls the supply of power to the various electrical devices while the ignition is switched off. The system takes the battery di- agnosis data into consideration.
Depending on the power level of the battery, switch off the individual electrical devices one after the other to prevent the battery from losing too much charge and to ensure that the engine can be started reliably.
Dynamic power management
While the vehicle is moving, this function dis- tributes the available power to the various electrical devices and systems according to their requirements. The power management ensures that on-board systems do not con- sume more electrical power than the alterna- tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi- mum possible battery power level.
Note
Neither is the power management system able to overcome the given physical limits. Please remember that the power and useful life of the battery are limited.
When there is a risk that the vehicle will not start, the alternator power failure or low battery charge level warning lamp will be shown page 110.
Flat battery
Starting ability has first priority.
Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures all place a heavy load on the battery. In these conditions a large amount of power is con- sumed, but only a small amount is supplied. The situation is also critical if electrical devi- ces are in use when the engine is not run- ning. In this case power is consumed when none is being generated.
In these situations you will be aware that the power management system is intervening to control the distribution of electrical power.
When the vehicle is parked for long periods
If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of several days or weeks, the power manage- ment will gradually shut off the electrical de- vices one by one or reduce the amount of cur- rent they are using. This limits the amount of power consumed and helps to ensure relia- ble starting even after a long period. Some convenience functions, such as remote vehi- cle opening, may not be available under cer- tain circumstances. These functions will be
279
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
restored when you switch on the ignition and start the engine.
With the engine switched off
For example, if you listen to the sound sys- tem with the engine switched off the battery will run down.
If the energy consumption means there is a risk that the engine will not start, a text will appear in vehicles with a driver information system*.
This driver indicator tells you that you must start the engine so that the battery can re- charge.
When the engine is running
Although the alternator generates electrical power, the battery can still become dis- charged while the vehicle is being driven. This can occur when a lot of power is being consumed but only a small amount supplied, especially if the battery is not fully charged initially.
To restore the necessary energy balance, the system will then temporarily shut off the elec- trical devices that are using a lot of power, or reduce the current they are consuming. Heat- ing systems in particular use a large amount of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, that the seat heating* or the rear window heater is not working, they may have been temporarily switched off or regulated to a
lower heat output. These systems will be available again as soon as sufficient electri- cal power is available.
You may also notice that the engine runs at a slightly faster idling speed when necessary. This is quite normal, and no cause for con- cern. The increased idling speed allows the alternator to meet the greater power require- ment and charge the battery at the same time.
Checking and refilling levels
Filling the tank
Filling up
Read the additional information carefully page 49
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor- rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the fuel tank is full. Do not try to put in more fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion chamber in the fuel tank.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at page 281.
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv- en in page 49.
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri- ous burns and other injuries.
When refuelling, turn off the engine, the auxiliary heater page 165 and turn off the ignition for safety reasons.
Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
280
Checking and refilling levels
Observe legislation governing the use, storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.
For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. In an accident the canister could be damaged and could leak.
If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points:
Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canister if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. An electrostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel vapour to ignite. Danger of explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.
Insert the filling nozzle as far as possible into the spare fuel canister.
If the spare fuel canister is made of met- al, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is ex- plosive. Risk of fatal accident!
CAUTION
If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it should be removed immediately. It could oth- erwise damage the paintwork.
Never run the tank completely dry. An irreg- ular fuel supply could cause misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.
When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en- gine, the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may take longer than normal (up to one minute) to start firing. This is because air needs to be bled from the fuel system while starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces- sary, request assistance from specialised per- sonnel.
Note
Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective de- vice that prevents the insertion of the wrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to refuel with Diesel nozzles.
If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if it is very small, it is possible that it will not be able to open the protective device. Before trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it, try a different pump or request specialist help.
If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canis- ter, the protective device will not open. One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in very slowly.
Fuel
Types of petrol
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- verter and must only be run on unleaded pet- rol. The petrol must comply with European Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN 51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re- fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of
1) Depending on country 281
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti- ated by their octane rating (RON).
The following titles appear on the corre- sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:
Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- tane unleaded petrol
We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95 octanes
You should use super petrol with a minimum of 95 octanes.
If super is not available, in an emergency you may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.
Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc- tane unleaded petrol
We recommend you use super plus 98 octane petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc- tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
If super is not available, in an emergency you may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.
Petrol additives
The quality of the fuel influences the behav- iour, power and service life of the engine. This is why the petrol you use should carry suitable additives already included by the petrol industry, free of metals. These addi- tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi- tives is not available or engine problems arise, the necessary additives must be added when refuelling .
Not all petrol additives have been shown to be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- ditives may cause significant damage to the engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- ditives should never be used. Metal additives may also be contained in petrol additives for improving anti-detonation ratings or octane ratings .
SEAT recommends genuine Volkswagen Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines. These additives can be bought at SEAT deal- ers, where information on how to use them can also be obtained.
CAUTION
Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Using them may damage the engine!
Never refuel with fuels containing a large proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85). This could damage the fuel system.
Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or fuel containing other metal additives would seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter.
Only use fuel additives that have been ap- proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti- knock additives may contain metal additives that could seriously damage the engine or the catalytic converter. These additives must not be used.
High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
Note
You may use petrol with a high octane num- ber than the one recommended for your en- gine.
In those countries where unleaded petrol is not available, you may refuel with a fuel with a low lead content.
Diesel fuel
Please note the information on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
282
Checking and refilling levels
We recommend the use of diesel fuel which complies to European standard EN 590. If diesel fuel which meets European standard EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number (CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- phur content of the fuel must be below 50 parts per million.
Winter-grade diesel
Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it is more difficult to start the engine. For this reason, petrol stations in some countries al- so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity when cold (winter-grade diesel).
Water in the fuel filter1)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is equipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa- rator, the instrument panel may display the
following warning: Water in the fuel filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop so that they can drain the fuel filter.
CAUTION
The vehicle is not designed for the use of FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would be damaged if you used biodiesel.
Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called thinners, petrol or similar additives with diesel fuel.
If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre- quently than is specified in the Maintenance Programme. We recommend having this done by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed to collect in the filter, this can cause engine performance problems.
AdBlue
Information on AdBlue
The consumption of AdBlue depends on your personal driving style, the temperature of the system and on the outdoor tempera- ture when the vehicle is used.
AdBlue freezes at temperatures of -11C (+13F). The system has heating elements that guarantee its operation even at low tem- peratures.
The AdBlue tank level capacity is approxi- mately 11 litres.
The AdBlue tank should never be empty. When the distance to empty drops below 2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue tank
will appear on the dash panel display page 283. If this information is ignored, it will later no longer be possible to re-start the engine. If this warning does not appear, it is not necessary to refill the AdBlue tank.
AdBlue is a registered brand of the German Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid).
CAUTION
Filling the AdBlue tank excessively can cause damage to the tank.
Refilling AdBlue
Fig. 222 AdBlue tank cap.
1) Valid for the market: Algeria. 283
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
Operations prior to refilling
Park the vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi- cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex- ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb, the level indicator may not detect the load properly.
If a warning message about AdBlue levels appears on the dash panel display, fill at least the minimum amount required (approx. 5 litres). Only after adding this amount will the system detect that AdBlue has been added and you will be able to start the en- gine again. The maximum amount that can be refilled is 11 litres.
Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is not switched off during refilling, the warning to refill may continue to appear on the instru- ment panel display.
Fill with a refill bottle
Only use AdBlue that complies with ISO 22241-1. Only use original containers.
Open the fuel tank cover Fig. 222.
Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an- ti-clockwise direction.
Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- tions, indicated on the refill bottle.
Check the expiry date.
Remove the cap of the refill bottle.
Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fill- er neck vertically and screw the bottle on by hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.
Press the refill bottle in the direction of the filler neck and hold it in this position.
Wait until the contents of the refill bottle have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do not compress or break the bottle!
Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise direc- tion and gently pull it upwards .
The AdBlue tank is full when no more liq- uid comes out of the bottle.
Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- tion until it is tightly closed.
Close the fuel tank flap.
Operations before driving
After refilling the tank, only switch on the ignition.
Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- onds for the system to detect the fluid load.
Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine!
Refilling AdBlue
Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- duction.
Opening the cover to the tank filling neck.
Unscrew the SCR filling neck lock cap anti- clockwise Fig. 222.
Fill with AdBlue until the filling nozzle stops the first time.
Close the SCR tube yourself, turning it clockwise until you hear a click.
WARNING
AdBlue should only be stored in the original container, which should be tightly closed and kept in a safe place.
Never keep AdBlue in empty food contain- ers, bottles or other similar containers. Other people may confuse it for other products.
Keep AdBlue out of the reach of children.
CAUTION
When filling, the handle of the filling noz- zle must be pointing downwards. Otherwise, the nozzle will not connect automatically.
Do not attempt to put more additive in after the nozzle clicks the first time. The tank could over overspill, with the AdBlue escap- ing.
Only use AdBlue that complies with ISO 22241-1. Only use original containers.
Never mix AdBlue with water, fuel or addi- tives. Any type of damage caused by such a mixture will not be covered by the warranty.
Never pour AdBlue into the fuel tank. This could result in engine damage.
Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehi- cle. If there is a leak (due to temperature
284
Checking and refilling levels
changes or damage to the bottle), the AdBlue may damage the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the refill bottle in an environment- friendly manner.
Note
You can buy refill bottles that are adequate for AdBlue use at SEAT dealerships .
285
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
Engine compartment
Checking levels
Fig. 223 Diagram for the location of the various elements.
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
Engine oil dipstick
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
Windscreen washer reservoir
1
2
3
4
5
6
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components men- tioned above. These operations are descri- bed in page 286.
Overview
You will find further explanations, instruc- tions and restrictions on the technical speci- fications as of page 305.
Work in the engine compartment
Read the additional information carefully page 11
Always be aware of the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire when working in the engine compartment (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Al- ways observe the warnings listed below and follow all general safety precautions. The en- gine compartment of the vehicle is a poten- tially hazardous area .
286
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Switch the engine off, remove the key from the ignition and apply the hand brake. If the vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox, place the selector lever in position P. Wait for the engine to cool down.
Keep children away from the engine com- partment.
Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- tion on the engine compartment, as these may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant).
Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system, especially when working on the battery.
If working inside the engine compartment, remember that, even when the ignition is switched off, the radiator fan may start up au- tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in- jury.
Never cover the engine with additional in- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of fire!
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex- pansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure.
Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick rag to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
If it is necessary to work in the engine com- partment while the engine is running, the ro- tating components (for example, poly-V belt,
alternator, radiator fan) and the high voltage ignition system are an additional hazard.
Observe the following additional warnings if work on the fuel system or the electrical system is necessary:
Always disconnect the battery from the on-board network.
Do not smoke.
Never work near naked flames.
Always keep an approved fire extinguish- er immediately available.
CAUTION
When topping up fluids make sure the correct fluid is put into the correct filler opening, oth- erwise this can cause serious malfunctions or engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle regularly so that any leaks are detected at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or other fluids in the area where it was parked, have your vehicle inspected at the workshop.
Note
In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake flu- id reservoirs are on the other side of the en- gine compartment Fig. 223.
Opening the bonnet
Read the additional information carefully page 11
The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- cle.
Check that the windscreen wiper arms are not unfolded. Otherwise the paint may be damaged.
The bonnet can only be unlocked when the driver door is open.
WARNING
Never open the bonnet if you see steam or drips of coolant being released from the en- gine compartment. Failure to comply could result in burns. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before opening the bonnet.
Closing the bonnet
Slightly lift the bonnet.
Release the bonnet stay before pressing it back into its support.
Carefully close the bonnet.
Press the bonnet down until it locks into place.
Make sure that the bonnet catches onto its clasp. Do not press down too hard .
287
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
WARNING
For safety reasons the bonnet must always be completely closed when the vehicle is moving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet, always check that the locking element is properly engaged. This is the case if the bon- net is flush with the adjacent body panels.
Should you notice that the bonnet is not safely secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident.
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- tial for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should appear on the con- tainer of the service oil; when the container displays the specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the oil can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change indicated in the Maintenance Programme, be per- formed by a technical service or specialised workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in the page 50, Oil proper- ties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis- tance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, this means that your vehicle has the LongLife service programmed. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is dependent on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been devel- oped which, depending on the characteris- tics and individual driving profiles, enable the extension of the oil change service (Long- Life service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only be used ob- serving the following indications:
Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in- tervals.
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 289 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter- vals page 50 (up to a maximum of 0.5 litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the LongLife service interval or it has been disabled (by request), you may use oils for fixed service intervals, which also appear in page 50, Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle must be serviced after a fixed in- terval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 miles) (whatever comes first) Booklet Mainte- nance Programme.
In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 289 and you can- not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can add a small quantity of oil conform- ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die- sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The Maintenance Programme states whether your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in diesel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other
288
Checking and refilling levels
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- fore:
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 289 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
Checking engine oil level
Fig. 224 Engine oil dipstick.
Read the additional information carefully page 49
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Checking oil level
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then stop.
Wait for about two minutes.
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
Then pull it out once more and check the oil level Fig. 224. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Depending on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- bly when filling the tank and before a jour- ney.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compart- ment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 286.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a Technical Service.
Topping up engine oil
Fig. 225 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
Read the additional information carefully page 49
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in Work in the engine compartment on page 287.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine compartment il- lustration page 286.
Engine oil specification page 50.
289
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and escape into the at- mosphere via the exhaust system.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the correspond- ing VW specifications and recommend keep- ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- gine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Changing engine oil
Read the additional information carefully page 49.
The engine oil must be changed at the inter- vals given in the service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.
The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings page 286.
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.
When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre- vent oil from running down your arm.
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil- dren.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine damage. Any dam- age caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
Because of disposal problems and the spe- cial tools and specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil and filter changed by a Technical Service.
Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all the engine oil.
Cooling system
Topping up coolant
Read the additional information carefully page 50
Top up coolant when the level is below the MIN (minimum) mark.
Checking coolant level
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Switch the ignition off.
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the marks. When the engine is hot, it may be slightly above the upper mark.
290
Checking and refilling levels
Topping up coolant
Wait for the engine to cool down.
Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left .
Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you could damage the engine. If there is no coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- tinue driving. You should obtain professio- nal assistance .
If there is still some coolant in the expan- sion tank, top up to the upper mark.
Top up with coolant until the level becomes stable.
Screw the cap back on correctly.
Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle straight to a specialised workshop to have the cooling system examined. If there are no leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of coolant can only occur if the coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating.
WARNING
The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of burns!
The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze should be stored in the original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
If working inside the engine compartment, remember that, even when the ignition is switched off, the radiator fan may start up au- tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in- jury.
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool- ant system, the engine may fail leading to se- rious damage.
Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with respect to the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehicle is to be used.
When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle would be immobilised. In this case, the heat- ing would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.
CAUTION
Do not top up the expansion tank with cool- ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter the cooling system. In this case, stop driving. Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to the engine and the engine cooling system.
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur- ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates that the G13 additive has been mixed with an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to the environment.
Brake fluid
Topping up brake fluid
Read the additional information carefully page 51
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX markings.
291
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
However, if the brake fluid level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. Seek specialist assistance. A warn- ing light on the instrument panel display monitors the brake fluid level page 110.
In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid reservoir is on the other side of the engine compartment.
Changing brake fluid
The regular intervals at which the brake fluid should be replaced are listed in the Mainte- nance Programme. We recommend you have it replaced at a SEAT Official Service, during an Inspection Service.
WARNING
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
If the brake fluid is left in the system for too long and the brakes are subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the brake system. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
CAUTION
Brake fluid should not come into contact with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Checking and topping up the wind- screen washer reservoir
Read the additional information carefully page 51
Check the water level in the windscreen washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- quired.
The container for the windscreen washer con- tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen, the rear window and the headlight washer system*.
Open the bonnet page 286.
The windscreen washer reservoir is marked with the symbol on the cap.
Check there is enough windscreen water in the reservoir.
Recommended windscreen wipers
For the hottest seasons we recommend summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- ter).
All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. Approximate proportion of the winter mixture, up to -18C (0F): 1:2 (1 part con- centrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4
proportion of mixture in the washer fluid tank.
Capacity
The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres in versions without headlight washer and 5 li- tres in versions with headlight washer.
WARNING
If the water from the windscreen washer does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze on the windscreen and rear window, reducing forward and rear visibility.
In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough anti-freeze.
In cold conditions, you should not use the windscreen wiper system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the ventilation system. The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.
WARNING
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other similar additives with the windscreen washer water. A greasy layer may be formed on the windscreen which will impair visibility.
Use clean water with a window cleaner rec- ommended by SEAT.
If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to the water in the reservoir.
292
Checking and refilling levels
CAUTION
Do not mix cleaning products recommen- ded by SEAT with other products. This could lead to flocculation and may block the wind- screen washer jets.
When topping up service fluids, make abso- lutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!
Not having windscreen wiper fluid reduces visibility through the windscreen, and leads to loss of visibility in headlights in models with headlight washer.
Battery
General information
Read the additional information carefully page 51.
The battery is located in the engine compart- ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is checked as part of the Inspection Service. Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean and have the correct tightening torque, espe- cially in summer and winter.
Disconnecting the battery
The battery should only be disconnected in exceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
connected, some of the vehicle's functions are lost ( table on page 293). These functions will require resetting after the bat- tery is reconnected.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
Function Reprogramming
One-touch function of the electric windows
page 132, One-touch opening and closing.
Remote control key
If the vehicle does not re- spond to the key, they should be synchronised page 124.
Digital clock page 108.
ESC warning lamp After driving for a few me- tres, the warning lamp goes out again.
If the vehicle is not used for long periods
The vehicle has a system for monitoring the current consumption when the engine is left unused for long periods of time page 279. Some functions, such as the interior lights, or the remote door opening, may be temporarily disabled to prevent the battery from running flat. These functions will come back on as soon as the ignition is switched on and the engine started.
Winter conditions
During the winter, the starting power may be reduced, and if necessary, the battery should be charged in Important safety warn- ings for handling a vehicle battery on page 294
Important safety warnings for han- dling a vehicle battery
All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official Service or a workshop specialising in batter- ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!
The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the fluid level of the battery. Other- wise explosive gas is released from the bat- tery that could cause an explosion.
Wear eye protection.
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. In the event of electrolyte splashes, rinse off with plenty of water.
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro- hibited.
The battery should only be charged in a well-ven- tilated zone. Risk of explosion!
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
293
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
WARNING
When repairing or working on the electrical system, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the key from the ignition. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected.
2. When the repair is finished, reconnect the negative pole of the battery.
Switch off all electrical devices before re- connecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Ensure that the vent hose is always connec- ted to the battery.
Never use damaged batteries. This could cause an explosion! Replace a damaged bat- tery immediately.
CAUTION
Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic components.
Charging the battery
Terminals for charging the battery are fitted in the engine compartment.
Note the warnings in Important safety warnings for handling a vehicle battery on page 294 and .
Switch off all electrical devices. Remove the ignition key.
Raise the bonnet page 287.
Open the battery cover.
Connect the charger clamps as described to the positive pole of the battery (+) and exclusively to an earth on the bodywork ().
Only use a charger which is compatible for use with 12 V nominal voltage batteries. The charge must not exceed a voltage of 15 V.
Now connect the battery charger to the power socket and switch on.
After charging the battery: switch off the battery charger and disconnect the power socket cable.
Finally disconnect the charger cables from the battery.
Replace the battery cover correctly.
Close the bonnet page 287.
Important: Before you charge the battery make sure you read the manufacturer's in- structions for using the battery charger.
WARNING
Never charge a battery that has frozen: re- place battery! Failure to do so may lead to an explosion.
Note
Use only the terminals in the engine compart- ment to charge the battery.
Replacing the battery
The new battery should have the same speci- fications (amperage, load and voltage) as the used battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy page 279. The power management function ensures that the battery is charged much more effi- ciently than on vehicles without a power management system. To maintain this func- tion after replacing the battery, we recom- mend that the replacement battery used is of the same make and type as the original fitted battery. To make proper use of the power management function after the battery has been changed, have the battery coded to the power management mode at a specialised workshop.
294
Wheels
CAUTION
Some vehicles, for example those with the Start-Stop system* are fitted with a special battery (AGM-type or EFB-type battery). If any other type of battery is fitted, the Start-Stop function may be considerably reduced and the vehicle may not stop on repeated occa- sions.
Make sure that the vent hose is always at- tached to the original opening on the side of the battery. Gases or battery acid can other- wise escape and possibly cause damage.
The battery holder and clamps must always be correctly secured.
Before starting any work on the battery, al- ways observe the warnings listed under page 293, Important safety warnings for handling a vehicle battery.
Do not forget to replace the battery cover- ings, where applicable. It is a protection for high temperatures. This in turn extends the vehicle service life.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances includ- ing sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. Make sure disconnected batteries cannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!
Wheels
Wheels and tyres
General notes
When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the obstacle.
Check from time to time if the tyres are damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or dents). Remove any foreign objects embed- ded in the treads.
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- placed immediately.
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Replace any missing valve caps as soon as possible.
Mark the wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back.
When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
New tyres
New tyres do not give maximum grip straight away and should therefore be run in by
driving carefully and at moderate speeds for about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will also increase the useful life of the tyres.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- cording to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed immediately if there is any reason to suspect that damage may have occurred. Inspect the tyres for damage. If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the near- est specialised workshop and have the car inspected.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ways note the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan- ing, excessive noise and wear.
Retrofitting accessories
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or wheel trims, we recommend that you consult with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice regarding current techniques.
295
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
Tyre useful life
Fig. 226 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- ing habits will increase the useful life of your tyres.
Check tyre pressure at least once a month, and also prior to any long trip.
The tyre pressure should only be checked when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the pressure of warm tyres.
Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- ried by the vehicle.
In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, save the modified pressure of tyres page 299, page 296.
Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from time to time.
The useful life of your tyres depends on the following factors:
Tyre pressure
The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a sticker on the rear of the front left door frame Fig. 226.
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- rect inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds.
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- ing comfort (tyre pressure ). When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption may increase slightly.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehi- cle is going to carry the maximum load, the tyre pressure should be increased to the max- imum value indicated on the sticker Fig. 226.
Do not forget the spare wheel when checking the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-
flated to the highest pressure required for the road wheels.
In the case of a minimised temporary spare wheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure la- bel Fig. 226.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre wear.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- brations in the steering wheel.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Offi- cial Service.
296
Wheels
WARNING
Always adapt the tyre pressure accordingly when the vehicle load changes.
A tyre with low air pressure has to flex a lot more when the vehicle is heavily loaded or at high speeds, therefore causing overheating to occur. Under these conditions, the tyre bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.
Wear indicators
Fig. 227 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators
Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is worn.
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators running across the tread. Depending on the manufac- turer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced at equal distances around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or a triangle) indicate the positions of the tread wear indicators.
The minimum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators). (Different fig- ures may apply in other countries.)
WARNING
The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indi- cators. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident.
Especially in difficult driving conditions such as wet or icy roads. It is important that the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be approximately the same on the tyres of both the front and the rear axles.
The scant driving safety due to insufficient tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle handling, when there is a risk of aquaplan- ing in deep puddles of water and when driv- ing through corners, and braking is also ad- versely affected.
The speed has to be adapted accordingly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control over the vehicle.
Changing wheels
Fig. 228 Interchanging tyres.
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres the wheels should be changed round from time to time according to the system Fig. 228. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.
New tyres or new wheels
All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and preferably the same tread pattern.
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both rear tyres together).
Do not use tyres whose effective size ex- ceeds the dimensions of the factory-ap- proved makes of tyre.
297
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims or tyres different to those installed in manu- facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of- ficial Service before purchasing them.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good roadholding and safe handling .
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC document1)). The vehicle documentation varies depending on the country of resi- dence.
A knowledge of tyre designations makes it easier to choose the correct tyres. The follow- ing wording can be read on the sides of the tyre:
215/60 R16 95V This contains the following information:
215 Tyre width in mm
60 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
16 Rim diameter in inches
95 Load rating code
V Speed index
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner part):
DOT ... 2212 ... it means, for example, that the tyre was man- ufactured in the 22nd week of 2012.
But note that with some types of tyre, the ac- tual tyre size can differ from the nominal size marked on the tyre (for instance 215/60 R16 95 V), and there may be significant differen- ces in the contours of the tyres, even though the tyres are marked with the same nominal size. When replacing the tyres, it is therefore important to make sure that the actual size of the new tyres does not exceed the dimen- sions of the factory-approved makes of tyre.
Failure to observe this requirement can af- fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If the tyres rub against the bodywork, in certain circumstances the tyres, running gear or bodywork and pipes may be damaged, and vehicle safety could be severely impaired .
If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT you can be sure that the actual tyre dimen- sions will be correct for your vehicle. If you
decide to fit a different type of tyre, you must obtain the appropriate manufacturer's certif- icate from the tyre retailer to confirm that the tyres are suitable for your vehicle. Keep this certificate in a safe place.
Your SEAT Official Service will be able to ad- vise you on which tyres may be fitted to your vehicle.
It is best to have all servicing of wheels and tyres performed by a specialised workshop. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- posing of the old tyres respecting the envi- ronment.
WARNING
It is very important to ensure that the tyres you have chosen have adequate clearance. When selecting replacement tyres, do not re- ly entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the tyre, since the effective tyre size can dif- fer significantly depending on the manufac- turer. Inadequate tyre clearance can result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle, causing a serious safety risk. Risk of accident! It may also invalidate the vehicle's registration for use on public roads.
1) COC = certificate of conformity. 298
Wheels
Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna- tive, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times.
If wheel trims are fitted after the car is pur- chased, ensure that there is an adequate flow of air for cooling the brake system.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note
A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted to find out whether wheels or tyres of differ- ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about the com- binations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
Never mount used tyres if you are not sure of their previous history.
For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehi- cles. In some cases, this may also be true for the same model of wheel.
Wheel bolts
The wheel bolts are matched to the rims. When installing different wheels (for instance alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use the correct wheel bolts with
the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- curely and that the brake system functions correctly.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi- ly.
A special adapter is required to turn the anti- theft wheel bolts* page 56.
Tyre monitoring systems
Introduction
WARNING
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to tread separation or even to a blow-out.
Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure they are maintained at the pressures indica- ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause overheating, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres.
Tyre pressure should be that indicated on the label when the tyres are cold at all times page 307.
Regularly check the cold inflation pressure of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are cold.
Regularly check your tyres for damage and wear.
Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Note
Driving for the first time with new tyres at a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- pand, which could then produce an air pres- sure warning.
Only replace used tyres with those author- ised by SEAT for the corresponding type vehi- cle.
Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys- tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is correct and that the tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects from the tyres only when they have not pierced the tyres.
299
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
Tyre monitoring indicator
If a light appears
The pressure in one or more tyres has clearly reduced in comparison to the tyre pressure set by the driver or the tyre has structural damage.
Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a text message can be seen on the instrument panel display. Stop! Reduce speed immediately! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking! Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any damaged tyres.
If flashing
System malfunction
The control lamp flashes for approximately one minute and then lights up permanently. If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and on again. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre moni- toring indicator can be calibrated. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.
Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on while the function is verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.
WARNING
When the tyres are inflated at different pres- sures or at a pressure that is too low then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of
control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal accident.
If the warning lamp lights up, stop im- mediately and check the tyres.
If the tyres are inflated at different pres- sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will increase tyre wear, negatively affecting vehi- cle stability and increasing braking distan- ces.
If tyres are inflated at different pressures or a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam- aged and burst resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle.
The driver is responsible for ensuring that all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated to the right pressure. The recommended tyre pressure is indicated on the label page 307.
The tyre monitoring system can only oper- ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to the correct pressure when cold.
Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure can damage them and result in an accident. Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyres correspond to the vehicle load.
Before starting a journey, always inflate tyres to the correct pressure.
Tyres with insufficient pressure are subjec- ted to more flexing. Due to this, the tyre could become excessively hot, causing tread separation and also tyre blow-out.
With an overloaded vehicle at high speed, the tyres can overheat and burst resulting in a loss of vehicle control.
Tyre pressures which are too high or too low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect- ing vehicle performance.
If a tyre has not been punctured and it does not have to be changed immediately, drive to the nearest specialised workshop at a moder- ate speed and have the tyre checked and in- flated to the correct pressure.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings in Warning and control lamps on page 111.
Note
If excessively low tyre pressure is detected with the ignition on, an audible warning will sound. In the event that there is a fault in the system, an audible warning will sound.
Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of time or driving in a sporty style can tempora- rily deactivate the TPMS. The control lamp shows a fault, but disappears when road con- ditions or the driving style change.
300
Wheels
Tyre monitoring indicator
Fig. 229 Instrument panel: warning of loss of tyre pressure.
The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel revolutions and, with this information, the tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If the rolling circumference of one or more wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring in- dicator will indicate this on the instrument panel through a warning lamp and a warning to the driver Fig. 229. When only one spe- cific tyre is affected, its position within the vehicle will be indicated.
Loss of pressure: Check left tyre pressure!
Wheel tread change
The wheel tread changes when:
Tyre pressure is manually changed
Tyre pressure is insufficient
Tyre structure is damaged
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load
The wheels on an axle are subject to a heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains
The temporary spare wheel is fitted
The wheel on one axle is changed
There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre monitoring indicator or it may not in- dicate anything under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un- paved roads, or when driving with snow chains).
Calibrating the tyre monitoring indica- tor
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-
cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for example, when the front and rear wheels are swapped.
Switch the ignition on.
Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy Connect system1) by using the button and the SETUP function button page 27.
When driving, the system self-calibrates the tyre pressure provided by the driver and the wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied speeds the programmed values are collected and monitored.
With the wheels under very heavy loads, the tyre pressure must be increased to the total recommended tyre pressure before the cali- bration page 307.
Note
The tyre monitoring indicator does not function when there is a fault in the ESC or ABS page 177.
An erroneous indication may be given when snow chains are in use because they increase the tread of the wheel.
1) In vehicles that are not equipped with the Easy Connect system, the switch for adjusting tyre pres- sure is located in the centre console next to the haz- ard warning lights.
301
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
Temporary spare wheel
General information
Fig. 230 Compact temporary spare wheel: raised floor panel.
The temporary spare wheel has been de- signed to be used for short periods of time. Have the tyres checked and replaced as soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or at a specialised workshop.
Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary spare wheel. The compact temporary spare wheel is de- signed specifically for this model. For this reason, do not use a temporary spare wheel from a different type of vehicle.
Removing the temporary spare wheel
Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the temporary spare wheel.
Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise Fig. 230.
Take out the temporary spare wheel.
Chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punc- tured front wheel with this wheel.
WARNING
After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. Failure to do so may cause an accident. The tyre inflation pressures can be found on the rear of the front left door frame Fig. 226.
Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident!
Never travel more than 200 km using a tem- porary spare wheel.
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident!
Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off.
Extraction of the spare wheel in vehi- cles with SEAT SOUND 10 speakers (with subwoofer)*
Fig. 231 In the luggage compartment: re- move the subwoofer.
To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- move the subwoofer.
302
Wheels
Lift and secure the luggage compartment floor as described in page 157.
Disconnect the subwoofer Fig. 231 1
speaker cable.
Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- wise direction Fig. 231 2 .
Remove the subwoofer speaker and the spare wheel.
When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with care. When doing so, the tip of the FRONT arrow on the subwoofer should point for- ward.
Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place.
Winter service
Winter tyres
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Only use winter tyres that are approved for your vehicle.
Please note that the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres.
Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef- fective when the tread is worn down.
After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. When doing so, take into account the correct tyre pressures listed on the rear of the front left door frame page 296.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will considerably improve vehicle handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehi- cles equipped with wide section tyres or with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on the sidewall).
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these tyres are specified in the vehicle's docu- ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)). The vehicle documentation varies de- pending on the country of residence. See al- so page 297.
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- ties when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.
The performance of winter tyres is also se- verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is still much deeper than 4 mm.
Winter tyres are subject to the following max- imum speed limits according to speed rating code letter:
Speed rating code letter page 297
Maximum speed limit
Q 160 km/h (100 mph)
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph) (please note relevant restrictions)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds must have an appropriate sticker attached so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers are available from the SEAT Official Service and specialised workshop. Please note the regulations to this effect in your country.
All-weather tyres can also be used instead of winter tyres.
1) COC = certificate of conformity. 303
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Advice
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres with the letter V is subject to technical re- strictions; the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle may be significantly lower. The maximum speed limit for these tyres de- pends directly on the maximum axle weights for your car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres being used.
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to check the maximum speed which is permissi- ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis of this information.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
Summer tyres should be fitted again as soon as possible after the winter period; they give better handling on roads which are free of snow and ice. Summer tyres perform with less rolling noise, tyre wear and most im- portant reduce fuel consumption.
304
Technical specifications
Technical data
Technical specifications
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation always takes precedence over the informa- tion in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu- ded in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fitted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi- cations section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine power.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.
RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data
Fig. 232 Vehicle data sticker (luggage com- partment).
Fig. 233 Chassis number.
VIN in the Easy Connect
Select: button > function button SETUP > Service > Vehicle identification number.
Chassis number
The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on the vehicle data sticker and under the wind- screen, on the driver side Fig. 233. Addi- tionally, the chassis number is located in the engine compartment, on the left-hand side looking in the car's direction of travel. The number is engraved on the top side rail, and is partially covered.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the right side door pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun- tries do not have a type plate.
305
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Technical data
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker is under the carpet trim in the luggage compartment, in the spare wheel well. A sticker with the vehicle data is attached to the inside cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: Fig. 232
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine type, finish, engine power and gearbox type
Engine code, gearbox code, external paint code and internal equipment code
Optional extras and PR numbers
Identifying letters
The identifying letters of the engine can be viewed on the instrument panel when the en- gine is switched off and the ignition is on.
Hold down the 0.0/SET 4 Fig. 117 but- ton for more than 15 seconds.
1
2
3
4
Information on fuel consump- tion
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised by certified EU laboratories, according to the legislation in force at the time (for more infor- mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: Eu- ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- cle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend on the equipment/features of each individual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environmental conditions, load or number of passengers.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors mentioned here, consumption values can dif- fer from those calculated in the current Euro- pean regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
Special versions, optional equipment fittings or retro-fitting accessories will increase the weight of the vehicle .
WARNING
Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- cident. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and require- ments.
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per- missible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteris- tics of the vehicle may change, which could lead to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
306
Technical specifications
Trailer mode
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- proved are selected in intensive trials accord- ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different in other countries. All data in the official vehi- cle documentation takes precedence over these data at all times .
Drawbar loads
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex- ceed 85 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approaching the maxi- mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer weight is legally required for the drawbar load.
WARNING
For safety reasons, you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer. This also applies in countries where higher speeds are permitted.
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is excee- ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the rear of the front left door frame. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly raised pres- sures of warm tyres must not be reduced.
The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer tyres.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only for the following tyres:
215/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
215/55 R17 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
215/50 R18 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
Other dimensions do not allow chains
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im- portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
307
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Technical data
Engine data
Petrol engine 1.0 85 kW (115 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
Top speed (km/h) 183 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.0
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,280
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 940
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940
Permitted roof load (kg) 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,500
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,300
308
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.4 110 kW (150 PS) Start-Stop ACT
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights 2WD Manual 2WD Automatic 4WD Manual 4WD Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 201 (5) 198 (6) 192 (5) 189 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.9 6.0 6.0 a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.5 8.6 9.0 8.9
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,900 1,920 2,000 2,010
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,359 1,375 1,460 1,476
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 970 990 1,000 1,010
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 980 980 1,050 1,050
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670 680 730 730
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,850 1,800 1,950 1,950
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,800 1,600 1,900 1,900
a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.
309
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Technical data
Diesel engine 2.0 81 kW (110 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
81 (110)/3,100-4,500 250/1,500-3,000 4/1,968 Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CZ
Outputs and weights Manual
Top speed (km/h) 180
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a)
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,940
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,412
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,060
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 930
Permitted roof load (kg) 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 700
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500
a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.
310
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 85 kW (115 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
85 (115)/3,250-4,000 250/1,500-3,250 4/1,598 Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CZ
Outputs and weights
Top speed (km/h) 184 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.5
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,910
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,375
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,030
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 930
Permitted roof load (kg) 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 680
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500
311
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Technical data
Diesel engine 2.0 105 kW (143 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
105 (143)/3,500-4,000 320/1,750-3,000 4/1,968 Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CZ
Outputs and weights Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 197
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a)
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,970
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,435
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,080
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940
Permitted roof load (kg) 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 710
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,900
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,800
a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.
312
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 110 kW (150 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
110 (150)/3,500-4,000 340/1,750-3,000 4/1,968 Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CZ
Outputs and weights 2WD 2WD Automatic 4WD
Top speed (km/h) 202 (6) 201 (6) 196 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a) a) 6.0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.5 8.5 9.0
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,950 1,970 2,100
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,417 1,446 1,548
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,060 1,090 1,080
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940 930 1,070
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 700 720 750
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,900 1,900 2,000
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,900 1,900 2,000
a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.
313
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Technical data
Diesel engine 2.0 140 kW (190 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
140 (190)/3,500-4,000 400/1,750-3,250 4/1,968 Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CZ
Outputs and weights 4WD Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 212 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.5
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,130
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,589
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,120
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,060
Permitted roof load (kg) 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 2,100
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 2,100
314
Technical specifications
Dimensions
Fig. 234 Dimensions
Fig. 235 Angles and ground clearance
315
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a A
dv ic
e O
pe ra
ti on
Em er
ge nc
ie s
S af
et y
Technical data
Fig. 234, Fig. 235 2WD 4WD
A Front projection (mm) 868 868
B Rear projection (mm) 857 865
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,638 2,630
D Length (mm) 4,363
E Fronta) track (mm) 1,576 1,572
F Backa) track (mm) 1,541 1,544
G Width (mm) 1,841
H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,601b)
1,615c) 1,611b)
1,625c)
I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 176 189
J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.4 maximum 20.6
K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 27.9 maximum 25.5
Turning radius (m) 10.8
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. b) Distance to the roof. c) Dimension to the roof bars.
316
Index
Index
A ABS
see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 269 Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 warning and control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Adaptive Cruise Control deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
AdBlue information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro- gramme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adjusting front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adjusting the head restraints front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Adjustment CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 147 seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 75
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 77 functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Air conditioning Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 160 heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 User instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Air conditioning system auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Alcantara: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 86 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 86
Check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Anti-slip regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 125
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 116, 123 Anti-theft system
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Anti-trap function sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Area view system (Top View Camera) . . . . . . . . . 251 instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Aspects to take into account before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Assistance systems ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 area view system (Top View Camera) . . . . . . . 251 Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis-
tance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Assistance Systems fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Assist systems
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 parking system Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
317
Index
Audible signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Audible warning signal seat belt not fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Automatic car washes
switching the Auto Hold function off . . . . . . . . 196 Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Automatic gear
safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
backup programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 launch control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 steering wheel with gearshift paddles . . . . . . 183 tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 183 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 electric consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
B Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
replacement in the remote control (auxiliary heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Bicycle rack
Fitting on the retractable tow hitch . . . . . . . . . 262 maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 indication in the external rear view mirror . . . 225 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 286 opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Brake emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Braking front assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
BSD see Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
C Camera
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 windscreen washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Car-care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 CD-ROM player (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Central locking
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Changing
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
318
Index
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Changing bulbs number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Changing gear engaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 180
Changing settings CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Child-proof locking
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Child seat
categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 83
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 82 securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 23
City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 carbon parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Easy Connect control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 exhaust pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274 radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Control and warning lamps
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 remote control (auxiliary heater) . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Control lamps blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 parking assistant (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Controls and displays general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Controls on the steering wheel operating the audio system and telephone . . 113
Coolant checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
cooling system checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Cooling system Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 197 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 warning and indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
D Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 16 Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Defective bulbs
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Diesel
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Diesel particulate filter malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Direction of rotation
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107 Display messages
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
319
Index
Display of traffic signs on the instrument panel activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Disposal seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Distance control see Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Doors
childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 65, 66, 67 Driver information system
CD/radio indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 operation with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . 30
Driving driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Driving abroad headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Driving in winter trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
E E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 112 Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Economical
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 EDL
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Efficiency programme
additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 130 convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 131
Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . . . 177 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 187 bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 see Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Emergency operation
passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emission control system control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Engine
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 starting up (driver messages with the mechan-
ical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 switching off (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Engine and ignition automatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 172 stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 286 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 293 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 291
320
Index
closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 290 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 289 opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Engine fault
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 288
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 290 checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Environment ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Environmental tips filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 269
ESC electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 177 multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Exhaust gas purification system
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Exhaust gas purification system (diesel) . . . . . . 283 Exhaust pipe: Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . . 242 Exterior lighting
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Exterior mirrors
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Exterior rear view mirrors exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 6 External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
F Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Four-wheel drive
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 77 Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Front assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 215 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 temporarily switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 see also Front Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Front Assist monitoring system malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Front Assist Monitoring system City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 215 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Front Assist Monitoring System system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Front Assist system temporarily switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Front passenger front airbag control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 80
Front seat manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 281 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fuel consumption switching off using inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 190
Fuel tank cap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
321
Index
Fuel tank flap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Full-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Function Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Function Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 93
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95 identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
G Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Gearbox DSG
see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 183 General instrument panel
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
H Hand brake
see Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 139
HDC see Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 72 Head-protection airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Headlights
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Hill Descent Control
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
I Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 169 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 169
see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Indications on display
traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Indications on the
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 181 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 33
Indications on the screen SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107 instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
322
Index
Interior view left guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 22 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 86
mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
K Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Keyless-Entry
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Keyless-Exit
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Keyless Access
Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 120
Keyless Access locking and ignition system see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Keys assign key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 car key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 driver messages (mechanical contact) . . . . . . 169 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 118
Kick-down automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Knee airbags safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
L Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
cleaning the camera area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Lane Assist system
see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Launch control programme (automatic gearbox) 185 Leather: care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 135
audible signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 lighting of the switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Load compartment in the luggage compartment see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 152
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Loading the vehicle
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 154 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Locking and unlocking in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
automatic lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 157 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 special characteristics of the electric rear lid . 128 storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 unlocking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 see also Loading the luggage compartment . 152
Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . . 157 Luggage net
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
M Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
323
Index
Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Main panel
turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 135 maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 malfunction
Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Malfunction
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 front assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Maximum trailer weight
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
N Natural leather
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Navigation system
CD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Net bag
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Noises adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 295
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
O Octane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 On-screen messages
Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 One-touch opening and closing
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
rear lid with electric opening and closing . . . . 127 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 rear lid of the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 10
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Opening manually rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operating malfunction Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
P Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Paintwork code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Panoramic sliding sunroof convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 131 see also Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 automatic braking intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . . . 242 driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 exiting a parking space (only for parallel
spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 perpendicular parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 stopping prematurely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 184 with Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Parking aid rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
324
Index
Parking Aid adjusting the display and audible warn-
ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 250 automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 251 sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 250
Parking aid system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 248
Parking assistance parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Parking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Parking assistant (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 automatic release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Parking distance warning system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 248
Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 ParkPilot
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 248 Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 65, 66, 67 Passenger door manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Pedestrian protection
see Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . 216
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274 Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Positioning seat belts
during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Power sockets
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Power steering
see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Pre-heating system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Press & Drive
starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Puncture action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
R Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 213 Radio-operated remote control
see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Radio display: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
control of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 RCTA
see Parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Rear headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Rear bulbs in the side panel
disassemble the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 11
see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Rear lights in the rear lid
disassemble de bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Rear seat backrest
folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 folding down and lifting the backrest . . . . . . . 149 lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Rear seat passengers see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 65, 66, 67
Rear shelf storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Rear view mirror
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Rear view mirrors
adjusting the exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . 145 Refuelling
opening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Remote control key
unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Remote control (auxiliary heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Removing and installing head restraints . . . . . . 147 Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
325
Index
Replacing the battery of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Retrofitting
towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107 Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Rims
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Roll-back function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Roof luggage rack
attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 RTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Running-in
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Running in
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
S safe
driving safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Safelock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
see also Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . 116 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 16 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Safety information knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Safety instructions head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 82
Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Safety notes
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Saving fuel inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Saving tips (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Seat
electric seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Seat belt position for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 73 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 75 safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 74 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Seats
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Selective catalytic reduction see Exhaust gas purification system (diesel) . 283
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Selector lever (automatic gearbox) malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Side airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Side Assist PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 see Side Assist PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Sliding panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 307
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Special characteristics
Area View system (Top View Camera) . . . . . . . 254 high-pressure cleaning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 91
Special Characteristics trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 198 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer . . 266 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
326
Index
Start-Stop system driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 192 switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Start-Stop System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Steering
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 engaging the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Steering wheel adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . 183 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Storage area
front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Storing objects
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Sun blinds
anti-trap function (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Switch
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Switching off the engine
with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 24, 169 System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
T Tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . . . 154 tail light
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Technical data capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Tightening torques of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 180, 183 Tire Mobility Set
inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 23 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 23 Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Top View Camera
see Area view system (Top View Camera) . . . . 251 Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tow hitch control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 electrical unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Towing blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 also see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 electrical unlocking tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 fitting a bicycle rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 89, 90 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 front towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 rear towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 91 tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 towing not allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 with towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 86 Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 264 Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must be
switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
327
Index
Traffic Sign Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Traffic signs indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 anti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 hooking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 maximum trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 rear LED lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 264 rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 264 retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer 266 technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 264 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 unlocking the electrical unlocking tow hitch . 261 vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . 259, 265
Trailer mode also see towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 see Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Transporting items fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Transporting objects loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 154 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Trim parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Trims
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tyre Mobility System see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Tyre monitoring systems
tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 58 with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
U Unfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 73 Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Upholstery: cleaning alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Vehicle
chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 293
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
328
Index
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Vehicle care natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 62
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 127 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Vertical load on the trailer coupling
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
W Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 110
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 212 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 191 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 for seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41 instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Warning lamps speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Warning symbols see Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Wheel
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Wheel cover removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 307 central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 57 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Windows
electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 130 removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 windscreen and rear window wiper blades
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 88
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 143 Windscreen washer water
capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys- tems service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Winter conditions battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 defrosting the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Winter driving sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Winter operation headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
X XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
329
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer- tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the ATECA range, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modied depend- ing on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertis- ing.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment tted in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- cept when otherwise indicated.
The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function- alities better. It does not replace the instruc- tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.
The equipment marked with an aster- isk* is tted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow- ing page.
Important warnings on a given page
Detailed contents on a given page
General information on a given page
Emergency information on a given page
Audiovisual material on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- mation on safety. They warn you about possi- ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- vant information concerning environmental protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio- nal information.
This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:
1. The essentials
2. Safety
3. Emergencies
4. Operation
5. Tips
6. Technical data
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly nd the information you require.
OWNERS MANUAL
Ateca
57 50 12 72 0B C
In gl
s 5
75 01
27 20
B C
( 11
.1 6)
A te
ca
In g
Related manuals for Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Ateca Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Ateca as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Ateca. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Ateca Edition 11.16 2016 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.